فَاِنۡ
Appears 81 times in Quran
Occurrences in Quran
Found 50 verses containing "فَاِنۡ".
فَاِنۡ لَّمۡ تَفۡعَلُوۡا وَلَنۡ تَفۡعَلُوۡا فَاتَّقُوا النَّارَ الَّتِیۡ وَقُوۡدُہَا النَّاسُ وَالۡحِجَارَۃُ ۖ اُعِدَّتۡ لِلۡکٰفِرِیۡنَ
3:11; 66:7.
اَلنَّاس (an-Nas) 即人与 اَلْحِجَارَة (al-Hijarah) 即石。这些词也可以理解为意指地狱中的两类犯人: اَلنَّاس 可指那些心中尚保留有对主的某些爱的不信教的人, 而 اَلْحِجَارَة 是指那些心中对主毫无爱的人们。那样的人确实就是石块。这个词是 حَجَرْ (Hajar) 的复数。حَجَرْ 的意思是:一块石头; 一块岩石; 金子, 也可以是一个无比的人, 即大人物; 领袖 (Lane)。
“燃料” 这个词, 可以理解为比喻的意义, 意为偶像崇拜会引起火狱的刑罚。因此, 偶像好像火狱中的燃料, 使火狱得到燃料而存在。或者说,”石块” 意味着偶像, 是偶像崇拜者的神, 旨在使他们亲眼看到他们的神在火狱中而羞辱偶像崇拜者。
یہاں سوال پیدا ہوتا ہے کہ پتھر تو بے جان چیز ہیں پھر انہیں آگ میں کیوں ڈالا جائے گا؟ اس کا جواب یہ ہے کہ حِجَارَۃٌ سے مراد وہ بت ہیں جن کو کفار خدائی صفات دیتے تھے۔ بے شک بے جان ہونے کی وجہ سے پتھروں کو تو کوئی سزا نہیں ملے گی‘ مگر اپنے معبودوں کو جہنم میں پڑا دیکھ کر ان لوگوں کو سزا ملے گی جو ان پر ایمان لائے تھے۔ اور اگر حِجَارَۃٌ سے عام پتھر مراد لئے جائیں تو اس سے پتھر کا کوئلہ مراد لیا جائے گا‘ جس سے آگ زیادہ تیز ہوتی ہے۔
3:11; 66:7.
The word "fuel" may be taken in a figurative sense, meaning that the punishment of Hell is caused by idol-worship. So the idols are like fuel for hell-fire being a means of bringing it into existence. Or, "stones" mean idols which the idolaters worship as gods, the idea being that the idolaters will be humiliated by witnessing that their gods were cast into the fire.
The words an-Nas (men) and al-Hijarah (stones) may also be taken as indicating two classes of inmates of Hell; an-Nas may denote those disbelievers who retain something of the love of God, and al-Hijarah (stones), those who have no love left for God in their hearts. Such men are indeed no better than stones. The word is plural of Hajar which means, a stone; a rock; gold, and also one unequalled, i.e. big man; a leader (Lane).
3:11; 66:7.
Important Words:
الحجارة (stones) is the plural of الحجر (a stone) which is derived from the verb حجر which means, he or it prevented or hindered or resisted. A stone is called حجر because it resists pressure owing to its hardness. الحجر also means, a rock or a great mass of stone; a metal as gold and silver which both together are sometimes called الحجران i.e. the two metals (Lane). Thus coal (not charcoal) would also be looked upon as حجر. The word حجارة may also be used metaphorically for idols made of stone or metal (Kashshaf).
اعدت (prepared) is derived from اعد which again is derived from عد which means, he considered or he counted. اعد means, he prepared a thing and made or kept it ready (Aqrab).
Commentary:
The verse says that if the opponents of Islam are not able to produce the like of the Quran as demanded in the previous verse, they should understand that it is the word of God and that they are not opposing a man but God Himself; they should, therefore, be ready to suffer the lot of those who oppose Divine will.
The clause, and never shall you do it, signifies that the disbelievers knew that the idols had no power of revealing anything; so they would never call upon the idols to help them.
The word "fuel" may also be taken in a figurative sense, in which case the meaning would be that the punishment of Hell is caused by idol-worship. So the idols are like fuel for hellfire, being a means of bringing it into existence. The words الناس (men) and الحجارة (stones) may also be taken as indicating two classes of inmates of Hell. The word الناس (men) which, according to its root, signifies love, has been used to denote those disbelievers who may be called human in so far as they still retain something of the love of God which distinguishes human beings from stones. But the other disbelievers are called الحجارة (stones), for they have no love left for God. Such men are indeed no better than stones.
Though this verse speaks of fire and stones, it should be remembered that what is called the next world is not a material world. In fact, expressions used in the Quran to denote rewards and punishment should not be taken literally but metaphorically. It should also be noted that the punishment of the next world is not everlasting. According to Islam, Hell is not eternal. It is only a reformatory. The subject will be discussed later in its proper place.
a
3:11; 66:7.
29R
اَلنَّاس (an-Nas) 即人与 اَلْحِجَارَة (al-Hijarah) 即石。这些词也可以理解为意指地狱中的两类犯人: اَلنَّاس 可指那些心中尚保留有对主的某些爱的不信教的人, 而 اَلْحِجَارَة 是指那些心中对主毫无爱的人们。那样的人确实就是石块。这个词是 حَجَرْ (Hajar) 的复数。حَجَرْ 的意思是:一块石头; 一块岩石; 金子, 也可以是一个无比的人, 即大人物; 领袖 (Lane)。
29S
“燃料” 这个词, 可以理解为比喻的意义, 意为偶像崇拜会引起火狱的刑罚。因此, 偶像好像火狱中的燃料, 使火狱得到燃料而存在。或者说,”石块” 意味着偶像, 是偶像崇拜者的神, 旨在使他们亲眼看到他们的神在火狱中而羞辱偶像崇拜者。
1
یہاں سوال پیدا ہوتا ہے کہ پتھر تو بے جان چیز ہیں پھر انہیں آگ میں کیوں ڈالا جائے گا؟ اس کا جواب یہ ہے کہ حِجَارَۃٌ سے مراد وہ بت ہیں جن کو کفار خدائی صفات دیتے تھے۔ بے شک بے جان ہونے کی وجہ سے پتھروں کو تو کوئی سزا نہیں ملے گی‘ مگر اپنے معبودوں کو جہنم میں پڑا دیکھ کر ان لوگوں کو سزا ملے گی جو ان پر ایمان لائے تھے۔ اور اگر حِجَارَۃٌ سے عام پتھر مراد لئے جائیں تو اس سے پتھر کا کوئلہ مراد لیا جائے گا‘ جس سے آگ زیادہ تیز ہوتی ہے۔
a
3:11; 66:7.
31
Important Words:
الحجارة (stones) is the plural of الحجر (a stone) which is derived from the verb حجر which means, he or it prevented or hindered or resisted. A stone is called حجر because it resists pressure owing to its hardness. الحجر also means, a rock or a great mass of stone; a metal as gold and silver which both together are sometimes called الحجران i.e. the two metals (Lane). Thus coal (not charcoal) would also be looked upon as حجر. The word حجارة may also be used metaphorically for idols made of stone or metal (Kashshaf).
اعدت (prepared) is derived from اعد which again is derived from عد which means, he considered or he counted. اعد means, he prepared a thing and made or kept it ready (Aqrab).
Commentary:
The verse says that if the opponents of Islam are not able to produce the like of the Quran as demanded in the previous verse, they should understand that it is the word of God and that they are not opposing a man but God Himself; they should, therefore, be ready to suffer the lot of those who oppose Divine will.
The clause, and never shall you do it, signifies that the disbelievers knew that the idols had no power of revealing anything; so they would never call upon the idols to help them.
The word "fuel" may also be taken in a figurative sense, in which case the meaning would be that the punishment of Hell is caused by idol-worship. So the idols are like fuel for hellfire, being a means of bringing it into existence. The words الناس (men) and الحجارة (stones) may also be taken as indicating two classes of inmates of Hell. The word الناس (men) which, according to its root, signifies love, has been used to denote those disbelievers who may be called human in so far as they still retain something of the love of God which distinguishes human beings from stones. But the other disbelievers are called الحجارة (stones), for they have no love left for God. Such men are indeed no better than stones.
Though this verse speaks of fire and stones, it should be remembered that what is called the next world is not a material world. In fact, expressions used in the Quran to denote rewards and punishment should not be taken literally but metaphorically. It should also be noted that the punishment of the next world is not everlasting. According to Islam, Hell is not eternal. It is only a reformatory. The subject will be discussed later in its proper place.
a
3:11; 66:7.
45
The word "fuel" may be taken in a figurative sense, meaning that the punishment of Hell is caused by idol-worship. So the idols are like fuel for hell-fire being a means of bringing it into existence. Or, "stones" mean idols which the idolaters worship as gods, the idea being that the idolaters will be humiliated by witnessing that their gods were cast into the fire.
46
The words an-Nas (men) and al-Hijarah (stones) may also be taken as indicating two classes of inmates of Hell; an-Nas may denote those disbelievers who retain something of the love of God, and al-Hijarah (stones), those who have no love left for God in their hearts. Such men are indeed no better than stones. The word is plural of Hajar which means, a stone; a rock; gold, and also one unequalled, i.e. big man; a leader (Lane).
فَاِنۡ اٰمَنُوۡا بِمِثۡلِ مَاۤ اٰمَنۡتُمۡ بِہٖ فَقَدِ اہۡتَدَوۡا ۖ وَّاِنۡ تَوَلَّوۡا فَاِنَّمَا ہُمۡ فِیۡ شِقَاقٍ ۖ فَسَیَکۡفِیۡکَہُمُ اللّٰہُ ۚ وَہُوَ السَّمِیۡعُ الۡعَلِیۡمُ
这里告诉穆斯林, 如果犹太教徒和基督教徒一致认为宗教不是一个世袭问题, 而是在于接受一切启示的指导, 那么, 同他们之间便不存在根本性的歧见, 否则, 他们就站不到一起, 而有一条宽阔的鸿沟使他们隔离, 在此情况下, 对产生教会宗派及造成敌视的责任在于犹太教徒和基督教徒, 而不在于穆斯林。
3:21.
Muslims are here told that if Jews and Christians agree with them in holding that Religion is not an hereditary matter, but consists in accepting all revealed guidance, then there is no basic difference between them, otherwise their ways stand apart and a wide gulf separates them, responsibility for the schism and the resulting hostility in this case lying with Jews and Christians and not with Muslims.
3:21.
Important Words:
شقاق (schism) is from شاق which is from شق meaning, he split up a thing, or he tore it up. شق عصا القوم means, he created a split or schism in the community which before stood united. شق النبت means, the vegetation sprouted forth from the earth. الشقmeans, one side as opposed to another. شاقه means, he opposed him and became hostile to him so that each sided with a different party. شقاق means, opposition.; hostility; schism; being mutually remote (Aqrab). The word شقاق however, is not used about the party which sides with the truth (Muhit).
Commentary:
Muslims are here told that if Jews and Christians come to agree with them in holding that religion is not an hereditary matter, but consists in accepting all revealed guidance, then they are one with them; otherwise, their ways stand apart and a wide gulf separates them, responsibility for the schism and the resulting hostility in this case lying with Jews and Christians and not with the Muslims.
In this case, however, Muslims should not be afraid of Jews or Christians; for God is on their side and the God of Islam is All-Hearing and All-Knowing. If they pray to Him for protection, He will answer their prayers and even if there comes a time when they cannot pray, He will protect them; for He is not only All-Hearing but is also All-Knowing. The verse also refers to the special and personal divine protection promised to the Holy Prophet (5:68) in view of the repeated attempts made by the Jews upon his life.
84
这里告诉穆斯林, 如果犹太教徒和基督教徒一致认为宗教不是一个世袭问题, 而是在于接受一切启示的指导, 那么, 同他们之间便不存在根本性的歧见, 否则, 他们就站不到一起, 而有一条宽阔的鸿沟使他们隔离, 在此情况下, 对产生教会宗派及造成敌视的责任在于犹太教徒和基督教徒, 而不在于穆斯林。
a
3:21.
144
Important Words:
شقاق (schism) is from شاق which is from شق meaning, he split up a thing, or he tore it up. شق عصا القوم means, he created a split or schism in the community which before stood united. شق النبت means, the vegetation sprouted forth from the earth. الشقmeans, one side as opposed to another. شاقه means, he opposed him and became hostile to him so that each sided with a different party. شقاق means, opposition.; hostility; schism; being mutually remote (Aqrab). The word شقاق however, is not used about the party which sides with the truth (Muhit).
Commentary:
Muslims are here told that if Jews and Christians come to agree with them in holding that religion is not an hereditary matter, but consists in accepting all revealed guidance, then they are one with them; otherwise, their ways stand apart and a wide gulf separates them, responsibility for the schism and the resulting hostility in this case lying with Jews and Christians and not with the Muslims.
In this case, however, Muslims should not be afraid of Jews or Christians; for God is on their side and the God of Islam is All-Hearing and All-Knowing. If they pray to Him for protection, He will answer their prayers and even if there comes a time when they cannot pray, He will protect them; for He is not only All-Hearing but is also All-Knowing. The verse also refers to the special and personal divine protection promised to the Holy Prophet (5:68) in view of the repeated attempts made by the Jews upon his life.
b
3:21.
155
Muslims are here told that if Jews and Christians agree with them in holding that Religion is not an hereditary matter, but consists in accepting all revealed guidance, then there is no basic difference between them, otherwise their ways stand apart and a wide gulf separates them, responsibility for the schism and the resulting hostility in this case lying with Jews and Christians and not with Muslims.
وَاقۡتُلُوۡہُمۡ حَیۡثُ ثَقِفۡتُمُوۡہُمۡ وَاَخۡرِجُوۡہُمۡ مِّنۡ حَیۡثُ اَخۡرَجُوۡکُمۡ ۚ وَالۡفِتۡنَۃُ اَشَدُّ مِنَ الۡقَتۡلِ ۚ وَلَا تُقٰتِلُوۡہُمۡ عِنۡدَ الۡمَسۡجِدِ الۡحَرَامِ حَتّٰی یُقٰتِلُوۡکُمۡ فِیۡہِ ۖ فَاِنۡ قٰتَلُوۡکُمۡ فَاقۡتُلُوۡہُمۡ ۗ کَذٰلِکَ جَزَآءُ الۡکٰفِرِیۡنَ
عربی میں ’’نہ‘‘ کا لفظ نہیں لیکن یہ لفظ حتّٰی کے اندر مخفی ہے۔ اگر اسے خطوط میں رکھا جائے تو معنے بالکل الٹ بن جاتے ہیں اس وجہ سے خطوط میں ’’نہ‘‘ کا لفظ نہیں رکھا گیا‘ بلکہ ظاہر کیا گیا ہے۔
کَذٰلِکَ کا لفظی ترجمہ ’’اسی طرح‘‘ ہے لیکن اردو میں ’’یہی‘‘ کے لفظ سے ہی مضمون ٹھیک ادا ہوتا ہے۔
2:218.
This verse relates to conditions when war has actually broken out. Obviously, it enjoins Muslims to fight against only such disbelievers as are the first to take up arms against them.
The words signify that Mecca being the centre and the most sacred place of Islam, no non-Muslim should be allowed to remain in it.
2:218.
Important Words:
ثقفتموھم (you met them) is derived from ثقف. They say ثقفه i.e. (1) he faced him or he met him; (2) he caught hold of him; (3) he got the better of him (Aqrab).
فتنة (persecution) is derived from فتن. They say فتن فلانا i.e. he led him astray; he tried or tested him. The expression فتن فلاناعن رأیه means, he prevented him from holding his views. The words فتن الصائغ الذھب mean, the goldsmith melted the gold in the crucible to ascertain its genuineness. فتنه means, he put him in a state of trial or persecution. Thus فتنة means: (1) trial; (2) torture and persecution; (3) divergence of views among men and the disputes and fighting that take place as a result thereof (Aqrab). See also 2:103.
Commentary:
The verse relates to conditions when a war has actually broken out. Obviously it does not apply to all disbelievers, for it only says, "kill them" and not "kill the disbelievers". The pronoun "them" clearly refers to, those who fight against you, as mentioned in the previous verse. The verse calls upon Muslims to fight against only such disbelievers as take up arms against them. It does not call upon them to slay each and every disbeliever that may happen to come in their way. Indeed this verse affords a remarkable instance of the way in which the plain words of the Quran are generally distorted by the opponents of Islam.
The clause, and drive them out from where they have driven you out, refers to the time when the enemies of Islam compelled the Holy Prophet and his Companions to flee from Mecca. It enjoins Muslims to bear in mind that they have eventually to conquer Mecca which being the centre and the most sacred place of Islam, no non-Muslim would be allowed to remain in it.
The clause, persecution is worse than killing, provides an argument in support of defensive war. The disbelievers were persecuting Muslims in diverse ways with a view to turning them away from their faith and they were also creating disorder in the land. It was certainly better to put a stop to this state of affairs by fighting against the aggressors than to allow it to continue. There are circumstances when, to every right-thinking man, war becomes necessary.
The words فتنة (persecution) and قتل (killing) may be interpreted in another way also. فتنة means, "persecution or war waged against a people with a view to turning them from their faith", and قتل means, "an ordinary secular war". Now the verse points out that a war of religious persecution is worse than an ordinary war; for, firstly, worldly interests are nothing as compared with matters of faith; and secondly, wars caused by religious differences are more bitter and cruel, and seldom come to an end.
The clause, and fight them not in and near the Sacred Mosque until they fight you therein, contains a very important principle. Even after the declaration of war, there are restrictions to be observed, and Muslims should never be the first to break them. The sanctity of the holy precincts of the Ka‘bah must be safeguarded even in time of war. If, however, the other party violates its sanctity, Muslims may retaliate so that the attacking party may thereby be brought to its senses.
b
2:218.
128
128本节经文讲的是战争已经实际爆发时的一些情况。很明显, 穆斯林奉命只同首先动武反对他们的不信教的人进行战斗。
2
عربی میں ’’نہ‘‘ کا لفظ نہیں لیکن یہ لفظ حتّٰی کے اندر مخفی ہے۔ اگر اسے خطوط میں رکھا جائے تو معنے بالکل الٹ بن جاتے ہیں اس وجہ سے خطوط میں ’’نہ‘‘ کا لفظ نہیں رکھا گیا‘ بلکہ ظاہر کیا گیا ہے۔
3
کَذٰلِکَ کا لفظی ترجمہ ’’اسی طرح‘‘ ہے لیکن اردو میں ’’یہی‘‘ کے لفظ سے ہی مضمون ٹھیک ادا ہوتا ہے۔
a
2:218.
198
Important Words:
ثقفتموھم (you met them) is derived from ثقف. They say ثقفه i.e. (1) he faced him or he met him; (2) he caught hold of him; (3) he got the better of him (Aqrab).
فتنة (persecution) is derived from فتن. They say فتن فلانا i.e. he led him astray; he tried or tested him. The expression فتن فلاناعن رأیه means, he prevented him from holding his views. The words فتن الصائغ الذھب mean, the goldsmith melted the gold in the crucible to ascertain its genuineness. فتنه means, he put him in a state of trial or persecution. Thus فتنة means: (1) trial; (2) torture and persecution; (3) divergence of views among men and the disputes and fighting that take place as a result thereof (Aqrab). See also 2:103.
Commentary:
The verse relates to conditions when a war has actually broken out. Obviously it does not apply to all disbelievers, for it only says, "kill them" and not "kill the disbelievers". The pronoun "them" clearly refers to, those who fight against you, as mentioned in the previous verse. The verse calls upon Muslims to fight against only such disbelievers as take up arms against them. It does not call upon them to slay each and every disbeliever that may happen to come in their way. Indeed this verse affords a remarkable instance of the way in which the plain words of the Quran are generally distorted by the opponents of Islam.
The clause, and drive them out from where they have driven you out, refers to the time when the enemies of Islam compelled the Holy Prophet and his Companions to flee from Mecca. It enjoins Muslims to bear in mind that they have eventually to conquer Mecca which being the centre and the most sacred place of Islam, no non-Muslim would be allowed to remain in it.
The clause, persecution is worse than killing, provides an argument in support of defensive war. The disbelievers were persecuting Muslims in diverse ways with a view to turning them away from their faith and they were also creating disorder in the land. It was certainly better to put a stop to this state of affairs by fighting against the aggressors than to allow it to continue. There are circumstances when, to every right-thinking man, war becomes necessary.
The words فتنة (persecution) and قتل (killing) may be interpreted in another way also. فتنة means, "persecution or war waged against a people with a view to turning them from their faith", and قتل means, "an ordinary secular war". Now the verse points out that a war of religious persecution is worse than an ordinary war; for, firstly, worldly interests are nothing as compared with matters of faith; and secondly, wars caused by religious differences are more bitter and cruel, and seldom come to an end.
The clause, and fight them not in and near the Sacred Mosque until they fight you therein, contains a very important principle. Even after the declaration of war, there are restrictions to be observed, and Muslims should never be the first to break them. The sanctity of the holy precincts of the Ka‘bah must be safeguarded even in time of war. If, however, the other party violates its sanctity, Muslims may retaliate so that the attacking party may thereby be brought to its senses.
b
2:218.
220
This verse relates to conditions when war has actually broken out. Obviously, it enjoins Muslims to fight against only such disbelievers as are the first to take up arms against them.
221
The words signify that Mecca being the centre and the most sacred place of Islam, no non-Muslim should be allowed to remain in it.
وَاَتِمُّوا الۡحَجَّ وَالۡعُمۡرَۃَ لِلّٰہِ ۚ فَاِنۡ اُحۡصِرۡتُمۡ فَمَا اسۡتَیۡسَرَ مِنَ الۡہَدۡیِ ۖ وَلَا تَحۡلِقُوۡا رُءُوۡسَکُمۡ حَتّٰی یَبۡلُغَ الۡہَدۡیُ مَحِلَّہٗ ۚ فَمَنۡ کَانَ مِنۡکُمۡ مَّرِیۡضًا اَوۡ بِہٖۤ اَذًی مِّنۡ رَّاۡسِہٖ فَفِدۡیَۃٌ مِّنۡ صِیَامٍ اَوۡ صَدَقَۃٍ اَوۡ نُسُکٍ ۚ فَاِذَاۤ اَمِنۡتُمۡ فَمَنۡ تَمَتَّعَ بِالۡعُمۡرَۃِ اِلَی الۡحَجِّ فَمَا اسۡتَیۡسَرَ مِنَ الۡہَدۡیِ ۚ فَمَنۡ لَّمۡ یَجِدۡ فَصِیَامُ ثَلٰثَۃِ اَیَّامٍ فِی الۡحَجِّ وَسَبۡعَۃٍ اِذَا رَجَعۡتُمۡ ۗ تِلۡکَ عَشَرَۃٌ کَامِلَۃٌ ۗ ذٰلِکَ لِمَنۡ لَّمۡ یَکُنۡ اَہۡلُہٗ حَاضِرِی الۡمَسۡجِدِ الۡحَرَامِ ۚ وَاتَّقُوا اللّٰہَ وَاعۡلَمُوۡۤا اَنَّ اللّٰہَ شَدِیۡدُ الۡعِقَابِ
48:26.
本节经文以 حَجْ (Hajj, 朝觐) 这一论题开首, جِهَاد (Jihad, 为主道抗战) 和朝觐似乎相互有关, 两者构成了忠实和真诚的信者在安拉道上所必须经受的牺牲举动, 这是从2:178开始的一个论题。朝觐是人类精神发展的最后阶段, 其他各阶段如祈祷、斋戒和为真主的道路抗战已经得到了讨论。
عُمْرَة (‘Umrah, 小朝) 在于按上述方式穿朝圣服,环绕天房七次, 在萨法 (صَفَا, Safa) 和玛尔瓦 (مَرْوَة, Marwah) 之间奔跑, 并供奉牺牲, 可是这牺牲并不是必须做的。小朝可以在一年中的任何时候履行, حَجْ (Hajj, 大朝) 只在 ذُوالْحِجَّة (Dhul-Hijjah, 伊历十二月) 中履行。
小朝和大朝可以按两种方式结合: (a) 打算只履行小朝的朝觐者应进入 Ihram (穿朝圣服者必须遵守的约法规定),并履行它的礼仪至其终结。然后在 ذُوالْحِجَّة (Dhul-Hijjah) 十二月的第八天,他应再进入Ihram,履行大朝的规定礼仪。这种小朝 (副朝) 同大朝 (正朝) 相结合的方式宗教学术上称为 تَمَتُّعْ (Tamattu‘, 连朝), تَمَتُّعْ (Tamattu‘) 的字面意义是 “利用一种事物”。(b) 朝觐者可以同时履行副朝和正朝。在此情况下, 他应以那样的意向进入 Ihram 并应在那仪式中继续到朝觐结束。这种正朝同副朝的相结合叫做 قِرَان (Qiran, 双朝), قِرَان (Qiran)的字面上的意义是 “把两件事物合并为一。” 在连朝和双朝中都必须供奉牺牲。在注释的本节经文中 تَمَتُّعْ (Tamattu‘) 这词不是按术语意义的用法, 而 قِرَان (Qiran) 也同样。
在 “应当在朝觐期间斋戒三天” 这一句中所说的斋戒与以上所说的斋戒是截然不同的。起先提到的斋戒是对那些不能理发的人们来说的, 而这斋戒是对在连朝时无力宰牲者而说的。所说的三天最好是 ذُوالْحِجَّة (Dhul-Hijjah, 十二月) 11, 12和13日。其余的七天斋戒可以在他回家后完成。
此话意指允许正朝和副朝的相结合不是针对麦加的居住者而是针对外来者的。可是, 某些人已把 “圣寺” 一词扩大到包括整个圣地, 即包括麦加内及麦加周围的圣地。
حَتّٰی یَبْلُغَ الْھَدْیُ مَحِلَّہٗ اس پر بحث کی گئی ہے کہ مَحِلَّہٗ سے کیا مراد ہے۔ امام شافعیؒ اور امام مالکؒ کے نزدیک تو وہ جگہ ہے جہاں پر حاجی کو روک دیا گیا ہو۔ اور امام ابوحنیفہؒ کے نزدیک حرم ہے۔ میرے نزدیک اگر بیماری کے سبب سے حاجی روکا گیا ہو تو قربانی کے حرم پہنچنے تک سر نہ منڈوائے۔ اور اگر کوئی دشمن حج میں مانع ہو جائے تو جہاں روکا جائے وہیں قربانی کرکے حلق کر دے۔
مِنْ تعلیل کے لئے ہوتا ہے جیسے مِمَّا خَطِیْئٰتِھِمْ اُغْرِقُوْا (نوح : ۲۶) یہاں بھی یہی معنے ترجمہ کے لحاظ سے مناسب ہیں۔
قرآن کریم نے تینوں اقسام فدیہ کو غیر معین رکھا ہے مگر رسول کریمؐ کے ارشاد سے اس کی تعیین ہو جاتی ہے۔ چنانچہ آپؐ نے کعب بن عُجرہ کوحکم فرمایا کہ سر منڈوادیں اور چھ مسکینوں کو کھانا کھلا دیں یا ایک بکرا قربانی کر دیں یا تین دن کے روزے رکھیں۔
اِلَی الْحَجِّ : اِلٰی کے معنے کبھی مَعَ یعنی ساتھ کے بھی ہوتے ہیں اس جگہ یہی معنے ہیں۔ اکثر کوفی اور بصریوں کی ایک جماعت آیت مَنْ اَنْصَارِیْ اِلَی اللّٰہِ میں بھی اِلٰی کے معنے مَعَ کے ہی کرتی ہے۔ (مُغْنی اللَّبِیب)
48:26.
With this verse begins the subject of Hajj (Pilgrimage). Jihad and Hajj seem to be correlated and both constitute a form of sacrifice which a true and sincere believer has to undergo in the way of Allah, a subject which began with 2:178. The Pilgrimage is the last stage in the spiritual development of man, the other stages such as Prayer, Fasting and Jihad having already been discussed.
The ‘Umrah or the Lesser Pilgrimage consists in entering into a stage of Ihram in the way mentioned above, circuiting the Ka‘bah seven times, running between Safa and Marwah and offering a sacrifice which, however, is not obligatory. The ‘Umrah may be performed at any time of the year, whereas the Hajj or the Greater Pilgrimage is performed only during the month of Dhul-Hijjah.
The words, if you are kept back, refer to a state of affairs when a would-be pilgrim is prevented by disease, or a state of war, or by some other cause, from visiting the Ka‘bah to perform the Hajj or the ‘Umrah.
The ‘Umrah and the Hajj may be combined in two ways: (a) The pilgrim who intends to perform the ‘Umrah alone should enter into the state of Ihram and perform its rites and finish it. Then on the eighth day of Dhul- Hijjah he should again enter into the state of Ihram and perform the prescribed rites of Hajj. This form of combining the ‘Umrah and the Hajj is technically called Tamattu‘ which literally means, "availing oneself of a thing." (b) The pilgrim may perform the ‘Umrah and the Hajj simultaneously. He should, in this case, enter into the state of Ihram with that intention and should remain in that state till the end of the Pilgrimage. This combination of Hajj and ‘Umrah is called Qiran which literally means, "the putting together of two things." In both Tamattu‘ and Qiran it is obligatory to offer the sacrifice. In the verse under comment the word Tamattu‘ is not used in the technical sen
Fasting is mentioned in the clause, should fast three days during the Pilgrimage, is distinct and separate from the fasting mentioned above. The first-mentioned fasting is meant for those who cannot shave their heads while this fasting is meant for those who are unable to offer sacrifice in case of Tamattu‘. The three days spoken of are preferably the 11th, 12th and 13th of Dhul-Hijjah. The remaining seven fasts may be observed after one has returned home.
The words mean that the permission to combine Hajj and ‘Umrah is meant not for the residents of Mecca but for those who come from outside. By some, however, the words "the Sacred Mosque" have been extended to include the whole of Haram, i.e. the sacred territory in and around Mecca.
48:26.
Commentary:
From this verse begin commandments relating to حج or the Pilgrimage. The Pilgrimage is performed in the following manner: The would-be pilgrim enters into a state of احرام (Ihram) on reaching the میقات i.e. certain prescribed places slightly varying in distance in different directions, but in all cases outside حرم (the Sacred Territory). In the state of احرامthe pilgrim is forbidden sexual intercourse, the use of scent or perfumed oil, the wearing of sewn garments, hunting and the like. The male pilgrim discards ordinary clothes, putting on white unsewn sheets and keeping the head uncovered. The female pilgrim may put on ordinary but simple clothes and should ordinarily keep her face uncovered. The pilgrim (male or female) is required to repeat the following words as often as possible: Labbaik, Allahumma labbaik, Labbaik. La sharika laka labbaik. Innal-hamda wanni‘mata laka wal mulka la sharika laka…” i.e. "My Lord! I am at Thy service. There is no equal or partner with Thee. So I am at Thy service alone. All praise belongs to Thee and all blessings are from Thee and all authority rests in Thee. I say again, there is no equal or partner with Thee. So I am at Thy service alone."
At Mecca the first thing the pilgrim does, preferably after having a bath, is to perform seven circuits round the Ka’bah then he briskly walks or runs between the Safa and the Marwah (see 2:159) seven times. On the eighth day of Dhul-Hijjah (the month of Pilgrimage) he goes in the morning from Mecca to Mina, which is about three miles from Mecca, where he halts to perform, at their appointed time, the five daily Prayers, beginning from the midday Prayer. Next morning (i.e. the 9th) he starts from Mina and passing through, or by, Mash‘arul-Haram, which is about six miles from Mecca, he goes on to the great plain at ‘Arafat, three miles further ahead, where, before he actually enters ‘Arafat, he says the midday and the afternoon Prayers together; and when all the pilgrims have entered ‘Arafat, the Imam delivers a sermon, while the pilgrims do nothing but silently pray and stand still. Thereafter the pilgrim returns after sunset to Muzdalifah or Mash‘ar where he says the evening and the night Prayers together and spends most of his time in prayer and meditation. Next day (i.e. the 10th) after offering his morning Prayer at Mash‘arul-Haram he starts back early for Mina, where he casts pebbles (seven in number) at the three appointed pillars beginning with the Jamratul-‘Aqabah, repeating this each day that he stays at Mina. The same day, i.e. the 10th, the pilgrim offers his sacrifice (goat, sheep, ram, cow, camel, etc.), gets his head shaved, takes a bath and puts on his ordinary clothes. Thereafter he proceeds to Mecca and again performs the circuit of the Ka‘bah seven times and then returns to Mina if he should so desire. The stay at Mina may last from part of a day to three or four days known as ایام معدودات (i.e. the numbered days) with which the Hajj is completed. All this time the pilgrim should repeat, as many times as possible, the above mentioned prayer.
عمرة or the Lesser Pilgrimage consists in entering into a state of احرام (Ihram) in the way described above, circuiting the Ka‘bah seven times, running between the Safa and the Marwah and offering a sacrifice which, however, is not obligatory. ‘Umrah may be performed at any time of the year, whereas the Hajj or the Greater Pilgrimage is performed only during the month of Dhul-Hijjah. For the literal meanings of the words Hajj and ‘Umrah see note on 2:159.
The words, If you are kept back, refer to a state of affairs when a would-be pilgrim is prevented by disease, or a state of war, or some other cause, from visiting the Ka‘bah to perform the Hajj or the ‘Umrah. In this case the pilgrim may refrain from proceeding further and should sacrifice whatever offering is easily available, i.e. a goat, a sheep, a cow, or a camel, etc. But he should not shave his head until the offering reaches its destination, the idea being to remain in the state of Ihram until the offering reaches Mina which is the place meant for it. If, however, the offering cannot be sent to Mecca, it may be sacrificed by the pilgrim at the place where he is detained and the meat either consumed by the pilgrim himself or distributed among friends, relatives, neighbours, etc. It will be noted that the offering of a sacrifice is obligatory only when a would-be pilgrim is prevented from completing his Hajj or ‘Umrah. In ordinary circumstances when a person performs a Hajj or an ‘Umrah separately, it is only supererogatory, becoming obligatory only when the Hajj and the ‘Umrah are combined.
The clause, should make an expiation either by fasting or almsgiving or a sacrifice, relates to such people as cannot shave their heads owing to some ailment. The alternatives mentioned are meant to suit different grades of people. Fasting is meant for the poor; feeding the needy for the pilgrims of the middle class; and the offering of a sacrifice for the rich. The Quran does not fix the number of days for which one is to fast, or the number of the poor whom one is to feed or the kind of animal which one is to sacrifice. The Holy Prophet is reported to have once prescribed fasting for three days (i.e. three one-day fasts), and the feeding of six poor men and the offering of a goat as a sacrifice (Bukhari).
The words, when you are safe, mean, when the war is over, or when other obstacles are removed. In such case it is open to a person to proceed to Mecca with the intention of performing ‘Umrah and then stay on to perform Hajj in the ensuing month of Dhul-Hijjah. This is what is referred to in the words: who would avail himself of ‘Umrah together with the Hajj.
‘Umrah and Hajj may be combined in two ways: One way is for the would-be pilgrim to make up his mind to perform the ‘Umrah only and enter into the state of Ihram with that intention, and then perform its rites and finish it. After that on the eighth day of Dhul-Hijjah one should again enter into the state of Ihram and then perform the prescribed rites of Hajj. This form of combining the ‘Umrah and the Hajj is technically called Tamattu‘ which literally means, "availing oneself of a thing".
The second way is that a man should make up his mind to perform the ‘Umrah and Hajj simultaneously. He should, in this case, enter into the state of Ihram with that intention and should remain in that state till the end of the Pilgrimage. This combination of Hajj and ‘Umrah is called قران (Qiran) which literally means, "the putting together of two things". In both Tamattu‘ and Qiran it is obligatory to offer the sacrifice, while in the case of Hajj alone or in the case of ‘Umrah alone, the offering of the sacrifice is not obligatory. In the verse under comment the word تمتع is not used in the technical sense and covers قران also.
The fasting mentioned in the clause, should fast three days during the Pilgrimage, is distinct and separate from the fasting mentioned above. The first-mentioned fasting was meant for those who cannot shave their heads, while this fasting is meant for those who are unable to offer a sacrifice in case of Tamattu‘. The three days spoken of are preferably the 11th, 12th and 13th of Dhul-Hijjah. The remaining seven fasts may be observed after one has returned home.
The clause, this is for him whose family does not reside near the Sacred Mosque, means that the permission to combine Hajj with ‘Umrah is meant not for the residents of Mecca but for those who come from outside. By some, however, the words "the Sacred Mosque" have been extended to include the whole of حرم i.e. the Sacred Territory in and around Mecca.
The final clause, fear Allah and know that Allah is severe in punishing, has a twofold meaning: (1) That Muslims should not think that these are mere minor details of certain outward rites and may therefore not be strictly observed; for all these things which the All-Knowing God has prescribed for the Faithful are necessary in His sight and are meant for their own good. So, whoever neglects these details not only incurs the displeasure of God, but also hinders his own spiritual progress. (2) That the performance of Hajj should not fill the heart with pride (which unfortunately is very often the case nowadays), for this would defeat the very object of Pilgrimage which is the attainment of تقوی or fear of God. In such case, the so-called pilgrim will not find himself nearer God but rather would see His punishment descending on him.
In connection with this verse, it should also be noted that besides giving a general meaning as stated above, it also refers to a specific incident in Islamic history, i.e. the Truce of Hudaibiyyah. The verse was revealed before that truce and hinted that a time was coming when Muslims would start towards Mecca with the intention of performing Pilgrimage, but they would be "kept back" from doing so by disbelievers. Later, however, God would grant them victory over the disbelievers and they would be "safe" to perform the Pilgrimage in peace. What a true picture of the apparent set-back at Hudaibiyyah and the subsequent Fall of Mecca at the hands of the Holy Prophet!
c
48:26.
134
本节经文以 حَجْ (Hajj, 朝觐) 这一论题开首, جِهَاد (Jihad, 为主道抗战) 和朝觐似乎相互有关, 两者构成了忠实和真诚的信者在安拉道上所必须经受的牺牲举动, 这是从2:178开始的一个论题。朝觐是人类精神发展的最后阶段, 其他各阶段如祈祷、斋戒和为真主的道路抗战已经得到了讨论。
135
عُمْرَة (‘Umrah, 小朝) 在于按上述方式穿朝圣服,环绕天房七次, 在萨法 (صَفَا, Safa) 和玛尔瓦 (مَرْوَة, Marwah) 之间奔跑, 并供奉牺牲, 可是这牺牲并不是必须做的。小朝可以在一年中的任何时候履行, حَجْ (Hajj, 大朝) 只在 ذُوالْحِجَّة (Dhul-Hijjah, 伊历十二月) 中履行。
136
小朝和大朝可以按两种方式结合: (a) 打算只履行小朝的朝觐者应进入 Ihram (穿朝圣服者必须遵守的约法规定),并履行它的礼仪至其终结。然后在 ذُوالْحِجَّة (Dhul-Hijjah) 十二月的第八天,他应再进入Ihram,履行大朝的规定礼仪。这种小朝 (副朝) 同大朝 (正朝) 相结合的方式宗教学术上称为 تَمَتُّعْ (Tamattu‘, 连朝), تَمَتُّعْ (Tamattu‘) 的字面意义是 “利用一种事物”。(b) 朝觐者可以同时履行副朝和正朝。在此情况下, 他应以那样的意向进入 Ihram 并应在那仪式中继续到朝觐结束。这种正朝同副朝的相结合叫做 قِرَان (Qiran, 双朝), قِرَان (Qiran)的字面上的意义是 “把两件事物合并为一。” 在连朝和双朝中都必须供奉牺牲。在注释的本节经文中 تَمَتُّعْ (Tamattu‘) 这词不是按术语意义的用法, 而 قِرَان (Qiran) 也同样。
137
在 “应当在朝觐期间斋戒三天” 这一句中所说的斋戒与以上所说的斋戒是截然不同的。起先提到的斋戒是对那些不能理发的人们来说的, 而这斋戒是对在连朝时无力宰牲者而说的。所说的三天最好是 ذُوالْحِجَّة (Dhul-Hijjah, 十二月) 11, 12和13日。其余的七天斋戒可以在他回家后完成。
138
此话意指允许正朝和副朝的相结合不是针对麦加的居住者而是针对外来者的。可是, 某些人已把 “圣寺” 一词扩大到包括整个圣地, 即包括麦加内及麦加周围的圣地。
1
حَتّٰی یَبْلُغَ الْھَدْیُ مَحِلَّہٗ اس پر بحث کی گئی ہے کہ مَحِلَّہٗ سے کیا مراد ہے۔ امام شافعیؒ اور امام مالکؒ کے نزدیک تو وہ جگہ ہے جہاں پر حاجی کو روک دیا گیا ہو۔ اور امام ابوحنیفہؒ کے نزدیک حرم ہے۔ میرے نزدیک اگر بیماری کے سبب سے حاجی روکا گیا ہو تو قربانی کے حرم پہنچنے تک سر نہ منڈوائے۔ اور اگر کوئی دشمن حج میں مانع ہو جائے تو جہاں روکا جائے وہیں قربانی کرکے حلق کر دے۔
2
مِنْ تعلیل کے لئے ہوتا ہے جیسے مِمَّا خَطِیْئٰتِھِمْ اُغْرِقُوْا (نوح : ۲۶) یہاں بھی یہی معنے ترجمہ کے لحاظ سے مناسب ہیں۔
3
قرآن کریم نے تینوں اقسام فدیہ کو غیر معین رکھا ہے مگر رسول کریمؐ کے ارشاد سے اس کی تعیین ہو جاتی ہے۔ چنانچہ آپؐ نے کعب بن عُجرہ کوحکم فرمایا کہ سر منڈوادیں اور چھ مسکینوں کو کھانا کھلا دیں یا ایک بکرا قربانی کر دیں یا تین دن کے روزے رکھیں۔
4
اِلَی الْحَجِّ : اِلٰی کے معنے کبھی مَعَ یعنی ساتھ کے بھی ہوتے ہیں اس جگہ یہی معنے ہیں۔ اکثر کوفی اور بصریوں کی ایک جماعت آیت مَنْ اَنْصَارِیْ اِلَی اللّٰہِ میں بھی اِلٰی کے معنے مَعَ کے ہی کرتی ہے۔ (مُغْنی اللَّبِیب)
a
48:26.
203
Commentary:
From this verse begin commandments relating to حج or the Pilgrimage. The Pilgrimage is performed in the following manner: The would-be pilgrim enters into a state of احرام (Ihram) on reaching the میقات i.e. certain prescribed places slightly varying in distance in different directions, but in all cases outside حرم (the Sacred Territory). In the state of احرامthe pilgrim is forbidden sexual intercourse, the use of scent or perfumed oil, the wearing of sewn garments, hunting and the like. The male pilgrim discards ordinary clothes, putting on white unsewn sheets and keeping the head uncovered. The female pilgrim may put on ordinary but simple clothes and should ordinarily keep her face uncovered. The pilgrim (male or female) is required to repeat the following words as often as possible: Labbaik, Allahumma labbaik, Labbaik. La sharika laka labbaik. Innal-hamda wanni‘mata laka wal mulka la sharika laka…” i.e. "My Lord! I am at Thy service. There is no equal or partner with Thee. So I am at Thy service alone. All praise belongs to Thee and all blessings are from Thee and all authority rests in Thee. I say again, there is no equal or partner with Thee. So I am at Thy service alone."
At Mecca the first thing the pilgrim does, preferably after having a bath, is to perform seven circuits round the Ka’bah then he briskly walks or runs between the Safa and the Marwah (see 2:159) seven times. On the eighth day of Dhul-Hijjah (the month of Pilgrimage) he goes in the morning from Mecca to Mina, which is about three miles from Mecca, where he halts to perform, at their appointed time, the five daily Prayers, beginning from the midday Prayer. Next morning (i.e. the 9th) he starts from Mina and passing through, or by, Mash‘arul-Haram, which is about six miles from Mecca, he goes on to the great plain at ‘Arafat, three miles further ahead, where, before he actually enters ‘Arafat, he says the midday and the afternoon Prayers together; and when all the pilgrims have entered ‘Arafat, the Imam delivers a sermon, while the pilgrims do nothing but silently pray and stand still. Thereafter the pilgrim returns after sunset to Muzdalifah or Mash‘ar where he says the evening and the night Prayers together and spends most of his time in prayer and meditation. Next day (i.e. the 10th) after offering his morning Prayer at Mash‘arul-Haram he starts back early for Mina, where he casts pebbles (seven in number) at the three appointed pillars beginning with the Jamratul-‘Aqabah, repeating this each day that he stays at Mina. The same day, i.e. the 10th, the pilgrim offers his sacrifice (goat, sheep, ram, cow, camel, etc.), gets his head shaved, takes a bath and puts on his ordinary clothes. Thereafter he proceeds to Mecca and again performs the circuit of the Ka‘bah seven times and then returns to Mina if he should so desire. The stay at Mina may last from part of a day to three or four days known as ایام معدودات (i.e. the numbered days) with which the Hajj is completed. All this time the pilgrim should repeat, as many times as possible, the above mentioned prayer.
عمرة or the Lesser Pilgrimage consists in entering into a state of احرام (Ihram) in the way described above, circuiting the Ka‘bah seven times, running between the Safa and the Marwah and offering a sacrifice which, however, is not obligatory. ‘Umrah may be performed at any time of the year, whereas the Hajj or the Greater Pilgrimage is performed only during the month of Dhul-Hijjah. For the literal meanings of the words Hajj and ‘Umrah see note on 2:159.
The words, If you are kept back, refer to a state of affairs when a would-be pilgrim is prevented by disease, or a state of war, or some other cause, from visiting the Ka‘bah to perform the Hajj or the ‘Umrah. In this case the pilgrim may refrain from proceeding further and should sacrifice whatever offering is easily available, i.e. a goat, a sheep, a cow, or a camel, etc. But he should not shave his head until the offering reaches its destination, the idea being to remain in the state of Ihram until the offering reaches Mina which is the place meant for it. If, however, the offering cannot be sent to Mecca, it may be sacrificed by the pilgrim at the place where he is detained and the meat either consumed by the pilgrim himself or distributed among friends, relatives, neighbours, etc. It will be noted that the offering of a sacrifice is obligatory only when a would-be pilgrim is prevented from completing his Hajj or ‘Umrah. In ordinary circumstances when a person performs a Hajj or an ‘Umrah separately, it is only supererogatory, becoming obligatory only when the Hajj and the ‘Umrah are combined.
The clause, should make an expiation either by fasting or almsgiving or a sacrifice, relates to such people as cannot shave their heads owing to some ailment. The alternatives mentioned are meant to suit different grades of people. Fasting is meant for the poor; feeding the needy for the pilgrims of the middle class; and the offering of a sacrifice for the rich. The Quran does not fix the number of days for which one is to fast, or the number of the poor whom one is to feed or the kind of animal which one is to sacrifice. The Holy Prophet is reported to have once prescribed fasting for three days (i.e. three one-day fasts), and the feeding of six poor men and the offering of a goat as a sacrifice (Bukhari).
The words, when you are safe, mean, when the war is over, or when other obstacles are removed. In such case it is open to a person to proceed to Mecca with the intention of performing ‘Umrah and then stay on to perform Hajj in the ensuing month of Dhul-Hijjah. This is what is referred to in the words: who would avail himself of ‘Umrah together with the Hajj.
‘Umrah and Hajj may be combined in two ways: One way is for the would-be pilgrim to make up his mind to perform the ‘Umrah only and enter into the state of Ihram with that intention, and then perform its rites and finish it. After that on the eighth day of Dhul-Hijjah one should again enter into the state of Ihram and then perform the prescribed rites of Hajj. This form of combining the ‘Umrah and the Hajj is technically called Tamattu‘ which literally means, "availing oneself of a thing".
The second way is that a man should make up his mind to perform the ‘Umrah and Hajj simultaneously. He should, in this case, enter into the state of Ihram with that intention and should remain in that state till the end of the Pilgrimage. This combination of Hajj and ‘Umrah is called قران (Qiran) which literally means, "the putting together of two things". In both Tamattu‘ and Qiran it is obligatory to offer the sacrifice, while in the case of Hajj alone or in the case of ‘Umrah alone, the offering of the sacrifice is not obligatory. In the verse under comment the word تمتع is not used in the technical sense and covers قران also.
The fasting mentioned in the clause, should fast three days during the Pilgrimage, is distinct and separate from the fasting mentioned above. The first-mentioned fasting was meant for those who cannot shave their heads, while this fasting is meant for those who are unable to offer a sacrifice in case of Tamattu‘. The three days spoken of are preferably the 11th, 12th and 13th of Dhul-Hijjah. The remaining seven fasts may be observed after one has returned home.
The clause, this is for him whose family does not reside near the Sacred Mosque, means that the permission to combine Hajj with ‘Umrah is meant not for the residents of Mecca but for those who come from outside. By some, however, the words "the Sacred Mosque" have been extended to include the whole of حرم i.e. the Sacred Territory in and around Mecca.
The final clause, fear Allah and know that Allah is severe in punishing, has a twofold meaning: (1) That Muslims should not think that these are mere minor details of certain outward rites and may therefore not be strictly observed; for all these things which the All-Knowing God has prescribed for the Faithful are necessary in His sight and are meant for their own good. So, whoever neglects these details not only incurs the displeasure of God, but also hinders his own spiritual progress. (2) That the performance of Hajj should not fill the heart with pride (which unfortunately is very often the case nowadays), for this would defeat the very object of Pilgrimage which is the attainment of تقوی or fear of God. In such case, the so-called pilgrim will not find himself nearer God but rather would see His punishment descending on him.
In connection with this verse, it should also be noted that besides giving a general meaning as stated above, it also refers to a specific incident in Islamic history, i.e. the Truce of Hudaibiyyah. The verse was revealed before that truce and hinted that a time was coming when Muslims would start towards Mecca with the intention of performing Pilgrimage, but they would be "kept back" from doing so by disbelievers. Later, however, God would grant them victory over the disbelievers and they would be "safe" to perform the Pilgrimage in peace. What a true picture of the apparent set-back at Hudaibiyyah and the subsequent Fall of Mecca at the hands of the Holy Prophet!
b
48:26.
227
With this verse begins the subject of Hajj (Pilgrimage). Jihad and Hajj seem to be correlated and both constitute a form of sacrifice which a true and sincere believer has to undergo in the way of Allah, a subject which began with 2:178. The Pilgrimage is the last stage in the spiritual development of man, the other stages such as Prayer, Fasting and Jihad having already been discussed.
228
The ‘Umrah or the Lesser Pilgrimage consists in entering into a stage of Ihram in the way mentioned above, circuiting the Ka‘bah seven times, running between Safa and Marwah and offering a sacrifice which, however, is not obligatory. The ‘Umrah may be performed at any time of the year, whereas the Hajj or the Greater Pilgrimage is performed only during the month of Dhul-Hijjah.
229
The words, if you are kept back, refer to a state of affairs when a would-be pilgrim is prevented by disease, or a state of war, or by some other cause, from visiting the Ka‘bah to perform the Hajj or the ‘Umrah.
230
The ‘Umrah and the Hajj may be combined in two ways: (a) The pilgrim who intends to perform the ‘Umrah alone should enter into the state of Ihram and perform its rites and finish it. Then on the eighth day of Dhul- Hijjah he should again enter into the state of Ihram and perform the prescribed rites of Hajj. This form of combining the ‘Umrah and the Hajj is technically called Tamattu‘ which literally means, "availing oneself of a thing." (b) The pilgrim may perform the ‘Umrah and the Hajj simultaneously. He should, in this case, enter into the state of Ihram with that intention and should remain in that state till the end of the Pilgrimage. This combination of Hajj and ‘Umrah is called Qiran which literally means, "the putting together of two things." In both Tamattu‘ and Qiran it is obligatory to offer the sacrifice. In the verse under comment the word Tamattu‘ is not used in the technical sen
231
Fasting is mentioned in the clause, should fast three days during the Pilgrimage, is distinct and separate from the fasting mentioned above. The first-mentioned fasting is meant for those who cannot shave their heads while this fasting is meant for those who are unable to offer sacrifice in case of Tamattu‘. The three days spoken of are preferably the 11th, 12th and 13th of Dhul-Hijjah. The remaining seven fasts may be observed after one has returned home.
232
The words mean that the permission to combine Hajj and ‘Umrah is meant not for the residents of Mecca but for those who come from outside. By some, however, the words "the Sacred Mosque" have been extended to include the whole of Haram, i.e. the sacred territory in and around Mecca.
فَاِنۡ زَلَلۡتُمۡ مِّنۡۢ بَعۡدِ مَا جَآءَتۡکُمُ الۡبَیِّنٰتُ فَاعۡلَمُوۡۤا اَنَّ اللّٰہَ عَزِیۡزٌ حَکِیۡمٌ
Commentary:
The preceding verse called upon believers, particularly those weak in faith, to try to become perfect Muslims, and pointed out to them the means by which they could become so. The present verse makes it clear that if, even after this warning and after God’s clear Signs had come to them, they should slip and digress from the true path, they would find God "Mighty and Wise", hinting that in that case they would rightly deserve punishment by the Wise God Who possesses the power to punish.
The word "Wise" also hints that erring ones should not despair; for, God being Wise, He has kept the way open for their return to the right faith. In fact, the liability of man to err is not without purpose. In His eternal wisdom, God has made man a free agent who is liable to err, so that his error might serve as an incentive for him to rise again and make a redoubled effort towards the ideal.
216
Commentary:
The preceding verse called upon believers, particularly those weak in faith, to try to become perfect Muslims, and pointed out to them the means by which they could become so. The present verse makes it clear that if, even after this warning and after God’s clear Signs had come to them, they should slip and digress from the true path, they would find God "Mighty and Wise", hinting that in that case they would rightly deserve punishment by the Wise God Who possesses the power to punish.
The word "Wise" also hints that erring ones should not despair; for, God being Wise, He has kept the way open for their return to the right faith. In fact, the liability of man to err is not without purpose. In His eternal wisdom, God has made man a free agent who is liable to err, so that his error might serve as an incentive for him to rise again and make a redoubled effort towards the ideal.
لِّلَّذِیۡنَ یُؤۡلُوۡنَ مِنۡ نِّسَآئِہِمۡ تَرَبُّصُ اَرۡبَعَۃِ اَشۡہُرٍ ۖ فَاِنۡ فَآءُوۡ فَاِنَّ اللّٰہَ غَفُوۡرٌ رَّحِیۡمٌ
在述及立誓的那两节开头和插入的经文之后, «古兰经» 现在又回到夫妻关系的原题上来。这节经文谈到那些立誓要与自己妻子离异的人, 但实际上还没有同她们离婚 。有趣的是, 在谈到离婚的这一论题时可以看到, «古兰经» 先谈月经 (2:223), 这是一种暂时的和不完全的然而不是真正的分离, 然后 (像在这节经文中) 它谈及真正的然而是尚未完全肯定的分离。然后, 在随后的几节经文中谈及真正的然而是可撤回的离婚。最后, (2:231) 它谈及不可撤回的离婚。伊斯兰教认识并且坚持认为离婚必然是一种不好的事情, 在离婚的道路上确实巧妙地安排了尽可能多的一系列障碍。伊斯兰教给予一个立誓不再接近他妻子的人至多四个月的时间。在这段时间里, 他必须或者同妻子和解, 恢复夫妻关系, 或者双方实行离异。伊斯兰教绝不容许不离婚而无限期分离, 使那个女人好像是 “悬挂在那里。” اِيْلَاء (Ila’) 意指离异的誓言。根据这种誓言, 一个女人在那 “愚昧的时代” 处于一种悬挂的状态。她既不能嫁别人, 又不能和她的丈夫有夫妻关系。
اِیْـلَا ءً: اٰلٰی یُؤْلِیْ اِیْلَا ءً: قسم کھانا۔ یہ اَ لَا سے نکلا ہے جس کے معنے کسی کام میں کمی یا تاخیر کرنے کے ہیں اور اِیْـلَا ء قرآن کریم کے محاورہ میں اس قسم کو کہتے ہیں جو اس بات پر کھائی جائے کہ مرد اپنی بیوی سے کوئی تعلق نہ رکھے گا (مفردات) چونکہ اس قسم میں عورت کے حق کا اتلاف ہے اس لئے اسے اِیْـلَا ء کہا گیا۔
(۴) فَاءَ یَفِیْءُ فَـیْـئًا: لوٹ آیا۔ فَاءَ الْاَمْرَ رَجَعَ اِلَیْہِ: اس بات کی طرف لوٹ آیا (اقرب) فَاءَ کا لفظ نیک امور کی طرف لوٹنے کے متعلق استعمال ہوتا ہے (مفردات) اصل میں اس کے معنے تعاون اور امداد باہمی کے لئے ایک دوسرے کے ساتھ مل کر کام کرنے کے ہوتے ہیں اور سایہ کو بھی فَیْئٌ کہتے ہیں کیونکہ وہ سورج کے ساتھ اِدھر سے اُدھر ہوتا رہتا ہے۔ ان دونوں معنوں کو مدِّنظر رکھتے ہوئے فَاءَ بالعموم اچھے معنوں میں استعمال ہونے لگا ہے۔
عرب میں یہ رواج تھا کہ بعض لوگ اپنی بیویوں کو طلاق تو نہ دیتے مگر قسم کھا لیتے تھے کہ ہم ان سے تعلق نہیں رکھیں گے۔ اس
After the two introductory and intervening verses in which the subject of taking oaths has been dealt with, the Qur’an now reverts to the original subject of conjugal relations. The verse speaks of those men who vow abstinence from their wives without actually divorcing them. It is, interesting to note that while approaching the subject of divorce, the Qur’an first speaks of menstruation (2:223) which is a sort of temporary and partial, though unreal, separation. Then (as in the present verse), it speaks of real though indefinite separation. And then, in the succeeding verses, it speaks of real though revocable divorce. And finally (2:231) it speaks of irrevocable divorce. A really wonderful order designed to put as many obstacles as possible in the way of divorce, which Islam recognizes and retains as a sort of necessary evil. Islam allows four months at the most to a person who swears not to approach his wife. During this period, he must either get reconciled to his wife and restore conjugal relation
Important Words:
یؤلون (vow) is derived from the root لاآ meaning, he fell short; or he fell short of doing what he ought to have done; or he was remiss. آلی means, he swore. آلیت علی الشیء means, I swore to do the thing. آلیت لا افعل کذا means, I swore that I would not do such a thing. آلی من زوجه شھرا means, he swore he would not go near his wife (i.e. not go in unto her) for a month. ائتلی also gives the same meaning as آلی i.e. he swore, as in 24:23. ایلاء means, an oath or the act of swearing; and technically it means, a vow taken by a husband not to go near his wife (Aqrab & Lane).
تربص (waiting) is derived from ربص. They say ربص به i.e. he waited for a good or an evil to befall him. تربص means, he waited or he awaited, or he tarried waiting. تربص عن الامر means, he remained waiting and did not do the thing, i.e. he abstained from doing it (Aqrab).
Commentary:
After the two introductory and intervening verses in which the subject of taking oaths has been dealt with, the Quran now reverts to the original subject of conjugal relations. The verse under comment speaks of those men who vow abstinence from their wives without actually divorcing them. It is, in this connection, interesting to note that while approaching the subject of divorce, dealt with in the succeeding verses, the Quran first speaks of menstruation (2:223) which is a sort of temporary and partial, though unreal, separation. Then (as in the present verse) it speaks of real though indefinite separation. And then, as in the succeeding verses, it speaks of real though revocable divorce. And finally (2:231) it speaks of irrevocable divorce. A really wonderful order designed to put as many obstacles as possible in the way of divorce which Islam recognizes and retains as a sort of necessary evil.
As clearly stated in the verse under comment, Islam allows four months at the most to a person who swears not to approach his wife. During this period, he must either get reconciled to his wife and restore conjugal relations, or separation will be effected between the two. Islam would in no case permit indefinite separation without divorce, leaving the woman "suspended" as it were.
The words if they go back from the vow, surely Allah is Most Forgiving, Merciful indicate that swearing abstinence from one’s wife is reprehensible in the sight of God Who loves to see reconciliation between husband and wife. The verse thus abolishes the custom of ایلاءwhich was prevalent among the Arabs before the advent of Islam and by which it was sought to deprive women of their conjugal rights for long and indefinite periods.
165
在述及立誓的那两节开头和插入的经文之后, «古兰经» 现在又回到夫妻关系的原题上来。这节经文谈到那些立誓要与自己妻子离异的人, 但实际上还没有同她们离婚 。有趣的是, 在谈到离婚的这一论题时可以看到, «古兰经» 先谈月经 (2:223), 这是一种暂时的和不完全的然而不是真正的分离, 然后 (像在这节经文中) 它谈及真正的然而是尚未完全肯定的分离。然后, 在随后的几节经文中谈及真正的然而是可撤回的离婚。最后, (2:231) 它谈及不可撤回的离婚。伊斯兰教认识并且坚持认为离婚必然是一种不好的事情, 在离婚的道路上确实巧妙地安排了尽可能多的一系列障碍。伊斯兰教给予一个立誓不再接近他妻子的人至多四个月的时间。在这段时间里, 他必须或者同妻子和解, 恢复夫妻关系, 或者双方实行离异。伊斯兰教绝不容许不离婚而无限期分离, 使那个女人好像是 “悬挂在那里。” اِيْلَاء (Ila’) 意指离异的誓言。根据这种誓言, 一个女人在那 “愚昧的时代” 处于一种悬挂的状态。她既不能嫁别人, 又不能和她的丈夫有夫妻关系。
3
اِیْـلَا ءً: اٰلٰی یُؤْلِیْ اِیْلَا ءً: قسم کھانا۔ یہ اَ لَا سے نکلا ہے جس کے معنے کسی کام میں کمی یا تاخیر کرنے کے ہیں اور اِیْـلَا ء قرآن کریم کے محاورہ میں اس قسم کو کہتے ہیں جو اس بات پر کھائی جائے کہ مرد اپنی بیوی سے کوئی تعلق نہ رکھے گا (مفردات) چونکہ اس قسم میں عورت کے حق کا اتلاف ہے اس لئے اسے اِیْـلَا ء کہا گیا۔
4
(۴) فَاءَ یَفِیْءُ فَـیْـئًا: لوٹ آیا۔ فَاءَ الْاَمْرَ رَجَعَ اِلَیْہِ: اس بات کی طرف لوٹ آیا (اقرب) فَاءَ کا لفظ نیک امور کی طرف لوٹنے کے متعلق استعمال ہوتا ہے (مفردات) اصل میں اس کے معنے تعاون اور امداد باہمی کے لئے ایک دوسرے کے ساتھ مل کر کام کرنے کے ہوتے ہیں اور سایہ کو بھی فَیْئٌ کہتے ہیں کیونکہ وہ سورج کے ساتھ اِدھر سے اُدھر ہوتا رہتا ہے۔ ان دونوں معنوں کو مدِّنظر رکھتے ہوئے فَاءَ بالعموم اچھے معنوں میں استعمال ہونے لگا ہے۔
عرب میں یہ رواج تھا کہ بعض لوگ اپنی بیویوں کو طلاق تو نہ دیتے مگر قسم کھا لیتے تھے کہ ہم ان سے تعلق نہیں رکھیں گے۔ اس
233
Important Words:
یؤلون (vow) is derived from the root لاآ meaning, he fell short; or he fell short of doing what he ought to have done; or he was remiss. آلی means, he swore. آلیت علی الشیء means, I swore to do the thing. آلیت لا افعل کذا means, I swore that I would not do such a thing. آلی من زوجه شھرا means, he swore he would not go near his wife (i.e. not go in unto her) for a month. ائتلی also gives the same meaning as آلی i.e. he swore, as in 24:23. ایلاء means, an oath or the act of swearing; and technically it means, a vow taken by a husband not to go near his wife (Aqrab & Lane).
تربص (waiting) is derived from ربص. They say ربص به i.e. he waited for a good or an evil to befall him. تربص means, he waited or he awaited, or he tarried waiting. تربص عن الامر means, he remained waiting and did not do the thing, i.e. he abstained from doing it (Aqrab).
Commentary:
After the two introductory and intervening verses in which the subject of taking oaths has been dealt with, the Quran now reverts to the original subject of conjugal relations. The verse under comment speaks of those men who vow abstinence from their wives without actually divorcing them. It is, in this connection, interesting to note that while approaching the subject of divorce, dealt with in the succeeding verses, the Quran first speaks of menstruation (2:223) which is a sort of temporary and partial, though unreal, separation. Then (as in the present verse) it speaks of real though indefinite separation. And then, as in the succeeding verses, it speaks of real though revocable divorce. And finally (2:231) it speaks of irrevocable divorce. A really wonderful order designed to put as many obstacles as possible in the way of divorce which Islam recognizes and retains as a sort of necessary evil.
As clearly stated in the verse under comment, Islam allows four months at the most to a person who swears not to approach his wife. During this period, he must either get reconciled to his wife and restore conjugal relations, or separation will be effected between the two. Islam would in no case permit indefinite separation without divorce, leaving the woman "suspended" as it were.
The words if they go back from the vow, surely Allah is Most Forgiving, Merciful indicate that swearing abstinence from one’s wife is reprehensible in the sight of God Who loves to see reconciliation between husband and wife. The verse thus abolishes the custom of ایلاءwhich was prevalent among the Arabs before the advent of Islam and by which it was sought to deprive women of their conjugal rights for long and indefinite periods.
275
After the two introductory and intervening verses in which the subject of taking oaths has been dealt with, the Qur’an now reverts to the original subject of conjugal relations. The verse speaks of those men who vow abstinence from their wives without actually divorcing them. It is, interesting to note that while approaching the subject of divorce, the Qur’an first speaks of menstruation (2:223) which is a sort of temporary and partial, though unreal, separation. Then (as in the present verse), it speaks of real though indefinite separation. And then, in the succeeding verses, it speaks of real though revocable divorce. And finally (2:231) it speaks of irrevocable divorce. A really wonderful order designed to put as many obstacles as possible in the way of divorce, which Islam recognizes and retains as a sort of necessary evil. Islam allows four months at the most to a person who swears not to approach his wife. During this period, he must either get reconciled to his wife and restore conjugal relation
اَلطَّلٰقُ مَرَّتَانِ ۖ فَاِمۡسَاکٌۢ بِمَعۡرُوۡفٍ اَوۡ تَسۡرِیۡحٌۢ بِاِحۡسٰنٍ ۗ وَلَا یَحِلُّ لَکُمۡ اَنۡ تَاۡخُذُوۡا مِمَّاۤ اٰتَیۡتُمُوۡہُنَّ شَیۡـًٔا اِلَّاۤ اَنۡ یَّخَافَاۤ اَلَّا یُقِیۡمَا حُدُوۡدَ اللّٰہِ ۖ فَاِنۡ خِفۡتُمۡ اَلَّا یُقِیۡمَا حُدُوۡدَ اللّٰہِ فَلَا جُنَاحَ عَلَیۡہِمَا فِیۡمَا افۡتَدَتۡ بِہٖ ۗ تِلۡکَ حُدُوۡدُ اللّٰہِ فَلَا تَعۡتَدُوۡہَا ۚ وَمَنۡ یَّتَعَدَّ حُدُوۡدَ اللّٰہِ فَاُولٰٓئِکَ ہُمُ الظّٰلِمُوۡنَ
2:228.
2:232; 4:130; 65:3.
这节经文含有对离婚第五种约制。如果丈夫想和妻子离异, 他必须在三个不同时期声明离婚, 每次在她个别的洁净时期中并没有和她同过房, 在同一时期声明两次或三次离婚, 是不准许的。这在 مَرَّتَان (Marratan, 两次) 这一字中可以看出。这字的意思是, 发生在两个不同时期的一件事情, 而不是发生在同一时间的两件事情。穆圣把这种同一时间的集中声明, 不管几次, 都只作一次离婚声明看待 (تِرْمِذِی与داؤد)。根据纳萨伊 (نَسَائِی) 说, 有一天穆圣听到有人在同一时间内作了三次离婚声明, 非常生气地说, “在我还在你们中间时, 就把安拉的经典当儿戏吗?” 在第一和第二次声明离婚后, 丈夫在 عِدَّة (‘Iddat), 既等候时期内, 不论经过或不经过妻子的同意, 都可以召回离了婚的妻子; 但是等候时期过了以后, 他要经过她的同意而且要重新娶她才能收回。在第三次离婚后, 丈夫就丧失了这种权利, 这对夫妻就最终离异了。穆圣的一个伙伴有一次问他说, “«古兰经» 在这里只谈了两次离婚, 第三次离婚在什么地方?” 穆圣向他提到 “以厚道的做法辞离她们” 这句话, 意思是说, 第一和第二次离婚之后, 丈夫可以保留并且可以再娶她, 如果她也同意结婚的话; 但是如果他要最后离异的话, 他应与她离婚, 即第三次离婚 {جَرِيْر (Jarir) 与 مُسْنَد (Musnad)}。这一点在下一节经文中还要进一步说明。这样, 这里的 تَسْرِيْح (Tasrih) 这个字意为 طَلَاق (Talaq), 即离婚。
一个人和他的妻子离婚后, 他就丧失了他已给她的嫁妆 (办嫁妆的钱); 如果在离婚时他还没有给过她嫁妆, 在正式离婚之前, 他必须给她那笔钱。而且, 他不准许取回作为馈赠或礼物而给她的任何东西。
不过, 如果提出离婚的是女方, 法律上称为 خُلْع (khul‘), 她必须通过 قَاضِیْ (Qadi) 即法官, 正如 “你们 (双方) 害怕” 这几个字所暗示的那样。在这种情况下, 她必须归还男方全部或部分嫁妆以及男方过去送给她的礼品, 这要双方议定或由法官决定。盖斯•彬•撒比特 (قَيْس بِنْ ثَابِتْ, Qais bin Thabit) 的妻子杰米拉 (جَمِيْلَة, Jamilah) 那个案例提供了妇女行使 خُلْع 权的一个很好的实际说明。她要求和丈夫盖斯离婚, 理由是她不喜欢他, 也就是说, 他们性格不合, 不能相处在一起。穆圣给了他 خُلْع 的许可, 但是她必须把他给她的果园还给他 (布哈理)。
عام طور پر اس زمانہ کے علماء یہ سمجھتے ہیں کہ جس نے تین دفعہ طلاق کہہ دیا اس کی طلاق بائن ہو جاتی ہے یعنی اس کی بیوی اس سے دوبارہ اس وقت تک شادی نہیں کر سکتی جب تک کسی اور سے نکاح نہ کر لے مگر یہ غلط ہے کیونکہ قرآن کریم میں صاف فرمایا گیا ہے اَلطَّـلَا قُ مَرَّتٰنِ یعنی وہ طلاق جو بائن نہیں وہ دو دفعہ ہو سکتی ہے اس طور پر کہ پہلے مرد طلاق دے پھر یا تو طلاق واپس لے لے اور رجوع کرے یا عدت گزرنے دے اور نکاح کرے۔ پھر اَن بَن کی صورت میں دوبارہ طلاق دے۔ پس ایسی طلاق کا دو دفعہ ہونا تو قطعی طور پر ثابت ہے۔ پس ایک ہی دفعہ تین یا تین سے زیادہ بار طلاق کہہ دینے کو بائن قرار دین
تمہیں یعنی ملتِ اسلامیہ یا اسلام پر ایمان رکھنے والی حکومت کو۔
اِنْ خِفْتُمْ میں بتایا گیا ہے کہ اگر محکمہ قضا اس بات کا فیصلہ کرے کہ عورت خاوند کے پاس رہنے کے لئے راضی نہیں اور اس کی نارضا مندی کی وجہ سے مرد بھی عدل نہ رکھ سکے گا‘ تو عورت اگر کچھ دینا چاہے تو مرد کو اجازت ہے کہ کچھ مال لیکر اسے طلاق دے دے۔ لیکن وہ صرف اتنا ہی مال لے سکتا ہے جتنا اس نے خود دیا ہو اور کچھ نہیں۔
2:232; 4:130; 65:3.
This verse contains the fifth check on divorce. A man who seeks separation from his wife must pronounce divorce on three separate occasions, each in a separate period of purity when he has not gone in unto her during that period. The pronouncement of divorce twice or thrice at one and the same time is not permissible as is hinted in the word Marratan (twice) which signifies a thing happening on two separate occasions and not two things happening at one and the same time. The Holy Prophet treated such collective pronouncements, whatever their number, as only one divorce (Tirmidhi & Dawud). According to Nasa’i, the Holy Prophet was extremely angry when one day he was told that a person had made all the three pronouncements of divorce at one and the same time and said, "Is the Book of God going to be made a plaything while I am yet among you?" After the pronouncement of the first two divorces, the husband can take back the divorced wife within ‘Iddat, i.e. the period of waiting, with or
When a person divorces his wife, he forfeits the dower-money he has given her; and if at the time of divorce he has not yet given her the dower- money, he must make the payment before the divorce becomes effective. Again, he is not allowed to take back anything he might have given her in the form of gifts and presents.
If, however, it is the wife who demands separation, technically known as Khula‘, she must get it through a Qadi or judge as the words "you fear," in the plural number, hint. In this case she has to part with, in full or in part, her dowry as well as the gifts she might have received from her husband, as agreed upon by the parties or decided by the judge. The case of Jamilah, wife of Qais bin Thabit, provides a good illustration of the exercise of the right of Khula‘ by women. She demanded separation from her husband. Qais, on the ground that she did not like him, i.e. their temperaments being different she could not get on with him. She was granted Khula‘ by the Holy Prophet, but she had to return to her husband the orchard he had given her (Bukhari).
See 2:228.
2:232; 4:130; 65:3.
Important Words:
امساك (retain) is derived from امسك which is again derived from مسك. They say امسك به i.e. he stuck to it. امسك is both transitive and intransitive. امسكه means, he got hold of it and stopped and retained it. امسك عن الکلام means, he abstained from talking. امساك means, (1) to hold or stop or prevent or retain; (2) to refrain or abstain (Aqrab).
تسریح (send away) is the noun-infinitive from سرح (sarraha) which is derived from سرح. They say سرح المواشی i.e. the cattle went forth for grazing. سرح السیل means, the flood moved on leisurely. سرحه means, he sent him away. سرح فلان زوجته means, he sent away or divorced his wife (Aqrab).
حدود (limits) is the plural of حد i.e. a limit. حده means, he put a limit to it. حد الشیء عن الشیء means, he distinguished one thing from the other. الحد means, (1) the limit or the line where two things meet; (2) last limit or extremity of a thing; (3) that by which a thing may be defined; (4) prescribed punishment for an offence. حدود الله means God’s religious commandments (Aqrab).
Commentary:
This verse contains the fifth check on divorce. A man who seeks permanent and irrevocable separation from his wife must pronounce divorce on three separate occasions, each in a separate طھر i.e. period of purity, when the woman is clean and the man has not gone in unto her during that period of purity. The pronouncement of divorce twice or thrice at one and the same time is not permissible as the verse hints in the word مرتان (twice) which signifies a thing happening on two separate occasions and not two things happening at one and the same time. The Holy Prophet treated such collective pronouncements, whatever their number, as only one divorce (Tirmidhi & Dawud). According to Nasa’i, the Holy Prophet was extremely angry when one day he was told that a person had made all the three pronouncements of divorce at one and the same time, and said: "Is the Book of God going to be made a plaything while I am yet among you?"
After the pronouncement of the first two divorces, the husband can take back the divorced wife within ‘iddah, i.e. the period of waiting, with or without her consent; but after the period of waiting is over, he can take her back only with her consent and that after remarrying her. After the pronouncement of the third divorce, however, the husband forfeits this right and the couple are finally separated. A Companion of the Holy Prophet once asked him saying, "The Quran has here spoken of two divorces only, whence comes in the third!" The Prophet referred him to the Quranic words اوتسریح باحسان i.e. or send them away with kindness meaning thereby that after the pronouncement of the first two divorces the husband was free to retain his wife if he so desired but if he wanted irrevocable separation, he should "send her away", i.e. divorce her a third time (Jarir & Musnad). The point is further made clear in the succeeding verse. Thus the word تسریح here signifies طلاق i.e. divorce.
The present verse also makes it clear that when a person divorces his wife, he forfeits مھر i.e. the dower-money he has given her; and if at the time of divorce he has not yet given her the dower-money agreed on by the parties, he must make the payment before the divorce becomes effective. Again, he is not allowed to take back anything he might have given her in the form of gifts and presents as the clause it is not lawful for you that you take anything of what you have given them indicates.
If, however, it is the wife who demands separation, technically known as خلع (Khul‘a lit. the putting off of clothes etc., or the shedding of old leaves), she must get it through a Qadi or judge as the word خفتم (you fear), which has been put in the plural number, hints. In this case she has to part with, in full or in part, her dowry as well as the gifts she might have received from her husband, as agreed on by the parties or decided by the judge. The case of Jamilah, wife of Qais bin Thabit, provides a good illustration of the exercise of the right of Khul‘a by women. She demanded separation from her husband, Qais, on the ground that she did not like him, i.e. their temperaments being different, she could not get on with him. She was granted Kkul‘a by the Holy Prophet, but she had to return to her husband the orchard he had given her (Bukhari). This right, however, is not to be exercised in a light-hearted manner. The Holy Prophet has condemned the action of a woman who demands separation from her husband without valid reason even as he has condemned the action of a man who divorces his wife without genuine cause. He is reported to have said, "A woman who seeks separation from her husband without a legitimate cause shall be deprived of the fragrance of heaven" (Dawud & Tirmidhi). This is what is hinted in the concluding words, these are the limits prescribed by Allah, so transgress them not, etc. The husband and the wife are both warned to fear God and refrain from transgressing the limits imposed by God for their own good.
b
2:228.
c
2:232; 4:130; 65:3.
170
这节经文含有对离婚第五种约制。如果丈夫想和妻子离异, 他必须在三个不同时期声明离婚, 每次在她个别的洁净时期中并没有和她同过房, 在同一时期声明两次或三次离婚, 是不准许的。这在 مَرَّتَان (Marratan, 两次) 这一字中可以看出。这字的意思是, 发生在两个不同时期的一件事情, 而不是发生在同一时间的两件事情。穆圣把这种同一时间的集中声明, 不管几次, 都只作一次离婚声明看待 (تِرْمِذِی与داؤد)。根据纳萨伊 (نَسَائِی) 说, 有一天穆圣听到有人在同一时间内作了三次离婚声明, 非常生气地说, “在我还在你们中间时, 就把安拉的经典当儿戏吗?” 在第一和第二次声明离婚后, 丈夫在 عِدَّة (‘Iddat), 既等候时期内, 不论经过或不经过妻子的同意, 都可以召回离了婚的妻子; 但是等候时期过了以后, 他要经过她的同意而且要重新娶她才能收回。在第三次离婚后, 丈夫就丧失了这种权利, 这对夫妻就最终离异了。穆圣的一个伙伴有一次问他说, “«古兰经» 在这里只谈了两次离婚, 第三次离婚在什么地方?” 穆圣向他提到 “以厚道的做法辞离她们” 这句话, 意思是说, 第一和第二次离婚之后, 丈夫可以保留并且可以再娶她, 如果她也同意结婚的话; 但是如果他要最后离异的话, 他应与她离婚, 即第三次离婚 {جَرِيْر (Jarir) 与 مُسْنَد (Musnad)}。这一点在下一节经文中还要进一步说明。这样, 这里的 تَسْرِيْح (Tasrih) 这个字意为 طَلَاق (Talaq), 即离婚。
171
一个人和他的妻子离婚后, 他就丧失了他已给她的嫁妆 (办嫁妆的钱); 如果在离婚时他还没有给过她嫁妆, 在正式离婚之前, 他必须给她那笔钱。而且, 他不准许取回作为馈赠或礼物而给她的任何东西。
172
不过, 如果提出离婚的是女方, 法律上称为 خُلْع (khul‘), 她必须通过 قَاضِیْ (Qadi) 即法官, 正如 “你们 (双方) 害怕” 这几个字所暗示的那样。在这种情况下, 她必须归还男方全部或部分嫁妆以及男方过去送给她的礼品, 这要双方议定或由法官决定。盖斯•彬•撒比特 (قَيْس بِنْ ثَابِتْ, Qais bin Thabit) 的妻子杰米拉 (جَمِيْلَة, Jamilah) 那个案例提供了妇女行使 خُلْع 权的一个很好的实际说明。她要求和丈夫盖斯离婚, 理由是她不喜欢他, 也就是说, 他们性格不合, 不能相处在一起。穆圣给了他 خُلْع 的许可, 但是她必须把他给她的果园还给他 (布哈理)。
1
عام طور پر اس زمانہ کے علماء یہ سمجھتے ہیں کہ جس نے تین دفعہ طلاق کہہ دیا اس کی طلاق بائن ہو جاتی ہے یعنی اس کی بیوی اس سے دوبارہ اس وقت تک شادی نہیں کر سکتی جب تک کسی اور سے نکاح نہ کر لے مگر یہ غلط ہے کیونکہ قرآن کریم میں صاف فرمایا گیا ہے اَلطَّـلَا قُ مَرَّتٰنِ یعنی وہ طلاق جو بائن نہیں وہ دو دفعہ ہو سکتی ہے اس طور پر کہ پہلے مرد طلاق دے پھر یا تو طلاق واپس لے لے اور رجوع کرے یا عدت گزرنے دے اور نکاح کرے۔ پھر اَن بَن کی صورت میں دوبارہ طلاق دے۔ پس ایسی طلاق کا دو دفعہ ہونا تو قطعی طور پر ثابت ہے۔ پس ایک ہی دفعہ تین یا تین سے زیادہ بار طلاق کہہ دینے کو بائن قرار دین
2
تمہیں یعنی ملتِ اسلامیہ یا اسلام پر ایمان رکھنے والی حکومت کو۔
3
اِنْ خِفْتُمْ میں بتایا گیا ہے کہ اگر محکمہ قضا اس بات کا فیصلہ کرے کہ عورت خاوند کے پاس رہنے کے لئے راضی نہیں اور اس کی نارضا مندی کی وجہ سے مرد بھی عدل نہ رکھ سکے گا‘ تو عورت اگر کچھ دینا چاہے تو مرد کو اجازت ہے کہ کچھ مال لیکر اسے طلاق دے دے۔ لیکن وہ صرف اتنا ہی مال لے سکتا ہے جتنا اس نے خود دیا ہو اور کچھ نہیں۔
a
See 2:228.
b
2:232; 4:130; 65:3.
236
Important Words:
امساك (retain) is derived from امسك which is again derived from مسك. They say امسك به i.e. he stuck to it. امسك is both transitive and intransitive. امسكه means, he got hold of it and stopped and retained it. امسك عن الکلام means, he abstained from talking. امساك means, (1) to hold or stop or prevent or retain; (2) to refrain or abstain (Aqrab).
تسریح (send away) is the noun-infinitive from سرح (sarraha) which is derived from سرح. They say سرح المواشی i.e. the cattle went forth for grazing. سرح السیل means, the flood moved on leisurely. سرحه means, he sent him away. سرح فلان زوجته means, he sent away or divorced his wife (Aqrab).
حدود (limits) is the plural of حد i.e. a limit. حده means, he put a limit to it. حد الشیء عن الشیء means, he distinguished one thing from the other. الحد means, (1) the limit or the line where two things meet; (2) last limit or extremity of a thing; (3) that by which a thing may be defined; (4) prescribed punishment for an offence. حدود الله means God’s religious commandments (Aqrab).
Commentary:
This verse contains the fifth check on divorce. A man who seeks permanent and irrevocable separation from his wife must pronounce divorce on three separate occasions, each in a separate طھر i.e. period of purity, when the woman is clean and the man has not gone in unto her during that period of purity. The pronouncement of divorce twice or thrice at one and the same time is not permissible as the verse hints in the word مرتان (twice) which signifies a thing happening on two separate occasions and not two things happening at one and the same time. The Holy Prophet treated such collective pronouncements, whatever their number, as only one divorce (Tirmidhi & Dawud). According to Nasa’i, the Holy Prophet was extremely angry when one day he was told that a person had made all the three pronouncements of divorce at one and the same time, and said: "Is the Book of God going to be made a plaything while I am yet among you?"
After the pronouncement of the first two divorces, the husband can take back the divorced wife within ‘iddah, i.e. the period of waiting, with or without her consent; but after the period of waiting is over, he can take her back only with her consent and that after remarrying her. After the pronouncement of the third divorce, however, the husband forfeits this right and the couple are finally separated. A Companion of the Holy Prophet once asked him saying, "The Quran has here spoken of two divorces only, whence comes in the third!" The Prophet referred him to the Quranic words اوتسریح باحسان i.e. or send them away with kindness meaning thereby that after the pronouncement of the first two divorces the husband was free to retain his wife if he so desired but if he wanted irrevocable separation, he should "send her away", i.e. divorce her a third time (Jarir & Musnad). The point is further made clear in the succeeding verse. Thus the word تسریح here signifies طلاق i.e. divorce.
The present verse also makes it clear that when a person divorces his wife, he forfeits مھر i.e. the dower-money he has given her; and if at the time of divorce he has not yet given her the dower-money agreed on by the parties, he must make the payment before the divorce becomes effective. Again, he is not allowed to take back anything he might have given her in the form of gifts and presents as the clause it is not lawful for you that you take anything of what you have given them indicates.
If, however, it is the wife who demands separation, technically known as خلع (Khul‘a lit. the putting off of clothes etc., or the shedding of old leaves), she must get it through a Qadi or judge as the word خفتم (you fear), which has been put in the plural number, hints. In this case she has to part with, in full or in part, her dowry as well as the gifts she might have received from her husband, as agreed on by the parties or decided by the judge. The case of Jamilah, wife of Qais bin Thabit, provides a good illustration of the exercise of the right of Khul‘a by women. She demanded separation from her husband, Qais, on the ground that she did not like him, i.e. their temperaments being different, she could not get on with him. She was granted Kkul‘a by the Holy Prophet, but she had to return to her husband the orchard he had given her (Bukhari). This right, however, is not to be exercised in a light-hearted manner. The Holy Prophet has condemned the action of a woman who demands separation from her husband without valid reason even as he has condemned the action of a man who divorces his wife without genuine cause. He is reported to have said, "A woman who seeks separation from her husband without a legitimate cause shall be deprived of the fragrance of heaven" (Dawud & Tirmidhi). This is what is hinted in the concluding words, these are the limits prescribed by Allah, so transgress them not, etc. The husband and the wife are both warned to fear God and refrain from transgressing the limits imposed by God for their own good.
b
2:228.c
2:232; 4:130; 65:3.
280
This verse contains the fifth check on divorce. A man who seeks separation from his wife must pronounce divorce on three separate occasions, each in a separate period of purity when he has not gone in unto her during that period. The pronouncement of divorce twice or thrice at one and the same time is not permissible as is hinted in the word Marratan (twice) which signifies a thing happening on two separate occasions and not two things happening at one and the same time. The Holy Prophet treated such collective pronouncements, whatever their number, as only one divorce (Tirmidhi & Dawud). According to Nasa’i, the Holy Prophet was extremely angry when one day he was told that a person had made all the three pronouncements of divorce at one and the same time and said, "Is the Book of God going to be made a plaything while I am yet among you?" After the pronouncement of the first two divorces, the husband can take back the divorced wife within ‘Iddat, i.e. the period of waiting, with or
281
When a person divorces his wife, he forfeits the dower-money he has given her; and if at the time of divorce he has not yet given her the dower- money, he must make the payment before the divorce becomes effective. Again, he is not allowed to take back anything he might have given her in the form of gifts and presents.
282
If, however, it is the wife who demands separation, technically known as Khula‘, she must get it through a Qadi or judge as the words "you fear," in the plural number, hint. In this case she has to part with, in full or in part, her dowry as well as the gifts she might have received from her husband, as agreed upon by the parties or decided by the judge. The case of Jamilah, wife of Qais bin Thabit, provides a good illustration of the exercise of the right of Khula‘ by women. She demanded separation from her husband. Qais, on the ground that she did not like him, i.e. their temperaments being different she could not get on with him. She was granted Khula‘ by the Holy Prophet, but she had to return to her husband the orchard he had given her (Bukhari).
فَاِنۡ طَلَّقَہَا فَلَا تَحِلُّ لَہٗ مِنۡۢ بَعۡدُ حَتّٰی تَنۡکِحَ زَوۡجًا غَیۡرَہٗ ۗ فَاِنۡ طَلَّقَہَا فَلَا جُنَاحَ عَلَیۡہِمَاۤ اَنۡ یَّتَرَاجَعَاۤ اِنۡ ظَنَّاۤ اَنۡ یُّقِیۡمَا حُدُوۡدَ اللّٰہِ ۗ وَتِلۡکَ حُدُوۡدُ اللّٰہِ یُبَیِّنُہَا لِقَوۡمٍ یَّعۡلَمُوۡنَ
这节经文述及第三次和最终一次离婚。在该次离婚后, 丈夫再也无权与妻子破镜重圆, 除非那离了婚的女人再嫁另一个男人并建立夫妻关系, 然后又与他正式离婚, 或者他死了, 使她有自由再嫁另一个男人。藉着离婚法律中包括这一条款, 伊斯兰教一方面提高婚姻关系的严肃性, 另一方面, 也给一度过着夫妻生活的两个人提供一个重新结合的机会, 虽然机会是很小的。
This verse refers to the third and final divorce after which the husband loses all right of reunion with his wife unless the divorced woman marries another man and establishes conjugal relations with him, and is then formally divorced by him or he dies, leaving her free to marry another man. By the inclusion of this provision in the law of divorce Islam has, on the one hand, enhanced the sanctity of the marriage tie which must not be trifled with; and, on the other, it has afforded yet another, though extremely remote, opportunity to the couple who once had lived as husband and wife to become reunited if they so desire.
Important Words:
یتراجعا (return to each other) is derived from رجع i.e. he returned; the word is used to indicate the coming together of people after their dispersal or separation, as they say تراجع القوم i.e. the people returned to the place from where they separated or left (Aqrab).
یقیما (observe) is derived from اقام which means, he made a thing stand upright; he observed or duly performed a religious commandment or duty, etc. (Lane). See also under 2:4.
تنکح (she marries) is derived from نکح. They say نکح or نکحت meaning (1) he or she married a spouse; (2) he or she had sexual intercourse with his or her spouse. In the present verse the word is used in the latter sense. See also 2:222.
Commentary:
This verse refers to the third and final pronouncement of divorce after which the husband loses all right of reunion with his wife unless the divorced woman marries another man and establishes conjugal relations with him, and is then formally divorced by him or he dies, leaving her free to marry another man. By the inclusion of this provision in the law of divorce, Islam has, on the one hand, enhanced the sanctity of the marriage tie which must not be trifled with and has declared unlawful the evil practice of حلالة (halalah); and, on the other, it has afforded yet another opportunity to the couple who once had lived as husband and wife to become reunited if they so desired. The practice of halalah referred to above consists in a divorced woman marrying a man, other than her former husband, with the object of obtaining divorce from him and thereby making herself lawful for the former husband. Islam condemns this practice as a thing accursed (Tirmidhi ch. on Nikah) and enjoins that marriage with and divorce from another husband must both be genuine.
173
这节经文述及第三次和最终一次离婚。在该次离婚后, 丈夫再也无权与妻子破镜重圆, 除非那离了婚的女人再嫁另一个男人并建立夫妻关系, 然后又与他正式离婚, 或者他死了, 使她有自由再嫁另一个男人。藉着离婚法律中包括这一条款, 伊斯兰教一方面提高婚姻关系的严肃性, 另一方面, 也给一度过着夫妻生活的两个人提供一个重新结合的机会, 虽然机会是很小的。
237
Important Words:
یتراجعا (return to each other) is derived from رجع i.e. he returned; the word is used to indicate the coming together of people after their dispersal or separation, as they say تراجع القوم i.e. the people returned to the place from where they separated or left (Aqrab).
یقیما (observe) is derived from اقام which means, he made a thing stand upright; he observed or duly performed a religious commandment or duty, etc. (Lane). See also under 2:4.
تنکح (she marries) is derived from نکح. They say نکح or نکحت meaning (1) he or she married a spouse; (2) he or she had sexual intercourse with his or her spouse. In the present verse the word is used in the latter sense. See also 2:222.
Commentary:
This verse refers to the third and final pronouncement of divorce after which the husband loses all right of reunion with his wife unless the divorced woman marries another man and establishes conjugal relations with him, and is then formally divorced by him or he dies, leaving her free to marry another man. By the inclusion of this provision in the law of divorce, Islam has, on the one hand, enhanced the sanctity of the marriage tie which must not be trifled with and has declared unlawful the evil practice of حلالة (halalah); and, on the other, it has afforded yet another opportunity to the couple who once had lived as husband and wife to become reunited if they so desired. The practice of halalah referred to above consists in a divorced woman marrying a man, other than her former husband, with the object of obtaining divorce from him and thereby making herself lawful for the former husband. Islam condemns this practice as a thing accursed (Tirmidhi ch. on Nikah) and enjoins that marriage with and divorce from another husband must both be genuine.
283
This verse refers to the third and final divorce after which the husband loses all right of reunion with his wife unless the divorced woman marries another man and establishes conjugal relations with him, and is then formally divorced by him or he dies, leaving her free to marry another man. By the inclusion of this provision in the law of divorce Islam has, on the one hand, enhanced the sanctity of the marriage tie which must not be trifled with; and, on the other, it has afforded yet another, though extremely remote, opportunity to the couple who once had lived as husband and wife to become reunited if they so desire.
۞ وَالۡوٰلِدٰتُ یُرۡضِعۡنَ اَوۡلٰدَہُنَّ حَوۡلَیۡنِ کَامِلَیۡنِ ۖ لِمَنۡ اَرَادَ اَنۡ یُّتِمَّ الرَّضَاعَۃَ ۚ وَعَلَی الۡمَوۡلُوۡدِ لَہٗ رِزۡقُہُنَّ وَکِسۡوَتُہُنَّ بِالۡمَعۡرُوۡفِ ۚ لَا تُکَلَّفُ نَفۡسٌ اِلَّا وُسۡعَہَا ۚ لَا تُضَآرَّ وٰلِدَۃٌۢ بِوَلَدِہَا وَلَا مَوۡلُوۡدٌ لَّہٗ بِوَلَدِہٖ ۚ وَعَلَی الۡوَارِثِ مِثۡلُ ذٰلِکَ ۗ فَاِنۡ اَرَادَا فِصَالًا عَنۡ تَرَاضٍ مِّنۡہُمَا وَتَشَاوُرٍ فَلَا جُنَاحَ عَلَیۡہِمَا ۗ وَاِنۡ اَرَدتُّمۡ اَنۡ تَسۡتَرۡضِعُوۡۤا اَوۡلٰدَکُمۡ فَلَا جُنَاحَ عَلَیۡکُمۡ اِذَا سَلَّمۡتُمۡ مَّاۤ اٰتَیۡتُمۡ بِالۡمَعۡرُوۡفِ ۗ وَاتَّقُوا اللّٰہَ وَاعۡلَمُوۡۤا اَنَّ اللّٰہَ بِمَا تَعۡمَلُوۡنَ بَصِیۡرٌ
31:15; 46:16.
65:7.
2:287; 6:153; 7:43; 23:63; 65:8.
لَا تُضَآرَّ (La Tudarra) 这一用语, 既是主动又是被动语态; 因此它的意思可以是: (1) 母亲不应使父亲由于他的孩子而受苦; (2) 不应使母亲由于她的孩子而受苦; 这里这两种意义都可同等适用。
这里用 مَوْلُوْدٌ لَهٗ (Mauludun la-hu, 孩子所归属的人) 这几个字, 而不用较简单的 وَالِد (Walid, 父亲) 这个字, 为的是指出, 具有所生的孩子, 是父亲的固有的权利而且有抚养他孩子的天职。
继承一个死者的财产的人, 对他留下的孩子一定要负起抚养成人的责任。
孩子吃奶期至多两年。在这时期结束以前, 如果父母同意, 准许提前断奶。这节经文指示, 如果没有母亲的同意, 孩子不能在两年时期结束前断奶。
یہاں بِالْمَعْرُوْفِ سے مراد باپ کی مَقدرت ہے کہ امیر اپنی طاقت کے مطابق دے اور غریب اپنی طاقت کے مطابق۔ اس جگہ عام دودھ پلانے والیوں کا ذکر نہیں بلکہ ماؤں کا ہے اور یہ ذکر طلاق کے ضمن میں کیا گیا ہے اور کہا گیا ہے کہ اگر دودھ پلانے والی عورت کو طلاق دی جائے تو بچہ کی خاطر عورت کے لئے یہ ضروری ہے کہ بچے کو دودھ مقررہ مدت تک پلائے اور اس کے بدلہ میں خاوند پر فرض ہے کہ عام مزدور عورت کی طرح نہیں بلکہ اپنی توفیق کے مطابق اسے خرچ دے۔ کیونکہ یہ عورت کے جذبات کو ٹھیس پہنچانے والا ہوگا کہ ایک طرف تو اسے مجبور کیا جائے کہ وہ طلاق کے بعد بھی بچہ کو دودھ پلاتی رہے اور دوسری ط
کھانے اور کپڑے سے مراد تمام اخراجات ہیں نہ کہ صرف روٹی اور لباس اور یہ محاورہ ہے تمام ضرورتوں کو پورا کرنے کے متعلق۔
یعنی مرد سے یہ مطالبہ کرنا کہ وہ اپنی طاقت سے زیادہ خرچ کرے یہ بھی نامناسب ہے اور عورت سے مطالبہ کرنا کہ وہ ایک نوکر کی طرح طلاق کے بعد ایک عرصہ گھر میں گزار دے یہ بھی نامناسب ہے۔
یعنی بچہ کو ایک دوسرے پر دباؤ ڈالنے کا ذریعہ نہ بناؤ۔ یہ حکم نہایت لطیف ہے۔ بہت سے نادان اس حرکت کے مرتکب ہوتے ہیں اور نتیجہ یہ ہوتا ہے کہ یا تو بچے ہلاک ہو جاتے ہیں یا ان کی تربیت خراب ہو جاتی ہے۔ اس قسم کا فعل درحقیقت قتل اولاد کے مشابہ ہے اور قرآن کریم نے اس سے روک کر آئندہ اولادوں پر احسان عظیم کیا ہے۔
اس آیت سے معلوم ہوتا ہے کہ بچے کے متعلق دودھ پلانے یا چھڑانے کا فیصلہ قرآن کریم نے نہ مرد کے اختیار میں رکھا ہے نہ عورت کے اختیار میں۔ بلکہ دونوں کو مشترکہ اختیار دیا ہے شاید تمام شرائع کی تاریخ میں یہ منفرد مثال ہے کہ اس طرح اہلی معاملات میں میاں بیوی کو ایک مقام پر کھڑا کرکے برابر کے اختیارات دئیے گئے ہیں۔ ہاں یہ شرط ضرور ہے کہ دودھ پلانے کی مدت جو قرآن کریم نے مقرر کی ہے اس سے زیادہ دیر تک دودھ پلانے پر نہ خاوند مجبور کر سکتا ہے نہ عورت زور دے سکتی ہے۔ جب طلاق کے بعد بھی عورت کے جذبات کا اس قدر خیال رکھنے پر خاوند کو مجبور کیا گیا ہے تو ظاہر ہے کہ جو عورت نکاح میں ہے
قرآنی الفاظ اٰتَیْتُمْ کے ہیں جن کے لفظی معنے ہیں دے دیا ہے‘ دے چکے ہو۔ لیکن اس طرح ترجمہ کیا جائے تو ترجمہ یہ ہوگا کہ جب تم دے دو۔ جو کچھ تم دے چکے ہو۔ اور ظاہر ہے کہ یہ مراد قرآن مجید کی نہیں ہو سکتی۔ پس ان الفاظ کا ترجمہ کرتے وقت ایک اور قاعدہ کو ملحوظ رکھنا ہوگا جو یہ ہے کہ کبھی ماضی کا صیغہ قطعی فیصلہ پر دلالت کرنے کے لئے استعمال کیا جاتا ہے۔ چنانچہ قرآن کریم میں دوسرے کئی مقامات پر بھی یہ محاورہ استعمال کیا گیا ہے۔ مثلاً آتا ہے اِذَا قُمْتُمْ اِلَی الصَّلٰوۃِ فَاغْسِلُوْا وُجُوْھَکُمْ(المآئدۃ: ۷) یعنی جب تم نماز کے لئے کھڑے ہو تو اپنے مونہوں کو اور ہات
31:15; 46:16.
65:7.
2:287; 6:153; 7:43; 23:63; 65:8.
The expression, la Tudarra, is both in the active and the passive voice; the clause may, therefore, mean that: (1) the mother shall not make the father suffer on account of her child; and (2) the mother shall not be made to suffer on account of her child; and both meanings are equally applicable here.
The words Mauludulla-hu (he to whom the child belongs) have been used here in preference to the simpler word Walid (father), in order to point to the inherent right of the father to possess the child and to his natural responsibility for its maintenance.
One who inherits the property of a deceased person is duty bound to bring up the children the latter may leave behind.
The suckling of the child should last for two years at the maximum. But it is allowable to discontinue it before the end of this period, if the father and the mother both agree on this course. The verse also implies that the child is not to be weaned before the end of two years without the consent of its mother.
31:15; 46:16.
65:7.
2:287; 6:153; 7:43; 23:63; 65:8.
Important Words:
یرضعن (give suck) is derived from رضع i.e. he (the babe) sucked. ارضعت means, she (the mother or the wet-nurse) gave suck to the child. استرضع means, he arranged for the suckling of the child; he engaged a wet-nurse for it. The infinitive-noun رضاعة signifies sucking. ھذا اخی من الرضاعة means, he is my foster-brother, both having sucked from the breast of the same woman (Aqrab & Lane).
حولین (two years) is the dual of حول (a year) which is the infinitive-noun from حال meaning, it passed and became complete, or it passed from one state to another, or it turned round. A year is called حول because it is a complete measure of time and turns round and round. حول also means strength and power to do a thing as in the well-known formula لاحول ولاقوة الابالله (Aqrab).
وسعھا (its capacity) is derived from وسع meaning, it was sufficiently capacious. وسعت رحمة الله کل شیء means, God’s mercy extends to, and covers, all things. وسع means capacity or power or strength. The infinitive-noun from it is سعة meaning, breadth; extent, capaciousness; capacity and power. ذوسعة means, a man of means or a man of ample means (Aqrab).
تکلف (is burdened) is derived from کلف. They say کلفه امرا i.e. he imposed on him the task of doing a thing, or he tasked him to do a thing. It also means, he ordered him to do a thing which was difficult or troublesome or inconvenient (Lane).
فصال (weaning the child) is derived from فصل which is both transitive and intransitive, meaning, he separated, he divided, he partitioned; or he got separated, he went forth from. فصلت المرأة رضیعھا means, the woman weaned her child, which is also a sort of separation between the woman and her suckling. ھذایوم الفصل means, this is the day when a decision or a distinction shall be made between the parties, i.e. the doers of good and the doers of evil. فصال means, the weaning of a child from its mother or from the woman who suckles it (Taj).
تشاور (consultation) is derived from شار. They say شارالعسل i.e. he extracted honey from the honey-comb. شارالدابة means, he rode the beast in order to try it and ascertain its worth. اشار besides giving the same meaning as شار, also means, he made a thing known, he pointed to a thing, he gave a word of good counsel to a person. شاوره means, he consulted him, he sought his advice and counsel. تشاور means, mutual consultation. مشورة and شوری give similar meanings, i.e. consultation (Aqrab).
Commentary:
If a woman is divorced while she is pregnant, the question of the suckling of the child and the expense of bringing it up naturally arises. The verse under comment supplies the answer. It points out that the suckling of the child should last for two years at the maximum. But it is allowable to discontinue it before the end of that period, if the father and the mother both agree on that course. The verse also implies that the child is not to be weaned before the end of two years without the consent of its mother.
The expression لاتضار is both in the active and the passive voice; the clause لاتضار والدة بولدھا may therefore mean that: (1) the mother shall not make the father suffer on account of her child; and (2) the mother shall not be made to suffer on account of her child; and both meanings are equally good and equitable. The words مولودله (he to whom the child belongs) have been used here in preference to the simpler word والد (father), in order to point to the inherent right of the father to possess the child and to his natural responsibility for its maintenance.
The clause, and the same is incumbent on the heir, lays down an important social principle. If a father dies leaving behind a child, it is the duty of his heirs to bring up the child and maintain it until it reaches puberty. This shall not be considered an act of favour on their part, but an act of duty. One who inherits the property of a deceased person is duty bound to bring up the children the latter may leave behind. He who receives a support from another must be prepared to give the same to him, when he may stand in need of it.
a
31:15; 46:16.
b
65:7.
c
2:287; 6:153; 7:43; 23:63; 65:8.
176
لَا تُضَآرَّ (La Tudarra) 这一用语, 既是主动又是被动语态; 因此它的意思可以是: (1) 母亲不应使父亲由于他的孩子而受苦; (2) 不应使母亲由于她的孩子而受苦; 这里这两种意义都可同等适用。
177
这里用 مَوْلُوْدٌ لَهٗ (Mauludun la-hu, 孩子所归属的人) 这几个字, 而不用较简单的 وَالِد (Walid, 父亲) 这个字, 为的是指出, 具有所生的孩子, 是父亲的固有的权利而且有抚养他孩子的天职。
178
继承一个死者的财产的人, 对他留下的孩子一定要负起抚养成人的责任。
179
孩子吃奶期至多两年。在这时期结束以前, 如果父母同意, 准许提前断奶。这节经文指示, 如果没有母亲的同意, 孩子不能在两年时期结束前断奶。
1
یہاں بِالْمَعْرُوْفِ سے مراد باپ کی مَقدرت ہے کہ امیر اپنی طاقت کے مطابق دے اور غریب اپنی طاقت کے مطابق۔ اس جگہ عام دودھ پلانے والیوں کا ذکر نہیں بلکہ ماؤں کا ہے اور یہ ذکر طلاق کے ضمن میں کیا گیا ہے اور کہا گیا ہے کہ اگر دودھ پلانے والی عورت کو طلاق دی جائے تو بچہ کی خاطر عورت کے لئے یہ ضروری ہے کہ بچے کو دودھ مقررہ مدت تک پلائے اور اس کے بدلہ میں خاوند پر فرض ہے کہ عام مزدور عورت کی طرح نہیں بلکہ اپنی توفیق کے مطابق اسے خرچ دے۔ کیونکہ یہ عورت کے جذبات کو ٹھیس پہنچانے والا ہوگا کہ ایک طرف تو اسے مجبور کیا جائے کہ وہ طلاق کے بعد بھی بچہ کو دودھ پلاتی رہے اور دوسری ط
2
کھانے اور کپڑے سے مراد تمام اخراجات ہیں نہ کہ صرف روٹی اور لباس اور یہ محاورہ ہے تمام ضرورتوں کو پورا کرنے کے متعلق۔
3
یعنی مرد سے یہ مطالبہ کرنا کہ وہ اپنی طاقت سے زیادہ خرچ کرے یہ بھی نامناسب ہے اور عورت سے مطالبہ کرنا کہ وہ ایک نوکر کی طرح طلاق کے بعد ایک عرصہ گھر میں گزار دے یہ بھی نامناسب ہے۔
4
یعنی بچہ کو ایک دوسرے پر دباؤ ڈالنے کا ذریعہ نہ بناؤ۔ یہ حکم نہایت لطیف ہے۔ بہت سے نادان اس حرکت کے مرتکب ہوتے ہیں اور نتیجہ یہ ہوتا ہے کہ یا تو بچے ہلاک ہو جاتے ہیں یا ان کی تربیت خراب ہو جاتی ہے۔ اس قسم کا فعل درحقیقت قتل اولاد کے مشابہ ہے اور قرآن کریم نے اس سے روک کر آئندہ اولادوں پر احسان عظیم کیا ہے۔
5
اس آیت سے معلوم ہوتا ہے کہ بچے کے متعلق دودھ پلانے یا چھڑانے کا فیصلہ قرآن کریم نے نہ مرد کے اختیار میں رکھا ہے نہ عورت کے اختیار میں۔ بلکہ دونوں کو مشترکہ اختیار دیا ہے شاید تمام شرائع کی تاریخ میں یہ منفرد مثال ہے کہ اس طرح اہلی معاملات میں میاں بیوی کو ایک مقام پر کھڑا کرکے برابر کے اختیارات دئیے گئے ہیں۔ ہاں یہ شرط ضرور ہے کہ دودھ پلانے کی مدت جو قرآن کریم نے مقرر کی ہے اس سے زیادہ دیر تک دودھ پلانے پر نہ خاوند مجبور کر سکتا ہے نہ عورت زور دے سکتی ہے۔ جب طلاق کے بعد بھی عورت کے جذبات کا اس قدر خیال رکھنے پر خاوند کو مجبور کیا گیا ہے تو ظاہر ہے کہ جو عورت نکاح میں ہے
6
قرآنی الفاظ اٰتَیْتُمْ کے ہیں جن کے لفظی معنے ہیں دے دیا ہے‘ دے چکے ہو۔ لیکن اس طرح ترجمہ کیا جائے تو ترجمہ یہ ہوگا کہ جب تم دے دو۔ جو کچھ تم دے چکے ہو۔ اور ظاہر ہے کہ یہ مراد قرآن مجید کی نہیں ہو سکتی۔ پس ان الفاظ کا ترجمہ کرتے وقت ایک اور قاعدہ کو ملحوظ رکھنا ہوگا جو یہ ہے کہ کبھی ماضی کا صیغہ قطعی فیصلہ پر دلالت کرنے کے لئے استعمال کیا جاتا ہے۔ چنانچہ قرآن کریم میں دوسرے کئی مقامات پر بھی یہ محاورہ استعمال کیا گیا ہے۔ مثلاً آتا ہے اِذَا قُمْتُمْ اِلَی الصَّلٰوۃِ فَاغْسِلُوْا وُجُوْھَکُمْ(المآئدۃ: ۷) یعنی جب تم نماز کے لئے کھڑے ہو تو اپنے مونہوں کو اور ہات
a
31:15; 46:16.
b
65:7.
c
2:287; 6:153; 7:43; 23:63; 65:8.
240
Important Words:
یرضعن (give suck) is derived from رضع i.e. he (the babe) sucked. ارضعت means, she (the mother or the wet-nurse) gave suck to the child. استرضع means, he arranged for the suckling of the child; he engaged a wet-nurse for it. The infinitive-noun رضاعة signifies sucking. ھذا اخی من الرضاعة means, he is my foster-brother, both having sucked from the breast of the same woman (Aqrab & Lane).
حولین (two years) is the dual of حول (a year) which is the infinitive-noun from حال meaning, it passed and became complete, or it passed from one state to another, or it turned round. A year is called حول because it is a complete measure of time and turns round and round. حول also means strength and power to do a thing as in the well-known formula لاحول ولاقوة الابالله (Aqrab).
وسعھا (its capacity) is derived from وسع meaning, it was sufficiently capacious. وسعت رحمة الله کل شیء means, God’s mercy extends to, and covers, all things. وسع means capacity or power or strength. The infinitive-noun from it is سعة meaning, breadth; extent, capaciousness; capacity and power. ذوسعة means, a man of means or a man of ample means (Aqrab).
تکلف (is burdened) is derived from کلف. They say کلفه امرا i.e. he imposed on him the task of doing a thing, or he tasked him to do a thing. It also means, he ordered him to do a thing which was difficult or troublesome or inconvenient (Lane).
فصال (weaning the child) is derived from فصل which is both transitive and intransitive, meaning, he separated, he divided, he partitioned; or he got separated, he went forth from. فصلت المرأة رضیعھا means, the woman weaned her child, which is also a sort of separation between the woman and her suckling. ھذایوم الفصل means, this is the day when a decision or a distinction shall be made between the parties, i.e. the doers of good and the doers of evil. فصال means, the weaning of a child from its mother or from the woman who suckles it (Taj).
تشاور (consultation) is derived from شار. They say شارالعسل i.e. he extracted honey from the honey-comb. شارالدابة means, he rode the beast in order to try it and ascertain its worth. اشار besides giving the same meaning as شار, also means, he made a thing known, he pointed to a thing, he gave a word of good counsel to a person. شاوره means, he consulted him, he sought his advice and counsel. تشاور means, mutual consultation. مشورة and شوری give similar meanings, i.e. consultation (Aqrab).
Commentary:
If a woman is divorced while she is pregnant, the question of the suckling of the child and the expense of bringing it up naturally arises. The verse under comment supplies the answer. It points out that the suckling of the child should last for two years at the maximum. But it is allowable to discontinue it before the end of that period, if the father and the mother both agree on that course. The verse also implies that the child is not to be weaned before the end of two years without the consent of its mother.
The expression لاتضار is both in the active and the passive voice; the clause لاتضار والدة بولدھا may therefore mean that: (1) the mother shall not make the father suffer on account of her child; and (2) the mother shall not be made to suffer on account of her child; and both meanings are equally good and equitable. The words مولودله (he to whom the child belongs) have been used here in preference to the simpler word والد (father), in order to point to the inherent right of the father to possess the child and to his natural responsibility for its maintenance.
The clause, and the same is incumbent on the heir, lays down an important social principle. If a father dies leaving behind a child, it is the duty of his heirs to bring up the child and maintain it until it reaches puberty. This shall not be considered an act of favour on their part, but an act of duty. One who inherits the property of a deceased person is duty bound to bring up the children the latter may leave behind. He who receives a support from another must be prepared to give the same to him, when he may stand in need of it.
a
31:15; 46:16.
b
65:7.
c
2:287; 6:153; 7:43; 23:63; 65:8.
286
The expression, la Tudarra, is both in the active and the passive voice; the clause may, therefore, mean that: (1) the mother shall not make the father suffer on account of her child; and (2) the mother shall not be made to suffer on account of her child; and both meanings are equally applicable here.
287
The words Mauludulla-hu (he to whom the child belongs) have been used here in preference to the simpler word Walid (father), in order to point to the inherent right of the father to possess the child and to his natural responsibility for its maintenance.
288
One who inherits the property of a deceased person is duty bound to bring up the children the latter may leave behind.
288A
The suckling of the child should last for two years at the maximum. But it is allowable to discontinue it before the end of this period, if the father and the mother both agree on this course. The verse also implies that the child is not to be weaned before the end of two years without the consent of its mother.
فَاِنۡ خِفۡتُمۡ فَرِجَالًا اَوۡ رُکۡبَانًا ۖ فَاِذَاۤ اَمِنۡتُمۡ فَاذۡکُرُوا اللّٰہَ کَمَا عَلَّمَکُمۡ مَّا لَمۡ تَکُوۡنُوۡا تَعۡلَمُوۡنَ
کَمَا عَلَّمَکُمْ۔ کَ کے عام معنے مانند کے ہوتے ہیں۔ لیکن اس کے ایک معنے ل کے بھی ہیں یعنی ’’اس لئے کہ‘‘ یا ’’کیونکہ‘‘ (مغنی) اس جگہ یہی معنے زیادہ چسپاں ہوتے ہیں اور انہی کو ہم نے اختیار کیا ہے۔
4:102.
4:104.
Observance of five daily Prayers is the most important commandment. In no circumstances should a Muslim neglect his Prayers as long as he is sane and conscious. Even when he is moving about in a state of extreme fear, he must not fail to say his Prayers and should perform them on horseback or on foot, whether running or sitting or lying, as the case may be.
4:102.
4:104.
Important Words:
رجالا (on foot) is the plural of راجل (one who walks on foot) which is derived from رجل i.e. he walked on foot, رجل (rijl) meaning a foot. رجل (rajul) which means man is so called because man walks on foot and not on both hands and feet like quadrupeds (Lane).
رکبانا (riding) is the plural of راکب (one who rides) which is derived from رکب i.e. he rode an animal or a conveyance. One says, رکبت الفرس i.e. I mounted the horse. رکب الرجل البحر means, the man embarked on a sea voyage. رکب ذنبا means, he made sin his riding beast, i.e. he committed a sin (Lane).
Commentary:
The five daily Prayers constitute the most important worship in Islam. In no circumstances can a Muslim neglect his Prayers as long as he is sane and conscious. Even when a person is moving about in a state of extreme fear and consternation, he must not fail to say his Prayers and should perform them on horseback or on foot, whether running or sitting or lying, as the case may be.
In view of this great importance of Prayers, a married couple can ill afford to be careless about them. The form in which Prayers are to be performed in time of ordinary fear or danger is mentioned in 4:102, 103; but the present verse refers to a state of extreme fear when one cannot observe even the form of ordinary صلوة الخوف (Prayer in a state of fear).
The clause, but when you are safe, remember Allah as he has taught you, means that the injunction with regard to offering Prayers on foot or on horseback, etc. pertains to very special circumstances only. As soon as better conditions return, one should pray in the ordinary way as taught in the closing portion of the preceding verse, i.e. one should stand motionless in Prayer and refrain from speech, etc.
b
4:102.
c
4:104.
189
每天谨守五次拜功, 是最重要的律令。只要一个穆斯林神志清醒时, 就绝不能忽略拜功。即使在极端恐惧的情况下在各处走动时, 他也必须祈祷。骑马, 步行, 不论情况如何, 是跑、是坐或躺着, 都要履行拜功。
2
کَمَا عَلَّمَکُمْ۔ کَ کے عام معنے مانند کے ہوتے ہیں۔ لیکن اس کے ایک معنے ل کے بھی ہیں یعنی ’’اس لئے کہ‘‘ یا ’’کیونکہ‘‘ (مغنی) اس جگہ یہی معنے زیادہ چسپاں ہوتے ہیں اور انہی کو ہم نے اختیار کیا ہے۔
a
4:102.
b
4:104.
246
Important Words:
رجالا (on foot) is the plural of راجل (one who walks on foot) which is derived from رجل i.e. he walked on foot, رجل (rijl) meaning a foot. رجل (rajul) which means man is so called because man walks on foot and not on both hands and feet like quadrupeds (Lane).
رکبانا (riding) is the plural of راکب (one who rides) which is derived from رکب i.e. he rode an animal or a conveyance. One says, رکبت الفرس i.e. I mounted the horse. رکب الرجل البحر means, the man embarked on a sea voyage. رکب ذنبا means, he made sin his riding beast, i.e. he committed a sin (Lane).
Commentary:
The five daily Prayers constitute the most important worship in Islam. In no circumstances can a Muslim neglect his Prayers as long as he is sane and conscious. Even when a person is moving about in a state of extreme fear and consternation, he must not fail to say his Prayers and should perform them on horseback or on foot, whether running or sitting or lying, as the case may be.
In view of this great importance of Prayers, a married couple can ill afford to be careless about them. The form in which Prayers are to be performed in time of ordinary fear or danger is mentioned in 4:102, 103; but the present verse refers to a state of extreme fear when one cannot observe even the form of ordinary صلوة الخوف (Prayer in a state of fear).
The clause, but when you are safe, remember Allah as he has taught you, means that the injunction with regard to offering Prayers on foot or on horseback, etc. pertains to very special circumstances only. As soon as better conditions return, one should pray in the ordinary way as taught in the closing portion of the preceding verse, i.e. one should stand motionless in Prayer and refrain from speech, etc.
b
4:102.
c
4:104.
297
Observance of five daily Prayers is the most important commandment. In no circumstances should a Muslim neglect his Prayers as long as he is sane and conscious. Even when he is moving about in a state of extreme fear, he must not fail to say his Prayers and should perform them on horseback or on foot, whether running or sitting or lying, as the case may be.
وَالَّذِیۡنَ یُتَوَفَّوۡنَ مِنۡکُمۡ وَیَذَرُوۡنَ اَزۡوٰجًا وَّصِیَّۃً لِّاَزۡوٰجِہِمۡ مَّتٰعًا اِلَی الۡحَوۡلِ غَیۡرَ اِخۡرَاجٍ ۚ فَاِنۡ خَرَجۡنَ فَلَا جُنَاحَ عَلَیۡکُمۡ فِیۡ مَا فَعَلۡنَ فِیۡۤ اَنۡفُسِہِنَّ مِنۡ مَّعۡرُوۡفٍ ۗ وَاللّٰہُ عَزِیۡزٌ حَکِیۡمٌ
وَصِیَّۃً مصدر ہے۔ اس کے پہلے یُوْصُوْنَ محذوف سمجھا جائے گا‘ یعنی وہ وصیت کر جائیں۔ مَتَاعًا دوسرا مصدر ہے۔ اس سے پہلے بھی اَنْ مَتِّعُوْھُنَّ محذوف ہے اور معنے یہ ہیں کہ یہ وصیت کر جائیں کہ بعد میں وہ لوگ جن کے ہاتھ میں وصیت کا اجرا ہے انہیں ایک سال تک فائدہ پہنچائیں۔ اس کے بعد غَیْرَ اِخْرَاجٍ کے الفاظ ہیں جو بدل ہیں متاع کا۔ پس معنے یہ ہوئے کہ فائدہ پہنچانے سے مراد ہماری یہ ہے کہ ان کو گھروں سے نہ نکالیں بلکہ باوجود اس کے کہ مکان کسی اور وارث کے حصہ میں آیا ہو بیویوں کو ایک سال تک اس میں رہنے کا حق حاصل رہے۔ اس کے یہ معنے نہیں کہ عورت خود بھی
مَعْرُوْف کے معنے قانون یا فطرت یا قومی رواج کے مطابق کے ہیں‘ یعنی جسے لوگ جانتے ہیں۔ اس جگہ اس کے معنے پسندیدہ کے اور بہتر کے ہیں۔ مطلب یہ ہے کہ خواہ عدت کے بعد عورتیں نکاح کریں خواہ اپنے والدین یا دوسرے رشتہ داروں کے ہاں چلی جائیں یا کوئی نوکری اختیار کریں تم پر کوئی اعتراض نہیں۔ اور اس حکم کے رو سے تمہیں نہیں چاہییٔ کہ انہیں روکو۔
2:235.
The period of waiting laid down for a widow in 2:235 is four months and ten days in which time she can, as of right, claim residence and maintenance from the heirs of her deceased husband. The period of one year mentioned here is only a concession or a favour for a widow in addition to her right of residence and maintenance mentioned in 2:235. The concession forms no part of her share in the inheritance, nor is it an obligatory injunction.
2:235.
Commentary:
The middle verses, which came in like the middle Prayer, having ended, the Quran reverts to the original subject of conjugal relations. The verse under comment is erroneously believed by some to have been abrogated by 2:235 and 4:13. Apart from the fact that the abrogation theory is based on lack of the knowledge of true teaching of the Quran, there is nothing in the verses referred to above which contradicts the provision contained in the present verse. The period of waiting laid down for a widow in 2:235 is four months and ten days in which time she can, as of right, claim residence and maintenance from the heirs of her deceased husband. The period of one year mentioned in the present verse has nothing to do with the above-mentioned period of waiting, as the words, but if they themselves go out, there shall be no blame upon you; clearly show. The present verse only contains a concession or a favour for a widow in addition to her right of residence and maintenance mentioned in 2:235. One year is about the time conveniently required by a widow for making suitable arrangements about her future. It is also the requisite time for a pregnant widow to be delivered of the child and relieved of the encumbrances attending thereto. Nor has this verse anything to do with the share of a widow in the property left by her husband as stated in 4:13. The concession about residence and maintenance for one year mentioned in the present verse forms no part of her share in the inheritance. The verse contains no obligatory injunction, but only an additional exhortation to the heirs of the deceased person to show special kindness to the widow for a period of one year, just as the following verse embodies an identical exhortation in favour of a divorced woman.
d
2:235.
190
2:235经文中为寡妇所制定的四个月零十天的待婚期中, 她有权要求她亡夫的那些继承人给她住所和生活费。这里谈的一年, 只是在2:235节经文中所提到她的住所和生活费权利以外为期一年的同样权利是特殊的优惠。
3
وَصِیَّۃً مصدر ہے۔ اس کے پہلے یُوْصُوْنَ محذوف سمجھا جائے گا‘ یعنی وہ وصیت کر جائیں۔ مَتَاعًا دوسرا مصدر ہے۔ اس سے پہلے بھی اَنْ مَتِّعُوْھُنَّ محذوف ہے اور معنے یہ ہیں کہ یہ وصیت کر جائیں کہ بعد میں وہ لوگ جن کے ہاتھ میں وصیت کا اجرا ہے انہیں ایک سال تک فائدہ پہنچائیں۔ اس کے بعد غَیْرَ اِخْرَاجٍ کے الفاظ ہیں جو بدل ہیں متاع کا۔ پس معنے یہ ہوئے کہ فائدہ پہنچانے سے مراد ہماری یہ ہے کہ ان کو گھروں سے نہ نکالیں بلکہ باوجود اس کے کہ مکان کسی اور وارث کے حصہ میں آیا ہو بیویوں کو ایک سال تک اس میں رہنے کا حق حاصل رہے۔ اس کے یہ معنے نہیں کہ عورت خود بھی
4
مَعْرُوْف کے معنے قانون یا فطرت یا قومی رواج کے مطابق کے ہیں‘ یعنی جسے لوگ جانتے ہیں۔ اس جگہ اس کے معنے پسندیدہ کے اور بہتر کے ہیں۔ مطلب یہ ہے کہ خواہ عدت کے بعد عورتیں نکاح کریں خواہ اپنے والدین یا دوسرے رشتہ داروں کے ہاں چلی جائیں یا کوئی نوکری اختیار کریں تم پر کوئی اعتراض نہیں۔ اور اس حکم کے رو سے تمہیں نہیں چاہییٔ کہ انہیں روکو۔
a
2:235.
247
Commentary:
The middle verses, which came in like the middle Prayer, having ended, the Quran reverts to the original subject of conjugal relations. The verse under comment is erroneously believed by some to have been abrogated by 2:235 and 4:13. Apart from the fact that the abrogation theory is based on lack of the knowledge of true teaching of the Quran, there is nothing in the verses referred to above which contradicts the provision contained in the present verse. The period of waiting laid down for a widow in 2:235 is four months and ten days in which time she can, as of right, claim residence and maintenance from the heirs of her deceased husband. The period of one year mentioned in the present verse has nothing to do with the above-mentioned period of waiting, as the words, but if they themselves go out, there shall be no blame upon you; clearly show. The present verse only contains a concession or a favour for a widow in addition to her right of residence and maintenance mentioned in 2:235. One year is about the time conveniently required by a widow for making suitable arrangements about her future. It is also the requisite time for a pregnant widow to be delivered of the child and relieved of the encumbrances attending thereto. Nor has this verse anything to do with the share of a widow in the property left by her husband as stated in 4:13. The concession about residence and maintenance for one year mentioned in the present verse forms no part of her share in the inheritance. The verse contains no obligatory injunction, but only an additional exhortation to the heirs of the deceased person to show special kindness to the widow for a period of one year, just as the following verse embodies an identical exhortation in favour of a divorced woman.
a
2:235.
298
The period of waiting laid down for a widow in 2:235 is four months and ten days in which time she can, as of right, claim residence and maintenance from the heirs of her deceased husband. The period of one year mentioned here is only a concession or a favour for a widow in addition to her right of residence and maintenance mentioned in 2:235. The concession forms no part of her share in the inheritance, nor is it an obligatory injunction.
وَمَثَلُ الَّذِیۡنَ یُنۡفِقُوۡنَ اَمۡوٰلَہُمُ ابۡتِغَآءَ مَرۡضَاتِ اللّٰہِ وَتَثۡبِیۡتًا مِّنۡ اَنۡفُسِہِمۡ کَمَثَلِ جَنَّۃٍۭ بِرَبۡوَۃٍ اَصَابَہَا وَابِلٌ فَاٰتَتۡ اُکُلَہَا ضِعۡفَیۡنِ فَاِنۡ لَّمۡ یُصِبۡہَا وَابِلٌ فَطَلٌّ ۗ وَاللّٰہُ بِمَا تَعۡمَلُوۡنَ بَصِیۡرٌ
اصل میں حال ہے مگر ترجمہ صفت کے مشابہ ہو گیا ہے جس کے بغیر چارہ نہ تھا مگر مفہوم میں کوئی فرق نہیں پڑا اور نہ عربی کے استعمال میں فرق پڑا ہے۔
اَلطَّلُّ: اَضْعَفُ الْمَطَرِ (اقرب) طَلَّ نہایت خفیف بارش کو کہتے ہیں۔
See 2:262.
Spending money in the cause of Allah strengthens the soul of a person because by spending his hard-earned wealth he voluntarily imposes a burden on himself which makes him firmer and more steadfast in faith.
The hearts of believers who spend freely in the cause of God are like an elevated piece of ground to which heavy rain, which sometimes proves harmful for low-lying tracts, can do no harm. On the other hand, it is benefitted by rain, whether it is heavy or light.
See 2:262.
Important Words:
تثبیتا (strengthen) is derived from ثبت which means, he or it subsisted or lasted; he or it became fixed or stationary at a place; he was firm, stable, steadfast and unwavering. ثبت الامر means, the matter became proved and determined. اثبته means, he made a person or thing fixed and stationary, rendering him or it unable to move; he imprisoned him or inflicted on him a crippling injury. اثبت الحق means, he strengthened or reinforced the truth with clear arguments. ثبته (thabbatahu) means, he made a person or thing firm, steadfast, unwavering and fixed; he strengthened him or it so as to make him or it fit to endure all trials and shakings (Aqrab & Lane).
ربوة (elevated ground) is derived from ربا. They say ربا المال i.e. the money increased and became augmented. رباالولد means, the child grew up. رباالرابیة means, he climbed the height. ربوة or رابیة means, a hill or elevated ground (Aqrab). ربا (interest) is also from the same root and is so called because it is looked upon as a sure and unfailing means of increasing and multiplying wealth.
Commentary:
Spending money in the cause of Allah leads to the strengthening of the soul. The man who strives in the cause of God by spending his wealth, imposes a burden on himself which makes him still more firm and steadfast in his faith. Besides, as he helps others with his money, God helps him and protects him from harm.
The hearts of the believers who spend freely in the cause of God are like elevated ground to which heavy rain, which sometimes proves harmful for low-lying grounds, can do no harm. On the other hand, it is benefited by rain, whether it is heavy or light.
In the verse under comment, rain represents charity. Those who spend large amounts are referred to in the words "heavy rain", while those who can afford to spend only small amounts in the cause of Allah are referred to in the words "light rain" (see also 9:79).
Both classes of men are benefited, inasmuch as they are granted more and more power to do good deeds and receive an ample reward from God, Who does not look to the amount of the money spent in His cause but to the proportion it bears to the money retained by the spender for his worldly needs. The word طل (light rain), besides including the lightest of rains, also means "dew" (Lane) and has been used to point out that even the smallest amounts spent in the cause of Allah has its reward.
b
4:39; 8:48.
204
为了安拉的事业而花钱, 可以增强一个人的精神力量, 因为他花掉了辛苦赚来的钱, 自愿增加自己的负担, 这就使他的信念更坚定、更牢固。
1
اصل میں حال ہے مگر ترجمہ صفت کے مشابہ ہو گیا ہے جس کے بغیر چارہ نہ تھا مگر مفہوم میں کوئی فرق نہیں پڑا اور نہ عربی کے استعمال میں فرق پڑا ہے۔
2
اَلطَّلُّ: اَضْعَفُ الْمَطَرِ (اقرب) طَلَّ نہایت خفیف بارش کو کہتے ہیں۔
a
See 2:262.
272
Important Words:
تثبیتا (strengthen) is derived from ثبت which means, he or it subsisted or lasted; he or it became fixed or stationary at a place; he was firm, stable, steadfast and unwavering. ثبت الامر means, the matter became proved and determined. اثبته means, he made a person or thing fixed and stationary, rendering him or it unable to move; he imprisoned him or inflicted on him a crippling injury. اثبت الحق means, he strengthened or reinforced the truth with clear arguments. ثبته (thabbatahu) means, he made a person or thing firm, steadfast, unwavering and fixed; he strengthened him or it so as to make him or it fit to endure all trials and shakings (Aqrab & Lane).
ربوة (elevated ground) is derived from ربا. They say ربا المال i.e. the money increased and became augmented. رباالولد means, the child grew up. رباالرابیة means, he climbed the height. ربوة or رابیة means, a hill or elevated ground (Aqrab). ربا (interest) is also from the same root and is so called because it is looked upon as a sure and unfailing means of increasing and multiplying wealth.
Commentary:
Spending money in the cause of Allah leads to the strengthening of the soul. The man who strives in the cause of God by spending his wealth, imposes a burden on himself which makes him still more firm and steadfast in his faith. Besides, as he helps others with his money, God helps him and protects him from harm.
The hearts of the believers who spend freely in the cause of God are like elevated ground to which heavy rain, which sometimes proves harmful for low-lying grounds, can do no harm. On the other hand, it is benefited by rain, whether it is heavy or light.
In the verse under comment, rain represents charity. Those who spend large amounts are referred to in the words "heavy rain", while those who can afford to spend only small amounts in the cause of Allah are referred to in the words "light rain" (see also 9:79).
Both classes of men are benefited, inasmuch as they are granted more and more power to do good deeds and receive an ample reward from God, Who does not look to the amount of the money spent in His cause but to the proportion it bears to the money retained by the spender for his worldly needs. The word طل (light rain), besides including the lightest of rains, also means "dew" (Lane) and has been used to point out that even the smallest amounts spent in the cause of Allah has its reward.
d
See 2:262.
334
Spending money in the cause of Allah strengthens the soul of a person because by spending his hard-earned wealth he voluntarily imposes a burden on himself which makes him firmer and more steadfast in faith.
335
The hearts of believers who spend freely in the cause of God are like an elevated piece of ground to which heavy rain, which sometimes proves harmful for low-lying tracts, can do no harm. On the other hand, it is benefitted by rain, whether it is heavy or light.
فَاِنۡ لَّمۡ تَفۡعَلُوۡا فَاۡذَنُوۡا بِحَرۡبٍ مِّنَ اللّٰہِ وَرَسُوۡلِہٖ ۖ وَاِنۡ تُبۡتُمۡ فَلَکُمۡ رُءُوۡسُ اَمۡوٰلِکُمۡ لَا تَظۡلِمُوۡنَ وَلَا تُظۡلَمُوۡنَ
عربی میں رُءُ وْسُ اَمْوَالِکُمْ یعنی راس المال کا لفظ جمع ہے۔ مگر اردو میں یہ لفظ جمع استعمال نہیں ہوتا۔ اس لئے ترجمہ مفرد لفظ سے کیا گیا ہے۔ لفظی ترجمہ ہوتا تو کہتے تمہارے وہ اموال جو تم نے قرض دئے ہوئے ہیں وہ تمہارے لئے ہیں۔
Important Words:
فاذنوا (then beware of) is derived from اذن. They say اذن له i.e. he gave ear or listened to it or him; he permitted, or allowed him. أذن بالشیء means, he knew the thing; or he became informed or apprised of it. آذنه بالامر means, he made him to know the thing; or he notified or announced it to him. أذن (adhdhana) or تأذن (ta’adhdhana) means, he made known or notified or announced (Lane).
حرب (war) is from حرب. They say حربه i.e. he despoiled him of his wealth and property, leaving him without anything. حرب (hariba) means, he became greatly angry, or wrathful. الحرب means, war; hostilities (Aqrab).
رؤس اموالکم (your original sums). رؤس is the plural of رأس meaning: (1) head; (2) the upper or higher part or end of a thing; (3) chief or leader of a society. رأس الشھر means, the first day of the month. The word رأس also signifies the thing itself; as they say ھوقسم برأسه i.e. this is an independent species in itself. رأس المال means, the original sum without interest; principal; capital. The Arabs say اقرضنی عشرة برؤسھا i.e. he lent me a loan of ten pieces of money without interest (Aqrab & Lane).
Commentary:
The verse declares that the taking of interest is tantamount to waging war against God. It may be inferred from this that those among Muslims who lend money at interest, should be boycotted by the rest of the community. History bears testimony to the fact that such Muslim States as borrowed or lent money at interest were ruined.
It is often objected that no trade or commerce is possible without interest. This is not correct. There is no natural relation between trade and interest. The latter has become unconsciously associated with the former, as Western countries have based their commercial system on credit. If this had not been so, commerce would not have been dependent upon interest. Only a few hundred years ago, Muslims were responsible for a large part of the world’s commerce, and yet they carried it on without interest. They used to borrow money even from the poorer classes by way of partnership loans, and the commerce carried on by them thus contributed directly to the welfare of those classes. Interest is not at all essential for commerce, but as commerce is now being carried on, on the basis of interest, it appears as if without interest it would come to a standstill. No doubt, a change in the system would at first be inconvenient but the system of commerce depending upon interest can certainly be discarded.
Interest is, in fact, a leech which is fast sucking away the blood of humanity, especially of the lower and middle classes. Even the upper classes are not entirely secure against its poison, but they are deriving a false enjoyment from it like the proverbial leopard who ate away his own tongue by rubbing it against a rough stone, foolishly thinking it to be the blood and flesh of another animal. Unfortunately those who are willing to forego it are too weak to withstand the force of the current system.
The system of credit prevailing in Western countries is destructive to the peace of the world in two ways. On the one hand, it helps the accumulation of wealth in a few hands and, on the other, it facilitates war. No government can be imagined as entering upon a great war unless it relies upon its ability to raise money by means of loans carrying interest. Long and devastating wars are made possible only by the institution of interest. If huge loans on interest were not possible, many countries would refuse to enter what appeared to be a long war; and if they entered such wars at all, they would certainly hasten to withdraw from them long before they actually terminated, for their treasuries would become empty and their people would revolt in protest against the criminal waste of men and money. But the system of what appear to be easy loans makes it possible for governments to carry on ruinous struggles as they are able to obtain the sinews of war without having to resort to a system of direct taxation. The people of belligerent countries do not, at the moment, feel the burden which is laid on their backs, but after the war is over their backs are bent double under the staggering weight of national debts and future generations are kept busy reducing the weight. Take, for instance, the case of the last Great War. If huge loans had not been possible, the result of the war would still have been the same, but the devastation and the heavy indebtedness of the different countries would have been avoided. Nay, the War itself might have been avoided; and even if it had taken place, the belligerents would soon have been exhausted, peace would have been signed within a year, and the world would have proceeded on its forward march of progress. A worse fate is perhaps awaiting the Western countries at the termination of the present World War.
1
عربی میں رُءُ وْسُ اَمْوَالِکُمْ یعنی راس المال کا لفظ جمع ہے۔ مگر اردو میں یہ لفظ جمع استعمال نہیں ہوتا۔ اس لئے ترجمہ مفرد لفظ سے کیا گیا ہے۔ لفظی ترجمہ ہوتا تو کہتے تمہارے وہ اموال جو تم نے قرض دئے ہوئے ہیں وہ تمہارے لئے ہیں۔
286
Important Words:
فاذنوا (then beware of) is derived from اذن. They say اذن له i.e. he gave ear or listened to it or him; he permitted, or allowed him. أذن بالشیء means, he knew the thing; or he became informed or apprised of it. آذنه بالامر means, he made him to know the thing; or he notified or announced it to him. أذن (adhdhana) or تأذن (ta’adhdhana) means, he made known or notified or announced (Lane).
حرب (war) is from حرب. They say حربه i.e. he despoiled him of his wealth and property, leaving him without anything. حرب (hariba) means, he became greatly angry, or wrathful. الحرب means, war; hostilities (Aqrab).
رؤس اموالکم (your original sums). رؤس is the plural of رأس meaning: (1) head; (2) the upper or higher part or end of a thing; (3) chief or leader of a society. رأس الشھر means, the first day of the month. The word رأس also signifies the thing itself; as they say ھوقسم برأسه i.e. this is an independent species in itself. رأس المال means, the original sum without interest; principal; capital. The Arabs say اقرضنی عشرة برؤسھا i.e. he lent me a loan of ten pieces of money without interest (Aqrab & Lane).
Commentary:
The verse declares that the taking of interest is tantamount to waging war against God. It may be inferred from this that those among Muslims who lend money at interest, should be boycotted by the rest of the community. History bears testimony to the fact that such Muslim States as borrowed or lent money at interest were ruined.
It is often objected that no trade or commerce is possible without interest. This is not correct. There is no natural relation between trade and interest. The latter has become unconsciously associated with the former, as Western countries have based their commercial system on credit. If this had not been so, commerce would not have been dependent upon interest. Only a few hundred years ago, Muslims were responsible for a large part of the world’s commerce, and yet they carried it on without interest. They used to borrow money even from the poorer classes by way of partnership loans, and the commerce carried on by them thus contributed directly to the welfare of those classes. Interest is not at all essential for commerce, but as commerce is now being carried on, on the basis of interest, it appears as if without interest it would come to a standstill. No doubt, a change in the system would at first be inconvenient but the system of commerce depending upon interest can certainly be discarded.
Interest is, in fact, a leech which is fast sucking away the blood of humanity, especially of the lower and middle classes. Even the upper classes are not entirely secure against its poison, but they are deriving a false enjoyment from it like the proverbial leopard who ate away his own tongue by rubbing it against a rough stone, foolishly thinking it to be the blood and flesh of another animal. Unfortunately those who are willing to forego it are too weak to withstand the force of the current system.
The system of credit prevailing in Western countries is destructive to the peace of the world in two ways. On the one hand, it helps the accumulation of wealth in a few hands and, on the other, it facilitates war. No government can be imagined as entering upon a great war unless it relies upon its ability to raise money by means of loans carrying interest. Long and devastating wars are made possible only by the institution of interest. If huge loans on interest were not possible, many countries would refuse to enter what appeared to be a long war; and if they entered such wars at all, they would certainly hasten to withdraw from them long before they actually terminated, for their treasuries would become empty and their people would revolt in protest against the criminal waste of men and money. But the system of what appear to be easy loans makes it possible for governments to carry on ruinous struggles as they are able to obtain the sinews of war without having to resort to a system of direct taxation. The people of belligerent countries do not, at the moment, feel the burden which is laid on their backs, but after the war is over their backs are bent double under the staggering weight of national debts and future generations are kept busy reducing the weight. Take, for instance, the case of the last Great War. If huge loans had not been possible, the result of the war would still have been the same, but the devastation and the heavy indebtedness of the different countries would have been avoided. Nay, the War itself might have been avoided; and even if it had taken place, the belligerents would soon have been exhausted, peace would have been signed within a year, and the world would have proceeded on its forward march of progress. A worse fate is perhaps awaiting the Western countries at the termination of the present World War.
یٰۤاَیُّہَا الَّذِیۡنَ اٰمَنُوۡۤا اِذَا تَدَایَنۡتُمۡ بِدَیۡنٍ اِلٰۤی اَجَلٍ مُّسَمًّی فَاکۡتُبُوۡہُ ۚ وَلۡیَکۡتُبۡ بَّیۡنَکُمۡ کَاتِبٌۢ بِالۡعَدۡلِ ۚ وَلَا یَاۡبَ کَاتِبٌ اَنۡ یَّکۡتُبَ کَمَا عَلَّمَہُ اللّٰہُ ۚ فَلۡیَکۡتُبۡ وَلۡیُمۡلِلِ الَّذِیۡ عَلَیۡہِ الۡحَقُّ وَلۡیَتَّقِ اللّٰہَ رَبَّہٗ وَلَا یَبۡخَسۡ مِنۡہُ شَیۡـًٔا ۚ فَاِنۡ کَانَ الَّذِیۡ عَلَیۡہِ الۡحَقُّ سَفِیۡہًا اَوۡ ضَعِیۡفًا اَوۡ لَا یَسۡتَطِیۡعُ اَنۡ یُّمِلَّ ہُوَ فَلۡیُمۡلِلۡ وَلِیُّہٗ بِالۡعَدۡلِ ۚ وَاسۡتَشۡہِدُوۡا شَہِیۡدَیۡنِ مِنۡ رِّجَالِکُمۡ ۖ فَاِنۡ لَّمۡ یَکُوۡنَا رَجُلَیۡنِ فَرَجُلٌ وَّامۡرَاَتَانِ مِمَّنۡ تَرۡضَوۡنَ مِنَ الشُّہَدَآءِ اَنۡ تَضِلَّ اِحۡدٰٮہُمَا فَتُذَکِّرَ اِحۡدٰٮہُمَا الۡاُخۡرٰی ۚ وَلَا یَاۡبَ الشُّہَدَآءُ اِذَا مَا دُعُوۡا ۚ وَلَا تَسۡـَٔمُوۡۤا اَنۡ تَکۡتُبُوۡہُ صَغِیۡرًا اَوۡ کَبِیۡرًا اِلٰۤی اَجَلِہٖ ۚ ذٰلِکُمۡ اَقۡسَطُ عِنۡدَ اللّٰہِ وَاَقۡوَمُ لِلشَّہٰدَۃِ وَاَدۡنٰۤی اَلَّا تَرۡتَابُوۡۤا ۖ اِلَّاۤ اَنۡ تَکُوۡنَ تِجٰرَۃً حَاضِرَۃً تُدِیۡرُوۡنَہَا بَیۡنَکُمۡ فَلَیۡسَ عَلَیۡکُمۡ جُنَاحٌ اَلَّا تَکۡتُبُوۡہَا ۗ وَاَشۡہِدُوۡۤا اِذَا تَبَایَعۡتُمۡ ۚ وَلَا یُضَآرَّ کَاتِبٌ وَّلَا شَہِیۡدٌ ۚ وَاِنۡ تَفۡعَلُوۡا فَاِنَّہٗ فُسُوۡقٌۢ بِکُمۡ ۗ وَاتَّقُوا اللّٰہَ ۖ وَیُعَلِّمُکُمُ اللّٰہُ ۗ وَاللّٰہُ بِکُلِّ شَیۡءٍ عَلِیۡمٌ
4:30.
96:5.
口授的人应该是债务人而不是债权人, 因为: (1) 负责任的是债务人; 有关决定性的话, 应该由他来选择才公正; (2) 借据由债权人而不是由债务人保存。因此要求债务人口授, 使他口授的事情可以作为借款数目和付款条件准确的证明。他就没有原因和根据来否认这笔借款。
这里含有这样的意思, 即使在这种情况下, 还是写一张像现款便笺或收条之类的字据比较好。
这里指的是大笔交易。
اِلٰی اَجَلٍ مُّسَمًّی۔ اس میں اِلٰی یا تو لام کے معنوں میں ہے اور معنے یہ ہیں کہ مقررہ میعاد کے لئے قرض لو اور اِلٰی ان معنوں میں عربی میں استعمال ہوتا ہے۔ جیسے قرآن کریم میں آتا ہے وَ الْاَمْرُ اِلَیْکِ یعنی حکم دینے کا اختیار تجھے حاصل ہے۔ یا کہتے ہیں اَحْمَدُ اِلَیْکَ اللّٰہَ: تیرے لئے اللہ کی حمد کرتا ہوں (مغنی) اور یہ بھی ہو سکتا ہے کہ اِلٰی‘ مَعَ کے معنے دیتا ہو۔ یہ معنے عربی میں مستعمل ہیں۔ قرآن کریم میں بھی آتا ہے مَنْ اَنْصَارِیْ اِلَی اللّٰہِ یعنی کون اللہ کے ساتھ ہو کر میری مدد کرتا ہے۔ اس اِلٰی کے لئے یہ شرط ہوتی ہے ک
’’تمہارے درمیان‘‘ اس کے یہ معنے بھی ہو سکتے ہیں کہ جو معاہدہ تمہارے درمیان ہوا ہے وہ لکھ دے اور یہ بھی کہ کاتب تمہارے اپنے آدمیوں میں سے ہو۔ اور یہ بھی کہ وہ دونوں فریق کی موجودگی میں ان کے سامنے بیٹھ کر لکھے۔
یہ آیت ترجمہ کے لحاظ سے بہت پیچیدہ ہے کیونکہ اس میں شُھَدَآء کا لفظ موقع پر موجود ہونے والوں کے لئے استعمال کیا گیا ہے اور ایک ہی فقرہ میں دو معنوں میں گواہ کے لفظ نے ترجمہ میں پیچیدگی پیدا کر دی ہے۔ مطلب یہ ہے کہ جس وقت تحریر لکھی جا رہی ہو اگر لکھنے والے کے سوا جو مرد و عورت وہاں موجود ہوں ان میں سے وہ دو مردوں کو گواہ مقرر نہ کرنا چاہتا ہو بلکہ کسی عورت کو بھی شامل کرنا چاہتا ہو تو اس صورت میں جو لوگ موقع پر ہوں ان میں سے دونوں فریق کے اعتباری لوگوں میں سے ایک مرد اور دو عورتوں کی شہادت ڈلوائی جائے۔
حَاضِرَۃً کا ترجمہ ’’دست بدست‘‘ کیا گیا ہے۔ یعنی جب مال پر اسی وقت قبضہ کر لیا گیا ہو اور قیمت نقد ادا کر دی گئی ہو۔
اس میں اشارہ ہے کہ اس صورت میں بھی لکھنا اچھا ہے جیسا انگریزی دکان دار ووچر (Voucher) دیتا ہے۔ اس سے جھگڑے کم ہو جاتے ہیں۔
یہ بہت بڑے سَودوں کے متعلق ہے کہ ان کو لکھنا بھی چاہیے اور گواہ بھی رکھنے چاہئیں تا فتنہ نہ پیدا ہو۔
4:30.
96:5.
The borrower, and not the lender, is to dictate because; (1) it is the borrower who incurs the liability; and justice demands that the words defining the liability should be selected by him; (2) the document is to be deposited with the lender and not the borrower. So the borrower has been asked to dictate so that the fact of his having dictated may serve as a proof of the correctness of the amount and the conditions about payment, and he may have no cause or ground to deny it.
The implication is that it would be better to have a writing even in such a case like cash memo or voucher.
This refers to big transactions.
96:5.
4:30.
Important Words:
ولیه (someone who can watch his interest). ولی means, friend; helper; guardian of one’s affairs; he who protects or watches one’s interests (Aqrab). See also 2:108.
Commentary:
As the preceding verses prohibit interest and enjoin that only the original sum taken as a loan be returned to the creditor, the Quran now fittingly turns to the subject of loans not carrying interest. The verse enjoins that all transactions regarding loans should be committed to writing. It is really amazing, and is indeed a wonderful testimony to its Divine origin, that the Quran, which was revealed about 1,350 years ago when the art of writing was yet in its infancy, should lay so much stress on writing down all transactions.
The verse should not be interpreted to signify that only such transactions should be committed to writing as have a fixed term for the paying back of a loan. The injunction is general and is meant to obviate or minimize disputes so as to leave no room for doubt as to whether any amount has really been lent and as to the amount of the money lent. The words, for a fixed period, have been added to emphasize the additional fact that whenever a loan is advanced, a term must be fixed.
The verse further enjoins that when a transaction is made on credit, the document drawn up should be written by a third person so that there may be little chance of fraud and neither of the parties may have a cause of complaint against the other, both standing on the same level.
The borrower, and not the lender, is to dictate because: (1) it is the borrower who incurs the liability, and justice demands that words defining the liability should not only be well known to, but also selected by him; (2) the document is to be deposited with the lender and not the borrower. So the borrower has been asked to dictate so that the fact of his having dictated may serve as a proof of the correctness of the amount and the condition about payment, and he may have no ground to deny it.The clause, he should not diminish anything therefrom, have been added because loans may be of different kinds. They may not always be in cash and may be for long terms and there may also be certain conditions attached to them. In such cases it sometimes happens that in drawing up documents, people resort to trickery and leave loopholes. So borrowers (who have to dictate) have been warned against such evil practices and have been enjoined to fear God and dictate with honesty and justice.
In the clause, and call two witnesses from among your men, the word "your" has been most wisely added to imply that the witnesses should not be strangers but should be known men residing in the same locality so that, if need arises, they may be easily summoned to give evidence. The words "such as you like", point to the fact that the witnesses, whether men or women, should be desirable persons and should enjoy the confidence of both parties.
The clause, and let no harm be done to the scribe or the witness, signifies that if the scribe is a professional man, he should be duly paid for his services; otherwise wrong would be done to him. Similarly, a person should not be compelled, so far as possible, to become a witness if it causes him loss of any kind. Again, the scribe or the witnesses should also be paid their travelling and other necessary expenses when they are summoned before a Qadi or judge. The words also hint that the witnesses and the scribe should not be forced or threatened or bribed or otherwise influenced to suppress the truth or tell a falsehood when called upon to give evidence.
a
4:30.
b
96:5.
210
口授的人应该是债务人而不是债权人, 因为: (1) 负责任的是债务人; 有关决定性的话, 应该由他来选择才公正; (2) 借据由债权人而不是由债务人保存。因此要求债务人口授, 使他口授的事情可以作为借款数目和付款条件准确的证明。他就没有原因和根据来否认这笔借款。
211
这里含有这样的意思, 即使在这种情况下, 还是写一张像现款便笺或收条之类的字据比较好。
212
这里指的是大笔交易。
1
اِلٰی اَجَلٍ مُّسَمًّی۔ اس میں اِلٰی یا تو لام کے معنوں میں ہے اور معنے یہ ہیں کہ مقررہ میعاد کے لئے قرض لو اور اِلٰی ان معنوں میں عربی میں استعمال ہوتا ہے۔ جیسے قرآن کریم میں آتا ہے وَ الْاَمْرُ اِلَیْکِ یعنی حکم دینے کا اختیار تجھے حاصل ہے۔ یا کہتے ہیں اَحْمَدُ اِلَیْکَ اللّٰہَ: تیرے لئے اللہ کی حمد کرتا ہوں (مغنی) اور یہ بھی ہو سکتا ہے کہ اِلٰی‘ مَعَ کے معنے دیتا ہو۔ یہ معنے عربی میں مستعمل ہیں۔ قرآن کریم میں بھی آتا ہے مَنْ اَنْصَارِیْ اِلَی اللّٰہِ یعنی کون اللہ کے ساتھ ہو کر میری مدد کرتا ہے۔ اس اِلٰی کے لئے یہ شرط ہوتی ہے ک
2
’’تمہارے درمیان‘‘ اس کے یہ معنے بھی ہو سکتے ہیں کہ جو معاہدہ تمہارے درمیان ہوا ہے وہ لکھ دے اور یہ بھی کہ کاتب تمہارے اپنے آدمیوں میں سے ہو۔ اور یہ بھی کہ وہ دونوں فریق کی موجودگی میں ان کے سامنے بیٹھ کر لکھے۔
3
یہ آیت ترجمہ کے لحاظ سے بہت پیچیدہ ہے کیونکہ اس میں شُھَدَآء کا لفظ موقع پر موجود ہونے والوں کے لئے استعمال کیا گیا ہے اور ایک ہی فقرہ میں دو معنوں میں گواہ کے لفظ نے ترجمہ میں پیچیدگی پیدا کر دی ہے۔ مطلب یہ ہے کہ جس وقت تحریر لکھی جا رہی ہو اگر لکھنے والے کے سوا جو مرد و عورت وہاں موجود ہوں ان میں سے وہ دو مردوں کو گواہ مقرر نہ کرنا چاہتا ہو بلکہ کسی عورت کو بھی شامل کرنا چاہتا ہو تو اس صورت میں جو لوگ موقع پر ہوں ان میں سے دونوں فریق کے اعتباری لوگوں میں سے ایک مرد اور دو عورتوں کی شہادت ڈلوائی جائے۔
4
حَاضِرَۃً کا ترجمہ ’’دست بدست‘‘ کیا گیا ہے۔ یعنی جب مال پر اسی وقت قبضہ کر لیا گیا ہو اور قیمت نقد ادا کر دی گئی ہو۔
5
اس میں اشارہ ہے کہ اس صورت میں بھی لکھنا اچھا ہے جیسا انگریزی دکان دار ووچر (Voucher) دیتا ہے۔ اس سے جھگڑے کم ہو جاتے ہیں۔
6
یہ بہت بڑے سَودوں کے متعلق ہے کہ ان کو لکھنا بھی چاہیے اور گواہ بھی رکھنے چاہئیں تا فتنہ نہ پیدا ہو۔
a
96:5.
b
4:30.
289
Important Words:
ولیه (someone who can watch his interest). ولی means, friend; helper; guardian of one’s affairs; he who protects or watches one’s interests (Aqrab). See also 2:108.
Commentary:
As the preceding verses prohibit interest and enjoin that only the original sum taken as a loan be returned to the creditor, the Quran now fittingly turns to the subject of loans not carrying interest. The verse enjoins that all transactions regarding loans should be committed to writing. It is really amazing, and is indeed a wonderful testimony to its Divine origin, that the Quran, which was revealed about 1,350 years ago when the art of writing was yet in its infancy, should lay so much stress on writing down all transactions.
The verse should not be interpreted to signify that only such transactions should be committed to writing as have a fixed term for the paying back of a loan. The injunction is general and is meant to obviate or minimize disputes so as to leave no room for doubt as to whether any amount has really been lent and as to the amount of the money lent. The words, for a fixed period, have been added to emphasize the additional fact that whenever a loan is advanced, a term must be fixed.
The verse further enjoins that when a transaction is made on credit, the document drawn up should be written by a third person so that there may be little chance of fraud and neither of the parties may have a cause of complaint against the other, both standing on the same level.
The borrower, and not the lender, is to dictate because: (1) it is the borrower who incurs the liability, and justice demands that words defining the liability should not only be well known to, but also selected by him; (2) the document is to be deposited with the lender and not the borrower. So the borrower has been asked to dictate so that the fact of his having dictated may serve as a proof of the correctness of the amount and the condition about payment, and he may have no ground to deny it.The clause, he should not diminish anything therefrom, have been added because loans may be of different kinds. They may not always be in cash and may be for long terms and there may also be certain conditions attached to them. In such cases it sometimes happens that in drawing up documents, people resort to trickery and leave loopholes. So borrowers (who have to dictate) have been warned against such evil practices and have been enjoined to fear God and dictate with honesty and justice.
In the clause, and call two witnesses from among your men, the word "your" has been most wisely added to imply that the witnesses should not be strangers but should be known men residing in the same locality so that, if need arises, they may be easily summoned to give evidence. The words "such as you like", point to the fact that the witnesses, whether men or women, should be desirable persons and should enjoy the confidence of both parties.
The clause, and let no harm be done to the scribe or the witness, signifies that if the scribe is a professional man, he should be duly paid for his services; otherwise wrong would be done to him. Similarly, a person should not be compelled, so far as possible, to become a witness if it causes him loss of any kind. Again, the scribe or the witnesses should also be paid their travelling and other necessary expenses when they are summoned before a Qadi or judge. The words also hint that the witnesses and the scribe should not be forced or threatened or bribed or otherwise influenced to suppress the truth or tell a falsehood when called upon to give evidence.
a
4:30.
b
96:5.
354
The borrower, and not the lender, is to dictate because; (1) it is the borrower who incurs the liability; and justice demands that the words defining the liability should be selected by him; (2) the document is to be deposited with the lender and not the borrower. So the borrower has been asked to dictate so that the fact of his having dictated may serve as a proof of the correctness of the amount and the conditions about payment, and he may have no cause or ground to deny it.
354A
The implication is that it would be better to have a writing even in such a case like cash memo or voucher.
354B
This refers to big transactions.
۞ وَاِنۡ کُنۡتُمۡ عَلٰی سَفَرٍ وَّلَمۡ تَجِدُوۡا کَاتِبًا فَرِہٰنٌ مَّقۡبُوۡضَۃٌ ۖ فَاِنۡ اَمِنَ بَعۡضُکُمۡ بَعۡضًا فَلۡیُؤَدِّ الَّذِی اؤۡتُمِنَ اَمٰنَتَہٗ وَلۡیَتَّقِ اللّٰہَ رَبَّہٗ ۗ وَلَا تَکۡتُمُوا الشَّہٰدَۃَ ۚ وَمَنۡ یَّکۡتُمۡہَا فَاِنَّہٗۤ اٰثِمٌ قَلۡبُہٗ ۗ وَاللّٰہُ بِمَا تَعۡمَلُوۡنَ عَلِیۡمٌ
2:141; 5:107.
Loans may also be advanced in the form of pledges, one party receiving the loan of money and the other the thing pledged in lieu of it. This form of practical transaction will be in the nature of an Amanah, i.e. a trust or deposit affecting both parties. By identifying a loan with a trust it is hinted that loans should be returned with the same care and honesty with which property deposited as a trust is returned on demand.
2:141; 5:107.
Important Words:
رھان (pledge) is derived from رھن. They say رھن الشیء فلانا او عند فلان i.e. he deposited the thing with him or gave it in his possession as a pledge or security for a debt, etc. راھن is one who makes such a pledge and مرتھن is one who receives it. رھینand مرھون mean, the thing so pledged; the thing placed or kept in custody in lieu of a debt, etc. رھان which is the noun-infinitive from راھن and رھن (rahn) which is the noun-infinitive from رھن (rahana) mean, the act of pledging; also the thing pledged. رھان is also the plural of رھن (Aqrab & Lane).
امانة (trust) and اوتمن (is entrusted) and امن (entrusts) are all derived from the same root. امن means, he trusted or he entrusted. ائتمن فلانا علی کذا means, he trusted him with that; he deposited it with him as a trust. امانة means, the thing committed to the trust and care of a person; also honesty, faithfulness and trustworthiness (Aqrab).
Commentary:
If a scribe is not available, loans may be advanced in the form of pledges, one party receiving the loan of money and the other the thing pledged in lieu of this loan. This form of practical transaction, the verse goes on to explain, will be in the nature of an امانة i.e. a trust or deposit affecting both parties. By classing a loan with a trust, it is hinted that loans should be returned with the same care and the same honesty with which property deposited as a trust is returned on demand.
The words, and conceal not testimony, either refer to the testimony of such witnesses as may be present at the time of the pledge, or it may refer to the testimony of the parties themselves. When no other witness is available, the parties are themselves treated as such and may be called upon to give a true account of the affairs on oath.
The expression, his heart is sinful, signifies that he who conceals testimony commits a sin which has not a temporary effect but vitiates the innermost recesses of his heart. Nay, it is a sign of the fact that his heart has already become vitiated.
b
2:141; 5:107.
213
贷款也可以抵押的方式进行,一方得到贷款而另一方得到作为与此相等的抵押品。这种实际交易方式的性质称为 اَمَانَة (Amanah), 即涉及双方的信托或押金。用一种抵押品来鉴定一笔贷款, 意思是说, 贷款必需小心公正地按约如数归还的同时, 作为抵押品的财产也要以同样精神归还原主。
a
2:141; 5:107.
290
Important Words:
رھان (pledge) is derived from رھن. They say رھن الشیء فلانا او عند فلان i.e. he deposited the thing with him or gave it in his possession as a pledge or security for a debt, etc. راھن is one who makes such a pledge and مرتھن is one who receives it. رھینand مرھون mean, the thing so pledged; the thing placed or kept in custody in lieu of a debt, etc. رھان which is the noun-infinitive from راھن and رھن (rahn) which is the noun-infinitive from رھن (rahana) mean, the act of pledging; also the thing pledged. رھان is also the plural of رھن (Aqrab & Lane).
امانة (trust) and اوتمن (is entrusted) and امن (entrusts) are all derived from the same root. امن means, he trusted or he entrusted. ائتمن فلانا علی کذا means, he trusted him with that; he deposited it with him as a trust. امانة means, the thing committed to the trust and care of a person; also honesty, faithfulness and trustworthiness (Aqrab).
Commentary:
If a scribe is not available, loans may be advanced in the form of pledges, one party receiving the loan of money and the other the thing pledged in lieu of this loan. This form of practical transaction, the verse goes on to explain, will be in the nature of an امانة i.e. a trust or deposit affecting both parties. By classing a loan with a trust, it is hinted that loans should be returned with the same care and the same honesty with which property deposited as a trust is returned on demand.
The words, and conceal not testimony, either refer to the testimony of such witnesses as may be present at the time of the pledge, or it may refer to the testimony of the parties themselves. When no other witness is available, the parties are themselves treated as such and may be called upon to give a true account of the affairs on oath.
The expression, his heart is sinful, signifies that he who conceals testimony commits a sin which has not a temporary effect but vitiates the innermost recesses of his heart. Nay, it is a sign of the fact that his heart has already become vitiated.
a
2:141; 5:107.
355
Loans may also be advanced in the form of pledges, one party receiving the loan of money and the other the thing pledged in lieu of it. This form of practical transaction will be in the nature of an Amanah, i.e. a trust or deposit affecting both parties. By identifying a loan with a trust it is hinted that loans should be returned with the same care and honesty with which property deposited as a trust is returned on demand.
فَاِنۡ حَآجُّوۡکَ فَقُلۡ اَسۡلَمۡتُ وَجۡہِیَ لِلّٰہِ وَمَنِ اتَّبَعَنِ ۗ وَقُل لِّلَّذِیۡنَ اُوۡتُوا الۡکِتٰبَ وَالۡاُمِّیّٖنَ ءَاَسۡلَمۡتُمۡ ۚ فَاِنۡ اَسۡلَمُوۡا فَقَدِ اہۡتَدَوۡا ۖ وَّاِنۡ تَوَلَّوۡا فَاِنَّمَا عَلَیۡکَ الۡبَلٰغُ ۗ وَاللّٰہُ بَصِیۡرٌۢ بِالۡعِبَادِ
4:126.
5:93, 100; 13:41; 16:83.
People of the Book and Ummiyyin (those who follow no revealed Book) comprise the whole of mankind.
See {113A} and {1058}.
If the People of the Book and those who follow no revealed Scripture were to surrender themselves to God, they would surely accept the Holy Prophet and be rightly guided, the former because clear prophecies are found in their Scriptures regarding him and the latter because of the combined testimony of nature, human conscience and common sense.
4:126.
5:93, 100; 13:41; 16:83.
Important Words:
امیین (the unlearned), see 2:79.
الذین اوتوا الکتاب (those who have been given the Book), i.e. the People of the Book. The two expressions, i.e. امیین and الذین اوتوا الکتاب comprise the whole of mankind. الذین اوتوا الکتاب are those people who possess and profess to follow a revealed scripture; and امیون are those who accept and follow no such Book.
Commentary:
If the People of the Book and those who follow no revealed Scripture were to submit to God, they would surely accept the Holy Prophet and be rightly guided, the former because clear prophecies are found in their Scriptures regarding him and the latter because of the combined testimony of nature, human conscience and common sense. Submission to God is the source of all true guidance. One stumbles and loses the right path only when one deviates from the course of submission, bowing to authorities other than God.
a
4:126.
b
5:93, 100; 13:41; 16:83.
a
4:126.
b
5:93, 100; 13:41; 16:83.
312
Important Words:
امیین (the unlearned), see 2:79.
الذین اوتوا الکتاب (those who have been given the Book), i.e. the People of the Book. The two expressions, i.e. امیین and الذین اوتوا الکتاب comprise the whole of mankind. الذین اوتوا الکتاب are those people who possess and profess to follow a revealed scripture; and امیون are those who accept and follow no such Book.
Commentary:
If the People of the Book and those who follow no revealed Scripture were to submit to God, they would surely accept the Holy Prophet and be rightly guided, the former because clear prophecies are found in their Scriptures regarding him and the latter because of the combined testimony of nature, human conscience and common sense. Submission to God is the source of all true guidance. One stumbles and loses the right path only when one deviates from the course of submission, bowing to authorities other than God.
a
4:126.
b
5:93, 100; 13:41; 16:83.
384
People of the Book and Ummiyyin (those who follow no revealed Book) comprise the whole of mankind.
385
See {113A} and {1058}.
386
If the People of the Book and those who follow no revealed Scripture were to surrender themselves to God, they would surely accept the Holy Prophet and be rightly guided, the former because clear prophecies are found in their Scriptures regarding him and the latter because of the combined testimony of nature, human conscience and common sense.
قُلۡ اَطِیۡعُوا اللّٰہَ وَالرَّسُوۡلَ ۖ فَاِنۡ تَوَلَّوۡا فَاِنَّ اللّٰہَ لَا یُحِبُّ الۡکٰفِرِیۡنَ
4:60; 5:93; 8:47; 24:55; 58:14.
4:60; 5:93; 8:47; 24:55; 58:14.
4:60; 5:93; 8:47; 24:55; 58:14.
Commentary:
In contrast to the previous verse, the present verse tells us of the end of those who do not love God and refuse to obey Him and His Messenger. They are disbelievers and are deprived of God’s love.
d
4:60; 5:93; 8:47; 24:55; 58:14.
a
4:60; 5:93; 8:47; 24:55; 58:14.
323
Commentary:
In contrast to the previous verse, the present verse tells us of the end of those who do not love God and refuse to obey Him and His Messenger. They are disbelievers and are deprived of God’s love.
c
4:60; 5:93; 8:47; 24:55; 58:14.
فَاِنۡ تَوَلَّوۡا فَاِنَّ اللّٰہَ عَلِیۡمٌۢ بِالۡمُفۡسِدِیۡنَ
’’خوب جانتا ہے‘‘ عَلِیْمٌ کا ترجمہ ہے جو مبالغہ کا صیغہ ہے۔
Commentary:
The clause, then remember that Allah knows the mischief-makers well, embodies a solemn warning. God being All-Knowing, each and every act of the wrongdoers is known to Him and He will judge them accordingly.
1
’’خوب جانتا ہے‘‘ عَلِیْمٌ کا ترجمہ ہے جو مبالغہ کا صیغہ ہے۔
352
Commentary:
The clause, then remember that Allah knows the mischief-makers well, embodies a solemn warning. God being All-Knowing, each and every act of the wrongdoers is known to Him and He will judge them accordingly.
قُلۡ یٰۤاَہۡلَ الۡکِتٰبِ تَعَالَوۡا اِلٰی کَلِمَۃٍ سَوَآءٍۭ بَیۡنَنَا وَبَیۡنَکُمۡ اَلَّا نَعۡبُدَ اِلَّا اللّٰہَ وَلَا نُشۡرِکَ بِہٖ شَیۡـًٔا وَّلَا یَتَّخِذَ بَعۡضُنَا بَعۡضًا اَرۡبَابًا مِّنۡ دُوۡنِ اللّٰہِ ۚ فَاِنۡ تَوَلَّوۡا فَقُوۡلُوا اشۡہَدُوۡا بِاَنَّا مُسۡلِمُوۡنَ
9:31.
’’کم سے کم‘‘ کسی لفظ کا ترجمہ نہیں بلکہ عبارت کا مفہوم ہے۔
9:31.
This verse is wrongly considered by some to provide a basis for a compromise between Islam on the one hand and Christianity and Judaism on the other. It is argued that if these religions also teach and inculcate the doctrine of Divine Unity, then other Islamic teachings supposed to be of comparatively little importance could safely be left alone. It is unthinkable that the idea of compromise in matters of faith could ever have been encouraged, with a people who, in the immediately preceding verses, have been severely condemned for their false beliefs and who are so forcefully challenged to a prayer-contest to invoke the curse of God upon the holders of false beliefs. The Holy Prophet, while writing his missionary epistle to Heraclius, used this very verse, yet he forcefully invited the latter to accept Islam and threatened him with Divine punishment if he refused to do so (Bukhari). This shows beyond doubt that the mere fact of his believing in Divine Unity could not, according to the Holy Prophet, save He
9:31.
Important Words:
اربابا (Lords) is the plural of رب (Lord) for which see 1:2. رب means, lord, master or owner; a chief or ruler to whom obedience is rendered; one who fosters, brings up, or nourishes (Lane & Aqrab).
Commentary:
This verse is wrongly considered by some to provide a basis for a compromise between Islam on the one hand and Christianity and Judaism on the other. It is argued that if these faiths become united in the doctrine of the Oneness of God, the verse permits the sacrifice of other Islamic teachings as being of comparatively little importance. Nothing can be farther from the truth. The Quran, the Hadith and the facts of history are all united in belying this ridiculous assumption. It is simply unthinkable that compromise in matters of faith could be allowed by any religion worth the name, particularly with a people who, in the immediately preceding verses, have been severely condemned for their beliefs and who are so forcefully challenged to a prayer contest to invoke the curse of God upon those who lie in their beliefs. The Holy Prophet, while writing his missionary epistle to Heraclius, used this very verse, yet he forcefully invited the latter to accept Islam and threatened him with Divine punishment if he refused to do so (Bukhari). This shows beyond doubt that the mere fact of his believing in the Oneness of God could not, according to the Holy Prophet, save Heraclius from God’s punishment. Elsewhere the Quran emphatically declares that, Surely the (true) religion with Allah is Islam, (i.e. complete submission); and whoso seeks a religion other than Islam, it shall not be accepted from him, and in the life to come he shall be among the losers (3:20 & 86). Can anything be clearer?
The truth is that this verse is intended to suggest an easy and simple method by which Jews and Christians can arrive at a right decision regarding the truth of Islam. Christians, in spite of claiming belief in the Unity of Godhead, felt satisfied in believing in the divinity of Jesus; and Jews, notwithstanding their claim to be monotheists, gave blind allegiance to their priests and divines, practically placing them in the position of God Himself. The verse exhorts both these communities to come back to their original belief in the Oneness of God and give up the worship of false deities who stand in the way of their accepting Islam. Thus, instead of seeking a compromise with these faiths, the verse virtually invites Christians and Jews to the faith of Islam, by drawing their attention to the doctrine of the Oneness of God which being, at least in its outer form, the common fundamental doctrine of all, could serve as a meeting ground for further approach.
It was exactly on these lines that Ahmad, the Promised Messiah, in his "Message of Peace", made an offer to the Hindus of India to enter into an agreement with the Muslims of his way of thinking to the effect that they (Hindus) would respect and honour the Holy Prophet of Islam and would look upon him as a true Messenger of God, even as he and his followers believed in Rama and Krishna as God’s Elect.
Special emphasis has been laid in the verse under comment on the Oneness of God—a doctrine on which in theory all revealed religions seem to agree, but regarding the details, of which no two Faiths are found to concur. Most religions claim to be monotheistic; but under the outer veneer of monotheism, polytheism very often lies hidden in most hideous forms. It is the simple faith of Islam alone which is really and truly monotheistic in all its aspects and which strongly condemns the association with God of anything or any being in His person, attributes, worship or works. It is most unfortunate, however, that in spite of Islam being such a strictly monotheistic faith, a section of present-day Muslims has drifted away into the quagmire of what cannot but be termed idol-worship in the wider sense of the word.
Incidentally, it may be noted that the letter mentioned by Bukhari and other Muslim traditionists as having been addressed by the Holy Prophet to Heraclius in the words of this verse inviting him to accept Islam has recently been discovered and found to contain the exact words quoted by Bukhari (R. Rel. vol. V. No. 8). This furnishes a strong proof of the essential authenticity of Bukhari and, for that matter, of other accepted works of Hadith.
a
9:31.
2
’’کم سے کم‘‘ کسی لفظ کا ترجمہ نہیں بلکہ عبارت کا مفہوم ہے۔
a
9:31.
353
Important Words:
اربابا (Lords) is the plural of رب (Lord) for which see 1:2. رب means, lord, master or owner; a chief or ruler to whom obedience is rendered; one who fosters, brings up, or nourishes (Lane & Aqrab).
Commentary:
This verse is wrongly considered by some to provide a basis for a compromise between Islam on the one hand and Christianity and Judaism on the other. It is argued that if these faiths become united in the doctrine of the Oneness of God, the verse permits the sacrifice of other Islamic teachings as being of comparatively little importance. Nothing can be farther from the truth. The Quran, the Hadith and the facts of history are all united in belying this ridiculous assumption. It is simply unthinkable that compromise in matters of faith could be allowed by any religion worth the name, particularly with a people who, in the immediately preceding verses, have been severely condemned for their beliefs and who are so forcefully challenged to a prayer contest to invoke the curse of God upon those who lie in their beliefs. The Holy Prophet, while writing his missionary epistle to Heraclius, used this very verse, yet he forcefully invited the latter to accept Islam and threatened him with Divine punishment if he refused to do so (Bukhari). This shows beyond doubt that the mere fact of his believing in the Oneness of God could not, according to the Holy Prophet, save Heraclius from God’s punishment. Elsewhere the Quran emphatically declares that, Surely the (true) religion with Allah is Islam, (i.e. complete submission); and whoso seeks a religion other than Islam, it shall not be accepted from him, and in the life to come he shall be among the losers (3:20 & 86). Can anything be clearer?
The truth is that this verse is intended to suggest an easy and simple method by which Jews and Christians can arrive at a right decision regarding the truth of Islam. Christians, in spite of claiming belief in the Unity of Godhead, felt satisfied in believing in the divinity of Jesus; and Jews, notwithstanding their claim to be monotheists, gave blind allegiance to their priests and divines, practically placing them in the position of God Himself. The verse exhorts both these communities to come back to their original belief in the Oneness of God and give up the worship of false deities who stand in the way of their accepting Islam. Thus, instead of seeking a compromise with these faiths, the verse virtually invites Christians and Jews to the faith of Islam, by drawing their attention to the doctrine of the Oneness of God which being, at least in its outer form, the common fundamental doctrine of all, could serve as a meeting ground for further approach.
It was exactly on these lines that Ahmad, the Promised Messiah, in his "Message of Peace", made an offer to the Hindus of India to enter into an agreement with the Muslims of his way of thinking to the effect that they (Hindus) would respect and honour the Holy Prophet of Islam and would look upon him as a true Messenger of God, even as he and his followers believed in Rama and Krishna as God’s Elect.
Special emphasis has been laid in the verse under comment on the Oneness of God—a doctrine on which in theory all revealed religions seem to agree, but regarding the details, of which no two Faiths are found to concur. Most religions claim to be monotheistic; but under the outer veneer of monotheism, polytheism very often lies hidden in most hideous forms. It is the simple faith of Islam alone which is really and truly monotheistic in all its aspects and which strongly condemns the association with God of anything or any being in His person, attributes, worship or works. It is most unfortunate, however, that in spite of Islam being such a strictly monotheistic faith, a section of present-day Muslims has drifted away into the quagmire of what cannot but be termed idol-worship in the wider sense of the word.
Incidentally, it may be noted that the letter mentioned by Bukhari and other Muslim traditionists as having been addressed by the Holy Prophet to Heraclius in the words of this verse inviting him to accept Islam has recently been discovered and found to contain the exact words quoted by Bukhari (R. Rel. vol. V. No. 8). This furnishes a strong proof of the essential authenticity of Bukhari and, for that matter, of other accepted works of Hadith.
a
9:31.
426A
This verse is wrongly considered by some to provide a basis for a compromise between Islam on the one hand and Christianity and Judaism on the other. It is argued that if these religions also teach and inculcate the doctrine of Divine Unity, then other Islamic teachings supposed to be of comparatively little importance could safely be left alone. It is unthinkable that the idea of compromise in matters of faith could ever have been encouraged, with a people who, in the immediately preceding verses, have been severely condemned for their false beliefs and who are so forcefully challenged to a prayer-contest to invoke the curse of God upon the holders of false beliefs. The Holy Prophet, while writing his missionary epistle to Heraclius, used this very verse, yet he forcefully invited the latter to accept Islam and threatened him with Divine punishment if he refused to do so (Bukhari). This shows beyond doubt that the mere fact of his believing in Divine Unity could not, according to the Holy Prophet, save He
وَابۡتَلُوا الۡیَتٰمٰی حَتّٰۤی اِذَا بَلَغُوا النِّکَاحَ فَاِنۡ اٰنَسۡتُمۡ مِّنۡہُمۡ رُشۡدًا فَادۡفَعُوۡۤا اِلَیۡہِمۡ اَمۡوٰلَہُمۡ ۖ وَلَا تَاۡکُلُوۡہَاۤ اِسۡرَافًا وَّبِدَارًا اَنۡ یَّکۡبَرُوۡا ۚ وَمَنۡ کَانَ غَنِیًّا فَلۡیَسۡتَعۡفِفۡ ۖ وَمَنۡ کَانَ فَقِیۡرًا فَلۡیَاۡکُلۡ بِالۡمَعۡرُوۡفِ ۚ فَاِذَا دَفَعۡتُمۡ اِلَیۡہِمۡ اَمۡوٰلَہُمۡ فَاَشۡہِدُوۡا عَلَیۡہِمۡ ۚ وَکَفٰی بِاللّٰہِ حَسِیۡبًا
Under no circumstances should the property of the orphans be made over to them before they attain puberty and are so mature of intellect as to take care of and properly manage it.
The verse also warns guardians not to squander away in haste the money of their wards before they are old enough to take charge of it. The guardian, if he is poor, is, however, allowed a reasonable wage, which should be in proportion to the amount of work he does and to the value of the ward’s property.
The property should be handed over to the wards in the presence of reliable witnesses as the word "presence" hints.
Commentary:
Guardians of orphans are enjoined to continue to test them so that if, after having reached the age of puberty, which according to some authorities is 18 years, and according to others 21, they are found to be capable of taking charge of their property, it should be handed over to them. But in no circumstances is it to be made over to them before puberty is attained and before they are so mature of intellect as to take care of and manage their property. If even at the mature age of 18 or 21, they are found to be incapable of managing their property, it may be withheld from them for a further period, with the sanction of the State.
The verse also warns guardians not to squander away in haste the money of their wards before they are old enough to take charge of it. The guardian is, however, allowed a reasonable wage, if he is poor, which should be in proportion to the amount of work he does and to the value of the ward’s property.
But if the guardian is a person of ample means, he should take nothing out of the orphan’s property. In that case, his should be a labour of love, done in hope of reward from God. This verse is not a repetition, but an explanation of 4:3 which contains a prohibitory injunction for such guardians as possess sufficient income with the addition that it allows a certain remuneration for guardians of meagre means.
The words, when you deliver to them their property, then take witnesses in their presence, have been added as a safeguard against all possible frauds as well as misunderstanding. The property should be handed over to the wards in the presence of reliable witnesses when both the wards and the witnesses are present, as the word "presence" hints.
The verse ends with a stern warning in the words, Allah is sufficient as a Reckoner. So all concerned should fear the All-Seeing and All-Knowing God. Indeed, the fear of being called to account before God is the only true basis of all righteousness and the real and most effective preventive against sin and iniquity. One should fear not only the punishment of God, but also losing His love and mercy.
489
Commentary:
Guardians of orphans are enjoined to continue to test them so that if, after having reached the age of puberty, which according to some authorities is 18 years, and according to others 21, they are found to be capable of taking charge of their property, it should be handed over to them. But in no circumstances is it to be made over to them before puberty is attained and before they are so mature of intellect as to take care of and manage their property. If even at the mature age of 18 or 21, they are found to be incapable of managing their property, it may be withheld from them for a further period, with the sanction of the State.
The verse also warns guardians not to squander away in haste the money of their wards before they are old enough to take charge of it. The guardian is, however, allowed a reasonable wage, if he is poor, which should be in proportion to the amount of work he does and to the value of the ward’s property.
But if the guardian is a person of ample means, he should take nothing out of the orphan’s property. In that case, his should be a labour of love, done in hope of reward from God. This verse is not a repetition, but an explanation of 4:3 which contains a prohibitory injunction for such guardians as possess sufficient income with the addition that it allows a certain remuneration for guardians of meagre means.
The words, when you deliver to them their property, then take witnesses in their presence, have been added as a safeguard against all possible frauds as well as misunderstanding. The property should be handed over to the wards in the presence of reliable witnesses when both the wards and the witnesses are present, as the word "presence" hints.
The verse ends with a stern warning in the words, Allah is sufficient as a Reckoner. So all concerned should fear the All-Seeing and All-Knowing God. Indeed, the fear of being called to account before God is the only true basis of all righteousness and the real and most effective preventive against sin and iniquity. One should fear not only the punishment of God, but also losing His love and mercy.
567
Under no circumstances should the property of the orphans be made over to them before they attain puberty and are so mature of intellect as to take care of and properly manage it.
568
The verse also warns guardians not to squander away in haste the money of their wards before they are old enough to take charge of it. The guardian, if he is poor, is, however, allowed a reasonable wage, which should be in proportion to the amount of work he does and to the value of the ward’s property.
569
The property should be handed over to the wards in the presence of reliable witnesses as the word "presence" hints.
فَاِنۡ کَذَّبُوۡکَ فَقَدۡ کُذِّبَ رُسُلٌ مِّنۡ قَبۡلِکَ جَآءُوۡ بِالۡبَیِّنٰتِ وَالزُّبُرِ وَالۡکِتٰبِ الۡمُنِیۡرِ
35:5, 26.
Zabur means, a writing or a book of wisdom and science, not containing legal statutes, ordinances or commandments, particularly the Book of David containing the Psalms (Lane).
The Torah which all the Israelite Prophets followed though they had also their separate revelations containing warnings and words of wisdom.
35:5, 26.
Important Words:
زبر (books of wisdom) is the plural of زبور which is derived from زبر. They say زبر البئر i.e. he cased or lined the well with stones or bricks, etc. زبر البناء means, he raised the wall by placing layers of stones or bricks on one another. زبر الکتاب means, he wrote the writing or the book. زبر السائل means, he chid or scolded the beggar. زبور (zabur) means, a writing or a book: a book of wisdom and intellectual science, not containing legal statutes, ordinances or commandments. Based on its verbal senses, the word would also mean a book that protects and beautifies a source of knowledge just as a casing protects and beautifies a well; or a book that contains warnings. The word is particularly used about the Book of David containing the Psalms. زبور (zubur) is the plural of زبر (zibr) which means, a writing or a book; also wisdom and reason (Aqrab & Lane).
Commentary:
It is worthy of note that unlike its predecessor, the present verse makes no reference to a burnt offering after the word بینات (clear signs) which shows that a burnt offering formed no proof of the truth of a claimant to prophethood.
It will be noted that whereas the words زبر (books of wisdom) and بینات (clear signs) are both in the plural number, the word الکتاب المنیر(the Shining Book) has been put in the singular number, the reason being that all the Israelite Prophets followed one Book of Law only, viz. the Torah given to Moses, while each of them came with separate clear signs as well as with separate Books or revelations containing things of wisdom and warnings.
b
35:5, 26.
297
زَبُوْر (Zabur) 意指智慧和科学的著作或书籍。不包括法规、条令或法律。尤指达五德 (大卫) 王的赞美诗 (Lane)。
298
所有以色列先知都信奉 «摩西五经», 虽然他们也有各自的启示, 里面有着鉴诫和明智的话。
a
35:5, 26.
467
Important Words:
زبر (books of wisdom) is the plural of زبور which is derived from زبر. They say زبر البئر i.e. he cased or lined the well with stones or bricks, etc. زبر البناء means, he raised the wall by placing layers of stones or bricks on one another. زبر الکتاب means, he wrote the writing or the book. زبر السائل means, he chid or scolded the beggar. زبور (zabur) means, a writing or a book: a book of wisdom and intellectual science, not containing legal statutes, ordinances or commandments. Based on its verbal senses, the word would also mean a book that protects and beautifies a source of knowledge just as a casing protects and beautifies a well; or a book that contains warnings. The word is particularly used about the Book of David containing the Psalms. زبور (zubur) is the plural of زبر (zibr) which means, a writing or a book; also wisdom and reason (Aqrab & Lane).
Commentary:
It is worthy of note that unlike its predecessor, the present verse makes no reference to a burnt offering after the word بینات (clear signs) which shows that a burnt offering formed no proof of the truth of a claimant to prophethood.
It will be noted that whereas the words زبر (books of wisdom) and بینات (clear signs) are both in the plural number, the word الکتاب المنیر(the Shining Book) has been put in the singular number, the reason being that all the Israelite Prophets followed one Book of Law only, viz. the Torah given to Moses, while each of them came with separate clear signs as well as with separate Books or revelations containing things of wisdom and warnings.
b
35:5, 26.
540
Zabur means, a writing or a book of wisdom and science, not containing legal statutes, ordinances or commandments, particularly the Book of David containing the Psalms (Lane).
541
The Torah which all the Israelite Prophets followed though they had also their separate revelations containing warnings and words of wisdom.
وَاِنۡ خِفۡتُمۡ اَلَّا تُقۡسِطُوۡا فِی الۡیَتٰمٰی فَانۡکِحُوۡا مَا طَابَ لَکُمۡ مِّنَ النِّسَآءِ مَثۡنٰی وَثُلٰثَ وَرُبٰعَ ۖ فَاِنۡ خِفۡتُمۡ اَلَّا تَعۡدِلُوۡا فَوٰحِدَۃً اَوۡ مَا مَلَکَتۡ اَیۡمٰنُکُمۡ ۚ ذٰلِکَ اَدۡنٰۤی اَلَّا تَعُوۡلُوا
4:130.
此节经文很重要。因为在一定条件下, 这儿允许一夫多妻。伊斯兰教允许 (虽然它肯定不会命令和鼓励) 一个男于同时可娶一至四个妻子。因为给予这种许可是与孤儿问题有关的, 所以应该在关心那个备受忽视的社会阶层的问题的基础上看待这种许可。在某些情况下, 只有按照环境的迫切需要从受监护的女性孤儿或其他女子中娶一个或超过一个妻子, 孤儿的权利才能得到保护。虽然这节经文所提到的一夫多妻与孤儿问题有关, 但是这种婚姻也可能由其它情况而引起, 如通过这种婚姻来纠正一些社会和道德上的弊病。如果只考虑这种婚姻本身的目的, 同意这种婚姻不仅是无可非议的, 而且在某种情况下, 是可取的, 甚至是十分必要的。在这种情况下, 不利用这种婚姻制度对个人与社会的利益, 无疑是有害的。根据 «古兰经», 婚姻的目的有四点: (1) 防止身体上、精神上以及道德上的疾病; (2:188; 4:25); (2) 安定精神, 得到爱侣 (30:22); (3) 生育子女; (4) 扩大亲戚的范围 (4:2)。有时候, 娶一个妻子就不能实现一个或全部上述婚姻目的。例如, 一个人的妻子永久病残, 或患上传染病时, 如果他不另娶妻子, 那么, 婚姻的目的就要受挫。实际上他毫无办法, 要么, 另订合法婚约, 要么, 因未能幸运地阻止情欲的侵袭而过着不道德的生活。一个患病的妻子也成不了幸福的伴侣, 因为不论她给丈夫如何有价值的关怀和同情, 但是她与她的丈夫在一起不能在各方面去安定丈夫的精神。同样, 如果妻子碰巧不能生育, 又没有一夫多妻制, 那么, 丈夫子嗣名留的这一完全正常自然要求就不能实现。正是为了满足这种迫切的需要, 伊斯兰教允许一夫多妻制度。如果出于上述任何一个情况, 丈夫与其第一个妻子离婚, 这是对他的一种耻辱。事实上, 一夫多妻的婚姻目的在某种程度上与一夫一妻婚姻目的是一样的。在一夫一妻制婚姻不能实现其中的一个或所有目的时, 一夫多妻婚姻就十分必要了。而且, 尽管他已有一个深深地爱着的妻子, 并也已达到了婚姻目的。但也有其他一些理由使某男子必须另娶一个或多个妻子, 那些理由是: (a) 保护孤儿; (b) 使可以结婚的寡妇得到丈夫; (c) 为缺少男子的家庭或社团增补男子。从注释的这节经文中, 我们清楚地看到, 采取一夫多妻制特别是为了将未受人保护的孤儿置于某人的保护之下。此节经文的含意是: 像这些需要受人保护的孤儿的母亲最好与保护人结婚, 这祥, 那保护人与这些孤儿的关系就更加直接与亲密, 比在其他情况下更关心他们的福利, 使寡妇们能得到丈夫 (24:33) 是制定一夫多妻制的另一个目的。在穆圣时代, 穆斯林迫于长期的战争。许多人在战争中死去, 留下了没有近亲照顾的寡妇和孤儿。妇女在数量上大为超过男子以及人数非常多的无人照顾的孤儿--------这是战争不可避免的结果--------鼓励一夫多妻以防止穆斯林社会的道德堕落。最近的两次世界大战证明伊斯兰教的这种婚姻制度是有用的。大战撇下了数量非常众多没有丈夫的年轻妇女。确实, 由于两次大战造成男子惊人的死亡, 使西方国家的妇女人数大大超过了男子, 这是目前西方社会道德败坏的原因, 它正在腐蚀西方社会的机体。除了使年轻的寡妇能得到丈夫外, 一夫多妻制的目的还在于应付战后发生的严重形势。战后除了各方面都在衰退外, 国家的男子人数急剧减少到使国家有可能灭亡的危险。人口出生率下降是民族衰亡的重要原因, 只有一夫多妻制能有效地改善这种情况。这种婚姻制度并非如人们所误解的那样, 是为了情欲的发泄。它的本质是需要男子和妇女作出牺牲, 这种牺牲要求个人的一时感情服从社会和国家的更大的利益。
مَا مَلَكَتْ اَيْمَانُكُمْ (Ma Malakat Aimanukum) 这一用语的一般意义是女战俘。她们没有被赎出, 被俘后在穆斯林的拘留和看管之下。因为她们参加战争想摧毁伊斯兰教, 因此理应剥夺她们的自由。在 «古兰经» 中用这一名称, 而不大用 عِبَادْ (‘Ibad, 奴隶) 和 اِمَاء (Ima’, 女奴隶), 为的要指出这种占有是公正和合法的。مِلْكُ يَمِيْن (Milku Yamin) 的意思是 “完全和正义的占有” (لِسَانْ, Lisan)。它包括奴隶和女奴隶两种意思。究竟在句中这一用语用在特定的地方意指什么, 须视上下文而定。关于 “他们自己所掌握的” 一语, 有许多误解: 这句话什么意思, 他们自己所掌握的人有什么权利和地位。伊斯兰教毫不含糊地谴责奴隶制。因此, 剥夺一个人 (他或她) 的自由是一种道德上的罪过。除非他或她参加战争来摧毁伊斯兰教或一个伊斯兰国家, 当然要剥夺他们的自由。买卖奴隶也是一种很严重的罪过。伊斯兰教的教导在这点上是十分清楚、毫不含糊和反复强调的, 按照这一教导, 假如有人使另一个人做他的奴隶, 他就对安拉和人类犯了严重的罪行 {الْبَيْع بُخارِی، كِتَابُ--------Bukhari, Kitabul-Bai‘ & دَاؤُد--------Da’ud, 由 فَتْحُ الْبَارِی--------Fathul-Bari摘录}。值得注意的是, 伊斯兰教在世界上开始建立的时候, 奴隶制是人类
*社会制度中的一个组成部分, 每个国家都有大量的奴隶。因此, 把一种已经紧密交织在整个人类社会组织之中的制度一下子抹掉而不严重伤害它的道德风气, 这是行不通, 甚至是不明智的。因此, 伊斯兰教力求逐渐地但有效而坚定地废除奴隶制。«古兰经» 制订了以下几条有效的法规以迅速而完善的废除奴隶制: (1) 只能在正规战以后抓战俘; (2) 在战争结束后不能扣留战俘不放, 但是 (3) 作为一种恩惠的表示, 或者可以用交换战俘的方式来释放战俘 (47:5)。但是, 那些由于不适合以上那些条例而得不到自由的不幸的人们, 或者应该留在他们的穆斯林主人那里的人, 可以和他们的主人书写一个赎身合同 (24:34)。这样的话, 如果一个女人在上述性质的情况下作了战俘, 丧失了自由, 成为 مِلْكُ يَمِيْن (Milku Yamin), 她不能在交换战俘中获释, 政府的困境也不许可其以恩惠的表示而立即释放她, 她的政府或人们也不来赎买她, 她也不寻求和主人书立合同来买她的自由, 那么, 为
了道德起见, 他的主人在没有她事先同意的情况下娶了她, 有什么可以反对或有意见的呢? 至于没有和一个女战俘或奴隶结婚而发生性关系, 这在 «古兰经» 任何一节经文中也没有说过可以这么做。«古兰经» 不仅认为没有正式结婚是不可以把女战俘当妻子对待, 而且有清楚而确定的命令, 这些战俘像自由的妇女一样, 必须结了婚才能作为妻子。其中惟一的区别是社会地位的暂时的差别。由于她们参加反对伊斯兰教的战争而丧失了婚前同意的权利, 因此和她们结婚不必考虑像对自由妇女那样去徵求她们事先的同意。因此 مَا مَلَكَتْ اَيْمَانُكُمْ (Ma Malakat Aimanukum) 这一用语意指女战俘。按照 «古兰经», 无论如何也不会支持这样的看法, 说伊斯兰教批准非法同居。除了这节经文外, 至少还有其它四节经文以清楚而明确的条文制定了女战俘不应常处于不结婚状态中 (2:222; 4:4; 4:26; 24:33)。穆圣在这点也是态度非常鲜明的, 据记载他曾经说过, “如果某一个人有一个年幼的女奴隶, 他给她以正当的教育, 并用适当方式把她扶养成人, 然后解放并娶她为妻, 对他来说, 这是双重的报答” (الْعِلْم بُخَارِی، كِتَابُ Bukhari, Kitabul-‘Ilm)。穆圣这一说法的意思是, 如果一个穆斯林想要娶女奴隶为妻, 他必须先解放她, 然后娶她。穆圣自己的做法与这一训律十分符合。他的两个妻子朱伟里亚 (جُوَيْرِيَة, Juwairiyah) 和萨菲亚 (صَفِيَّة, Safiyyah) 就是作为战俘而来到他那里的。她们是他的 مِلْكُ يَمِيْن (Milku Yamin)。但他按照伊斯兰教的律令娶了她们。他也娶了 مَارِيَة (Mariyah), 她是埃及国王送给他的, 她享有像穆圣其他妻子那样的自由的地位。她戴上头盖, 并也被视为 “穆民之母”。«古兰经» 说得很清楚, 有关婚姻的律令适用于 “你们自己所掌握的 (奴婢)” 就像适用于 “穆圣姑父母、舅父母和姨父母的女儿” 那样。她们两个人都是结婚后才作为妻子的。以上所说的三类妇女都是通过结婚对穆圣才是合法的 (33:51)。还有, “禁止你们娶已婚的妇女, 除非你们具有所有权的,” (4:25) 这节经文连同上一节经文都述及到, 如果一个男人娶这种女人 (其中包括已婚的女人), 那是不合法的。但这里有个例外, 在宗教战争中被俘的那些已婚妇女宁愿留在穆斯林那里, 是可以同她们的主人结婚的。她们不愿回到以前丈夫那里去的这一事实被认为等于解除了她们过去的婚约。
这方面, 顺便还有一点值得注意, 不准许同一个女奴隶在禁止范围内的这样一些女亲属 (相应于一个自由妇女的那些亲属) 结婚。例如: 奴隶妻子的母亲、姐妹、女儿等是不能结婚的。要进一步讲清楚的是, 由于启示那个时候的环境, «古兰经» 必须区别两种妇女的社会地位。那种区别用 زَوْج (Zauj, 娶自由的妇女) 和 مِلْكُ يَمِيْن (Milku Yamin, 娶奴隶奴女) 等词来表达。前者意味着夫妻间是平等的, 而后者意味着妻子的地位要差一些。不过, 那是暂时的。«古兰经» 和穆圣极力劝告, 必须先给女奴隶完全的自由和地位, 然后娶她们。穆圣就是这样做的。此外, 伊斯兰教不准许在一般战争中俘虏妇女作为奴隶。未徵得一个女奴隶的事先同意而和她结婚, 只是在以下的情况下才可以: 敌对国先发动反对伊斯兰教的宗教战争, 想消灭伊斯兰教, 并在剑尖下强迫穆斯林放弃他们的宗教, 然后把他们的俘虏--------男的或女的--------作为奴隶对待, 就像在穆圣时代他们做的那样。那时, 敌人抓去穆斯林妇女作为俘虏并把他们当作奴隶看待。伊斯兰教的命令只是一种报复措施, 就其真实的性质来说, 它的时间是短暂的。它也具有保护被俘妇女德行的意义。现在那些条件已不复存在。现在没有宗教战争, 因此没有战俘被当作奴隶或女奴看待。
یعنی یتیم عورتوں سے ایک سے زیادہ شادیاں کرنی اچھی نہیں۔ کیونکہ بے انصافی کا ڈر ہے۔ ہاں ان کے سوا دوسری عورتوں سے دو دو‘ تین تین‘ چار چار سے نکاح کر سکتے ہو کیونکہ ان کے ولی ان کے حقوق کا مطالبہ کرنے والے موجود ہیں۔
یعنی اس طریق پر عمل کرکے تم ظلم اور گناہ کے خطرہ سے بہت حد تک محفوظ ہو جاؤ گے۔
4:130.
The verse is important inasmuch as it permits polygamy under certain circumstances. Islam allows (though it certainly does not enjoin or encourage) a man to have more than one wife up to four at a time. As this permission has been given in connection with the subject of orphans, it should be taken primarily to be based on the question of the care of that much-neglected class of society. There are cases when the interests of orphans can only be protected by marrying one or more wives from among the female wards or from other women as the exigencies of circumstances may require. Though the verse mentions polygamy in connection with the subject of orphans, yet other situations may arise when it may become a necessary remedy for some social or moral evils. If only the objects of marriage itself are considered, the permission appears to be not only justifiable but in some cases desirable and even necessary; nay, in such cases it may become positively injurious to the best interests of individuals and of the com
The expression, Ma Malakat Aimanukum, generally signifies, women prisoners of war who are not ransomed and who are in the custody and control of their Muslim captors because they had taken part in a war which was waged to destroy Islam and thus had legitimately deprived themselves of their freedom. The term has been used in the Qur’an in preference to ‘Ibad and Ima’ (slaves and bondwomen) to point to a just and rightful possession, the expression Milku Yamin signifying full and rightful possession (Lisan). It includes both slaves and bondwomen, and it is only the context which determines what the expression signifies in a particular place. Much misunderstanding prevails as to what the expression "their right hands possess" signifies, and what are the rights and status of the persons to whom it applies. Islam has condemned slavery in unequivocal terms. According to it, it is a mortal sin to deprive a person of his or her liberty, unless, of course, he or she renders himself
Ta‘ulu (do injustice) is derived from ‘Ala which means; (1) he had a large family; (2) he supported the family; (3) he was or became poor; (4) he acted wrongfully; or deviated from the right course (Lane).
4:130.
Important Words:
طاب (as may be agreeable). طاب الشیء means, the thing was or became pleasing, delightful, agreeable or delicious. طابت به نفسی means, my mind or my soul became pleased and satisfied with it. طاب العیش لفلان means, life became pleasant and free from cares for such a one. طاب عن الشیء نفسا means, he willingly parted with the thing (Aqrab & Lane).
مثنی (two) is derived from ثنی. They say ثناہ i.e. he doubled it or folded it; or he turned one part of it upon another. ثنیsignifies the repetition of a thing, doing it one time after another, or a thing or affair done twice. مثنی means اثنان اثنان i.e. two and two; two and two together; or two at a time and two at a time. Similarly, ثلاث means, three and three; three and three together; or three at a time and three at a time; and so is the meaning of رباع (Lane & Aqrab). The expression مثنی و ثلاث و رباع would thus mean, two at a time, or three at a time, or four at a time.
تعولوا (do injustice) is derived from عال which means:(1) he had a family or a large family; (2) he sustained and supported the family; (3) he was or became poor; (4) he acted unjustly and wrongfully, or he deviated from the right course.
Commentary:
The verse is important inasmuch as it permits polygamy under special circumstances. Islam allows (though it certainly does not enjoin) a man to have more than one wife up to four at a time. As the permission concerning polygamy has been given in connection with the subject of orphans, it should be taken to be primarily based on the question of the care of that much-neglected class of society. There are cases when the interests of orphans can best be protected by marrying one or more wives from among the female wards or from other women as the exigencies of circumstances may require. This can generally happen in one of the following cases:
(1) A man has a number of orphans, including girls, to look after. He is unmarried and there is danger of his falling into temptation. In this case he should marry one or more girls, as the case may be, from among his wards and thus protect himself from falling into sin or from betraying his trust and acting wrongfully towards his wards.
(2) He is married, but his wife fails to treat the orphans properly. He may in such a case also marry one of his female wards so that they may have a good and separate home of their own.
(3) Some of his younger relations, e.g., brothers or sisters, become orphans, and he finds that he or his existing wife cannot properly look after them. In such an eventuality, he may marry a suitable woman of mature age who may treat them like a mother. It is on record that in similar circumstances Jabir, a young man and one of the Holy Prophet’s distinguished Companions, married a widow of mature age and when the Prophet asked him why he had not married a young girl, Jabir replied that he had done so that his wife might look after his brothers and sisters who were left orphans by the death of his father. The Holy Prophet was much pleased at this act of Jabir and prayed for him (Bukhari, ch. on Buyu‘).
(4) If a person is afraid that the orphans under his care being strangers to him, he may not treat them as kindly as he should do, he may establish direct relationship with them by marrying one of the female wards.
(5) If a person has a large number of orphans under his care and he finds that he cannot do full justice to them without marrying more wives than one, he is permitted to do so to the limit of four.
The words, two or three or four, signify that the last number marks the utmost limit. It is related that after this verse was revealed, the Holy Prophet asked those of his Companions who had more than four wives to keep any four of them they liked and divorce the rest, so that the number might not exceed four (Tirmidhi, ch. on Nikah).
A general note on polygamy is appropriate here. Though the verse mentions polygamy in connection with the subject of orphans, yet other situations may also arise in which polygamy may become a necessary remedy for many social or moral evils.
If only the objects of marriage be considered, the permission of the Quran to its followers to wed more wives than one, appears to be not only justifiable but in some cases desirable and even necessary; nay, in such cases it may become positively injurious to the best interests of individuals and of the community not to take advantage of this permission. According to the Quran, the objects of marriage are four, i.e. (1) protection against physical, moral and spiritual maladies; (2) peace of mind and the availability of a loving companion; (3) procreation of children; and (4) widening of the circle of relationship.
With respect to the first-mentioned object, the Quran says: "And allowed to you are those beyond that, (i.e. the cases mentioned in the earlier verses) that you seek them by means of your property—marrying them properly (and guarding yourselves against animal passions) and not committing fornication (and not indulging in unrestricted gratification) (4:25). The word محصنین occurring in the verse quoted above is derived from احصان which means, to seek protection from the attacks of an enemy by entering into a fort. Thus Islam regards marriage as a sort of fort, or a means of protection against moral and spiritual diseases. With respect to this object the Quran further says: They (your wives) are a garment for you and you are a garment for them (2:188). Now, the dress of a person serves a threefold purpose: (1) It protects him against the inclemency of weather; (2) it serves as an embellishment and adornment; and (3) it covers one’s private parts and any defects that may be in one’s physical formation. With respect to the second object the Quran says: And of His Signs is this, that He has created wives for you from among yourselves that you may find peace of mind in them and He has engendered love and tenderness between you (30:22). About the third object it says: Your wives are a tilth for you so approach your tilth when and how you like (2:224).
Now every one can easily conceive that one or all of the above-mentioned four objects of marriage, i.e. (1) protection against physical, moral and spiritual diseases; (2) procreation and propagation of the human race: (3) company of a life-long and loving companion and (4) widening of the circle of relationship are, sometimes, not realized in the case of one wife only. It is a hard fact which cannot be denied that there are persons whose sexual instinct is too strong to be satisfied with one wife. This is a physical necessity inherent in man and it is playing with fire to make light of this, the most powerful of all physical instincts. The only sane and proper course open to a man whose sexual powers are abnormally strong is to marry another, if one wife does not satisfy him. Such cases may be rare, but you cannot ignore their existence altogether. And a perfect religious system, as Islam claims to be, has to provide for the physical and spiritual requirements of all sorts of people. Again, if the wife of a person becomes a permanent invalid or suffers from a contagious disease, the object of marriage is certainly defeated if such a person does not marry another wife. Indeed, no course is left to him but either to contract another lawful marriage or, failing successfully to combat the attacks of his passions, to lead a dissolute life. And an ailing wife cannot make a good companion either, because, however worthy of regard and com- passion she may be, her company cannot give peace of mind to her husband in all respects. In the third instance, if the wife of a person happens to be barren, the natural and perfectly legitimate desire of the husband to have an issue to succeed him and perpetuate his name remains unfulfilled in the absence of a polygamous marriage. It is to meet the requirements of all such persons that Islam has allowed the contraction of plural matrimonial relations. If, however, in any of these cases a husband divorces his first wife, it would be a shame and disgrace for him. For instance, in the case of an invalid wife it would mean that he lived with her as long as she was whole and deserted her at a time when she most needed his protection. The only honourable course in such a case would be to look after the diseased wife tenderly and marry another woman who may fulfil the functions of a wife.
It will thus be seen that the objects of a polygamous marriage are, to a certain extent, the same as those of a monogamous marriage. When one or all of those objects are not realized by a monogamous marriage, a polygamous marriage becomes a necessity and is allowed. There are, however, other reasons which may also render it necessary for a person to have one or more wives in addition to the one whom he dearly loves and who also fulfils the objects of marriage. Those reasons are: (a) to protect orphans; (b) to provide husbands for marriageable widows and (c) to supplement the decreasing manhood of a family or community.
It is manifestly clear from the verse under comment in which permission is given to marry more wives than one that polygamy is resorted to particularly with a view to taking under one’s protection orphans left unprotected. The verse clearly states: If you fear that you will not be fair in dealing with orphans (under your protection), then marry of women as may be agreeable to you, two or three or four; and if you fear you will not deal justly (between your wives) then marry only one. The words hint that the mother of such orphans as are left in the guardianship of a person should preferably be married by him so that he should become directly related to, and more intimately connected with, them and thus become more interested in their welfare than he otherwise could be.
Again, the Quran says: And marry widows from among you (24:33). To provide husbands for widows is thus another object which the institution of polygamy fulfils. Muslims were perpetually engaged in fighting in the time of the Holy Prophet. Many fell in wars and left behind widows and orphans without near relations to look after them. The preponderance of women over men and an exceptionally large number of orphans with no one to look after them, which is the inevitable result of war, necessitated that to save the Muslim society from moral degeneration, polygamous marriages should be encouraged. The last World War also vindicated this useful institution of Islam. It left an abnormally large number of young women without husbands. Indeed, the great preponderance of females over males in the west, due to the appalling loss of manhood caused by the War, is responsible for the present awful laxity of morals which is eating into the vitals of western society. Young girls fail to get suitable husbands. But natural passions must be satisfied. The result is dissolution and depravity. In view of the moral depravity prevailing in many countries, who has the hardihood to deny the wisdom of the Islamic institution of polygamy? Many indescribable moral and physical evils have arisen in the west as the result of this preponderance of women over men, the only proper remedy for which is polygamy.
The institution of polygamy is also intended to meet the serious situation that follows in the wake of a war, when, besides other aspects of decline, the manhood of a nation becomes so depleted as to threaten national destruction. The fall of birth-rate, which is a potent cause of the decay of a people and from which some Western countries are badly suffering, can be effectively remedied only by resorting to polygamy. The West will never recover from the terrible moral and social diseases from which it is suffering as well as from the appalling numerical decline facing certain countries and communities unless, setting aside all false notions and false sentiments, it submits to the Islamic injunctions about polygamy. It is a sacrifice demanded of men and women alike—a sacrifice in which personal and passing sentiments are required to be partly ignored for the wider and permanent interests of whole communities and countries.
a
4:130.
310
此节经文很重要。因为在一定条件下, 这儿允许一夫多妻。伊斯兰教允许 (虽然它肯定不会命令和鼓励) 一个男于同时可娶一至四个妻子。因为给予这种许可是与孤儿问题有关的, 所以应该在关心那个备受忽视的社会阶层的问题的基础上看待这种许可。在某些情况下, 只有按照环境的迫切需要从受监护的女性孤儿或其他女子中娶一个或超过一个妻子, 孤儿的权利才能得到保护。虽然这节经文所提到的一夫多妻与孤儿问题有关, 但是这种婚姻也可能由其它情况而引起, 如通过这种婚姻来纠正一些社会和道德上的弊病。如果只考虑这种婚姻本身的目的, 同意这种婚姻不仅是无可非议的, 而且在某种情况下, 是可取的, 甚至是十分必要的。在这种情况下, 不利用这种婚姻制度对个人与社会的利益, 无疑是有害的。根据 «古兰经», 婚姻的目的有四点: (1) 防止身体上、精神上以及道德上的疾病; (2:188; 4:25); (2) 安定精神, 得到爱侣 (30:22); (3) 生育子女; (4) 扩大亲戚的范围 (4:2)。有时候, 娶一个妻子就不能实现一个或全部上述婚姻目的。例如, 一个人的妻子永久病残, 或患上传染病时, 如果他不另娶妻子, 那么, 婚姻的目的就要受挫。实际上他毫无办法, 要么, 另订合法婚约, 要么, 因未能幸运地阻止情欲的侵袭而过着不道德的生活。一个患病的妻子也成不了幸福的伴侣, 因为不论她给丈夫如何有价值的关怀和同情, 但是她与她的丈夫在一起不能在各方面去安定丈夫的精神。同样, 如果妻子碰巧不能生育, 又没有一夫多妻制, 那么, 丈夫子嗣名留的这一完全正常自然要求就不能实现。正是为了满足这种迫切的需要, 伊斯兰教允许一夫多妻制度。如果出于上述任何一个情况, 丈夫与其第一个妻子离婚, 这是对他的一种耻辱。事实上, 一夫多妻的婚姻目的在某种程度上与一夫一妻婚姻目的是一样的。在一夫一妻制婚姻不能实现其中的一个或所有目的时, 一夫多妻婚姻就十分必要了。而且, 尽管他已有一个深深地爱着的妻子, 并也已达到了婚姻目的。但也有其他一些理由使某男子必须另娶一个或多个妻子, 那些理由是: (a) 保护孤儿; (b) 使可以结婚的寡妇得到丈夫; (c) 为缺少男子的家庭或社团增补男子。从注释的这节经文中, 我们清楚地看到, 采取一夫多妻制特别是为了将未受人保护的孤儿置于某人的保护之下。此节经文的含意是: 像这些需要受人保护的孤儿的母亲最好与保护人结婚, 这祥, 那保护人与这些孤儿的关系就更加直接与亲密, 比在其他情况下更关心他们的福利, 使寡妇们能得到丈夫 (24:33) 是制定一夫多妻制的另一个目的。在穆圣时代, 穆斯林迫于长期的战争。许多人在战争中死去, 留下了没有近亲照顾的寡妇和孤儿。妇女在数量上大为超过男子以及人数非常多的无人照顾的孤儿--------这是战争不可避免的结果--------鼓励一夫多妻以防止穆斯林社会的道德堕落。最近的两次世界大战证明伊斯兰教的这种婚姻制度是有用的。大战撇下了数量非常众多没有丈夫的年轻妇女。确实, 由于两次大战造成男子惊人的死亡, 使西方国家的妇女人数大大超过了男子, 这是目前西方社会道德败坏的原因, 它正在腐蚀西方社会的机体。除了使年轻的寡妇能得到丈夫外, 一夫多妻制的目的还在于应付战后发生的严重形势。战后除了各方面都在衰退外, 国家的男子人数急剧减少到使国家有可能灭亡的危险。人口出生率下降是民族衰亡的重要原因, 只有一夫多妻制能有效地改善这种情况。这种婚姻制度并非如人们所误解的那样, 是为了情欲的发泄。它的本质是需要男子和妇女作出牺牲, 这种牺牲要求个人的一时感情服从社会和国家的更大的利益。
311
مَا مَلَكَتْ اَيْمَانُكُمْ (Ma Malakat Aimanukum) 这一用语的一般意义是女战俘。她们没有被赎出, 被俘后在穆斯林的拘留和看管之下。因为她们参加战争想摧毁伊斯兰教, 因此理应剥夺她们的自由。在 «古兰经» 中用这一名称, 而不大用 عِبَادْ (‘Ibad, 奴隶) 和 اِمَاء (Ima’, 女奴隶), 为的要指出这种占有是公正和合法的。مِلْكُ يَمِيْن (Milku Yamin) 的意思是 “完全和正义的占有” (لِسَانْ, Lisan)。它包括奴隶和女奴隶两种意思。究竟在句中这一用语用在特定的地方意指什么, 须视上下文而定。关于 “他们自己所掌握的” 一语, 有许多误解: 这句话什么意思, 他们自己所掌握的人有什么权利和地位。伊斯兰教毫不含糊地谴责奴隶制。因此, 剥夺一个人 (他或她) 的自由是一种道德上的罪过。除非他或她参加战争来摧毁伊斯兰教或一个伊斯兰国家, 当然要剥夺他们的自由。买卖奴隶也是一种很严重的罪过。伊斯兰教的教导在这点上是十分清楚、毫不含糊和反复强调的, 按照这一教导, 假如有人使另一个人做他的奴隶, 他就对安拉和人类犯了严重的罪行 {الْبَيْع بُخارِی، كِتَابُ--------Bukhari, Kitabul-Bai‘ & دَاؤُد--------Da’ud, 由 فَتْحُ الْبَارِی--------Fathul-Bari摘录}。值得注意的是, 伊斯兰教在世界上开始建立的时候, 奴隶制是人类
*社会制度中的一个组成部分, 每个国家都有大量的奴隶。因此, 把一种已经紧密交织在整个人类社会组织之中的制度一下子抹掉而不严重伤害它的道德风气, 这是行不通, 甚至是不明智的。因此, 伊斯兰教力求逐渐地但有效而坚定地废除奴隶制。«古兰经» 制订了以下几条有效的法规以迅速而完善的废除奴隶制: (1) 只能在正规战以后抓战俘; (2) 在战争结束后不能扣留战俘不放, 但是 (3) 作为一种恩惠的表示, 或者可以用交换战俘的方式来释放战俘 (47:5)。但是, 那些由于不适合以上那些条例而得不到自由的不幸的人们, 或者应该留在他们的穆斯林主人那里的人, 可以和他们的主人书写一个赎身合同 (24:34)。这样的话, 如果一个女人在上述性质的情况下作了战俘, 丧失了自由, 成为 مِلْكُ يَمِيْن (Milku Yamin), 她不能在交换战俘中获释, 政府的困境也不许可其以恩惠的表示而立即释放她, 她的政府或人们也不来赎买她, 她也不寻求和主人书立合同来买她的自由, 那么, 为
了道德起见, 他的主人在没有她事先同意的情况下娶了她, 有什么可以反对或有意见的呢? 至于没有和一个女战俘或奴隶结婚而发生性关系, 这在 «古兰经» 任何一节经文中也没有说过可以这么做。«古兰经» 不仅认为没有正式结婚是不可以把女战俘当妻子对待, 而且有清楚而确定的命令, 这些战俘像自由的妇女一样, 必须结了婚才能作为妻子。其中惟一的区别是社会地位的暂时的差别。由于她们参加反对伊斯兰教的战争而丧失了婚前同意的权利, 因此和她们结婚不必考虑像对自由妇女那样去徵求她们事先的同意。因此 مَا مَلَكَتْ اَيْمَانُكُمْ (Ma Malakat Aimanukum) 这一用语意指女战俘。按照 «古兰经», 无论如何也不会支持这样的看法, 说伊斯兰教批准非法同居。除了这节经文外, 至少还有其它四节经文以清楚而明确的条文制定了女战俘不应常处于不结婚状态中 (2:222; 4:4; 4:26; 24:33)。穆圣在这点也是态度非常鲜明的, 据记载他曾经说过, “如果某一个人有一个年幼的女奴隶, 他给她以正当的教育, 并用适当方式把她扶养成人, 然后解放并娶她为妻, 对他来说, 这是双重的报答” (الْعِلْم بُخَارِی، كِتَابُ Bukhari, Kitabul-‘Ilm)。穆圣这一说法的意思是, 如果一个穆斯林想要娶女奴隶为妻, 他必须先解放她, 然后娶她。穆圣自己的做法与这一训律十分符合。他的两个妻子朱伟里亚 (جُوَيْرِيَة, Juwairiyah) 和萨菲亚 (صَفِيَّة, Safiyyah) 就是作为战俘而来到他那里的。她们是他的 مِلْكُ يَمِيْن (Milku Yamin)。但他按照伊斯兰教的律令娶了她们。他也娶了 مَارِيَة (Mariyah), 她是埃及国王送给他的, 她享有像穆圣其他妻子那样的自由的地位。她戴上头盖, 并也被视为 “穆民之母”。«古兰经» 说得很清楚, 有关婚姻的律令适用于 “你们自己所掌握的 (奴婢)” 就像适用于 “穆圣姑父母、舅父母和姨父母的女儿” 那样。她们两个人都是结婚后才作为妻子的。以上所说的三类妇女都是通过结婚对穆圣才是合法的 (33:51)。还有, “禁止你们娶已婚的妇女, 除非你们具有所有权的,” (4:25) 这节经文连同上一节经文都述及到, 如果一个男人娶这种女人 (其中包括已婚的女人), 那是不合法的。但这里有个例外, 在宗教战争中被俘的那些已婚妇女宁愿留在穆斯林那里, 是可以同她们的主人结婚的。她们不愿回到以前丈夫那里去的这一事实被认为等于解除了她们过去的婚约。
这方面, 顺便还有一点值得注意, 不准许同一个女奴隶在禁止范围内的这样一些女亲属 (相应于一个自由妇女的那些亲属) 结婚。例如: 奴隶妻子的母亲、姐妹、女儿等是不能结婚的。要进一步讲清楚的是, 由于启示那个时候的环境, «古兰经» 必须区别两种妇女的社会地位。那种区别用 زَوْج (Zauj, 娶自由的妇女) 和 مِلْكُ يَمِيْن (Milku Yamin, 娶奴隶奴女) 等词来表达。前者意味着夫妻间是平等的, 而后者意味着妻子的地位要差一些。不过, 那是暂时的。«古兰经» 和穆圣极力劝告, 必须先给女奴隶完全的自由和地位, 然后娶她们。穆圣就是这样做的。此外, 伊斯兰教不准许在一般战争中俘虏妇女作为奴隶。未徵得一个女奴隶的事先同意而和她结婚, 只是在以下的情况下才可以: 敌对国先发动反对伊斯兰教的宗教战争, 想消灭伊斯兰教, 并在剑尖下强迫穆斯林放弃他们的宗教, 然后把他们的俘虏--------男的或女的--------作为奴隶对待, 就像在穆圣时代他们做的那样。那时, 敌人抓去穆斯林妇女作为俘虏并把他们当作奴隶看待。伊斯兰教的命令只是一种报复措施, 就其真实的性质来说, 它的时间是短暂的。它也具有保护被俘妇女德行的意义。现在那些条件已不复存在。现在没有宗教战争, 因此没有战俘被当作奴隶或女奴看待。
2
یعنی یتیم عورتوں سے ایک سے زیادہ شادیاں کرنی اچھی نہیں۔ کیونکہ بے انصافی کا ڈر ہے۔ ہاں ان کے سوا دوسری عورتوں سے دو دو‘ تین تین‘ چار چار سے نکاح کر سکتے ہو کیونکہ ان کے ولی ان کے حقوق کا مطالبہ کرنے والے موجود ہیں۔
3
یعنی اس طریق پر عمل کرکے تم ظلم اور گناہ کے خطرہ سے بہت حد تک محفوظ ہو جاؤ گے۔
b
4:130.
486
Important Words:
طاب (as may be agreeable). طاب الشیء means, the thing was or became pleasing, delightful, agreeable or delicious. طابت به نفسی means, my mind or my soul became pleased and satisfied with it. طاب العیش لفلان means, life became pleasant and free from cares for such a one. طاب عن الشیء نفسا means, he willingly parted with the thing (Aqrab & Lane).
مثنی (two) is derived from ثنی. They say ثناہ i.e. he doubled it or folded it; or he turned one part of it upon another. ثنیsignifies the repetition of a thing, doing it one time after another, or a thing or affair done twice. مثنی means اثنان اثنان i.e. two and two; two and two together; or two at a time and two at a time. Similarly, ثلاث means, three and three; three and three together; or three at a time and three at a time; and so is the meaning of رباع (Lane & Aqrab). The expression مثنی و ثلاث و رباع would thus mean, two at a time, or three at a time, or four at a time.
تعولوا (do injustice) is derived from عال which means:(1) he had a family or a large family; (2) he sustained and supported the family; (3) he was or became poor; (4) he acted unjustly and wrongfully, or he deviated from the right course.
Commentary:
The verse is important inasmuch as it permits polygamy under special circumstances. Islam allows (though it certainly does not enjoin) a man to have more than one wife up to four at a time. As the permission concerning polygamy has been given in connection with the subject of orphans, it should be taken to be primarily based on the question of the care of that much-neglected class of society. There are cases when the interests of orphans can best be protected by marrying one or more wives from among the female wards or from other women as the exigencies of circumstances may require. This can generally happen in one of the following cases:
(1) A man has a number of orphans, including girls, to look after. He is unmarried and there is danger of his falling into temptation. In this case he should marry one or more girls, as the case may be, from among his wards and thus protect himself from falling into sin or from betraying his trust and acting wrongfully towards his wards.
(2) He is married, but his wife fails to treat the orphans properly. He may in such a case also marry one of his female wards so that they may have a good and separate home of their own.
(3) Some of his younger relations, e.g., brothers or sisters, become orphans, and he finds that he or his existing wife cannot properly look after them. In such an eventuality, he may marry a suitable woman of mature age who may treat them like a mother. It is on record that in similar circumstances Jabir, a young man and one of the Holy Prophet’s distinguished Companions, married a widow of mature age and when the Prophet asked him why he had not married a young girl, Jabir replied that he had done so that his wife might look after his brothers and sisters who were left orphans by the death of his father. The Holy Prophet was much pleased at this act of Jabir and prayed for him (Bukhari, ch. on Buyu‘).
(4) If a person is afraid that the orphans under his care being strangers to him, he may not treat them as kindly as he should do, he may establish direct relationship with them by marrying one of the female wards.
(5) If a person has a large number of orphans under his care and he finds that he cannot do full justice to them without marrying more wives than one, he is permitted to do so to the limit of four.
The words, two or three or four, signify that the last number marks the utmost limit. It is related that after this verse was revealed, the Holy Prophet asked those of his Companions who had more than four wives to keep any four of them they liked and divorce the rest, so that the number might not exceed four (Tirmidhi, ch. on Nikah).
A general note on polygamy is appropriate here. Though the verse mentions polygamy in connection with the subject of orphans, yet other situations may also arise in which polygamy may become a necessary remedy for many social or moral evils.
If only the objects of marriage be considered, the permission of the Quran to its followers to wed more wives than one, appears to be not only justifiable but in some cases desirable and even necessary; nay, in such cases it may become positively injurious to the best interests of individuals and of the community not to take advantage of this permission. According to the Quran, the objects of marriage are four, i.e. (1) protection against physical, moral and spiritual maladies; (2) peace of mind and the availability of a loving companion; (3) procreation of children; and (4) widening of the circle of relationship.
With respect to the first-mentioned object, the Quran says: "And allowed to you are those beyond that, (i.e. the cases mentioned in the earlier verses) that you seek them by means of your property—marrying them properly (and guarding yourselves against animal passions) and not committing fornication (and not indulging in unrestricted gratification) (4:25). The word محصنین occurring in the verse quoted above is derived from احصان which means, to seek protection from the attacks of an enemy by entering into a fort. Thus Islam regards marriage as a sort of fort, or a means of protection against moral and spiritual diseases. With respect to this object the Quran further says: They (your wives) are a garment for you and you are a garment for them (2:188). Now, the dress of a person serves a threefold purpose: (1) It protects him against the inclemency of weather; (2) it serves as an embellishment and adornment; and (3) it covers one’s private parts and any defects that may be in one’s physical formation. With respect to the second object the Quran says: And of His Signs is this, that He has created wives for you from among yourselves that you may find peace of mind in them and He has engendered love and tenderness between you (30:22). About the third object it says: Your wives are a tilth for you so approach your tilth when and how you like (2:224).
Now every one can easily conceive that one or all of the above-mentioned four objects of marriage, i.e. (1) protection against physical, moral and spiritual diseases; (2) procreation and propagation of the human race: (3) company of a life-long and loving companion and (4) widening of the circle of relationship are, sometimes, not realized in the case of one wife only. It is a hard fact which cannot be denied that there are persons whose sexual instinct is too strong to be satisfied with one wife. This is a physical necessity inherent in man and it is playing with fire to make light of this, the most powerful of all physical instincts. The only sane and proper course open to a man whose sexual powers are abnormally strong is to marry another, if one wife does not satisfy him. Such cases may be rare, but you cannot ignore their existence altogether. And a perfect religious system, as Islam claims to be, has to provide for the physical and spiritual requirements of all sorts of people. Again, if the wife of a person becomes a permanent invalid or suffers from a contagious disease, the object of marriage is certainly defeated if such a person does not marry another wife. Indeed, no course is left to him but either to contract another lawful marriage or, failing successfully to combat the attacks of his passions, to lead a dissolute life. And an ailing wife cannot make a good companion either, because, however worthy of regard and com- passion she may be, her company cannot give peace of mind to her husband in all respects. In the third instance, if the wife of a person happens to be barren, the natural and perfectly legitimate desire of the husband to have an issue to succeed him and perpetuate his name remains unfulfilled in the absence of a polygamous marriage. It is to meet the requirements of all such persons that Islam has allowed the contraction of plural matrimonial relations. If, however, in any of these cases a husband divorces his first wife, it would be a shame and disgrace for him. For instance, in the case of an invalid wife it would mean that he lived with her as long as she was whole and deserted her at a time when she most needed his protection. The only honourable course in such a case would be to look after the diseased wife tenderly and marry another woman who may fulfil the functions of a wife.
It will thus be seen that the objects of a polygamous marriage are, to a certain extent, the same as those of a monogamous marriage. When one or all of those objects are not realized by a monogamous marriage, a polygamous marriage becomes a necessity and is allowed. There are, however, other reasons which may also render it necessary for a person to have one or more wives in addition to the one whom he dearly loves and who also fulfils the objects of marriage. Those reasons are: (a) to protect orphans; (b) to provide husbands for marriageable widows and (c) to supplement the decreasing manhood of a family or community.
It is manifestly clear from the verse under comment in which permission is given to marry more wives than one that polygamy is resorted to particularly with a view to taking under one’s protection orphans left unprotected. The verse clearly states: If you fear that you will not be fair in dealing with orphans (under your protection), then marry of women as may be agreeable to you, two or three or four; and if you fear you will not deal justly (between your wives) then marry only one. The words hint that the mother of such orphans as are left in the guardianship of a person should preferably be married by him so that he should become directly related to, and more intimately connected with, them and thus become more interested in their welfare than he otherwise could be.
Again, the Quran says: And marry widows from among you (24:33). To provide husbands for widows is thus another object which the institution of polygamy fulfils. Muslims were perpetually engaged in fighting in the time of the Holy Prophet. Many fell in wars and left behind widows and orphans without near relations to look after them. The preponderance of women over men and an exceptionally large number of orphans with no one to look after them, which is the inevitable result of war, necessitated that to save the Muslim society from moral degeneration, polygamous marriages should be encouraged. The last World War also vindicated this useful institution of Islam. It left an abnormally large number of young women without husbands. Indeed, the great preponderance of females over males in the west, due to the appalling loss of manhood caused by the War, is responsible for the present awful laxity of morals which is eating into the vitals of western society. Young girls fail to get suitable husbands. But natural passions must be satisfied. The result is dissolution and depravity. In view of the moral depravity prevailing in many countries, who has the hardihood to deny the wisdom of the Islamic institution of polygamy? Many indescribable moral and physical evils have arisen in the west as the result of this preponderance of women over men, the only proper remedy for which is polygamy.
The institution of polygamy is also intended to meet the serious situation that follows in the wake of a war, when, besides other aspects of decline, the manhood of a nation becomes so depleted as to threaten national destruction. The fall of birth-rate, which is a potent cause of the decay of a people and from which some Western countries are badly suffering, can be effectively remedied only by resorting to polygamy. The West will never recover from the terrible moral and social diseases from which it is suffering as well as from the appalling numerical decline facing certain countries and communities unless, setting aside all false notions and false sentiments, it submits to the Islamic injunctions about polygamy. It is a sacrifice demanded of men and women alike—a sacrifice in which personal and passing sentiments are required to be partly ignored for the wider and permanent interests of whole communities and countries.
b
4:130.
560
The verse is important inasmuch as it permits polygamy under certain circumstances. Islam allows (though it certainly does not enjoin or encourage) a man to have more than one wife up to four at a time. As this permission has been given in connection with the subject of orphans, it should be taken primarily to be based on the question of the care of that much-neglected class of society. There are cases when the interests of orphans can only be protected by marrying one or more wives from among the female wards or from other women as the exigencies of circumstances may require. Though the verse mentions polygamy in connection with the subject of orphans, yet other situations may arise when it may become a necessary remedy for some social or moral evils. If only the objects of marriage itself are considered, the permission appears to be not only justifiable but in some cases desirable and even necessary; nay, in such cases it may become positively injurious to the best interests of individuals and of the com
561
The expression, Ma Malakat Aimanukum, generally signifies, women prisoners of war who are not ransomed and who are in the custody and control of their Muslim captors because they had taken part in a war which was waged to destroy Islam and thus had legitimately deprived themselves of their freedom. The term has been used in the Qur’an in preference to ‘Ibad and Ima’ (slaves and bondwomen) to point to a just and rightful possession, the expression Milku Yamin signifying full and rightful possession (Lisan). It includes both slaves and bondwomen, and it is only the context which determines what the expression signifies in a particular place. Much misunderstanding prevails as to what the expression "their right hands possess" signifies, and what are the rights and status of the persons to whom it applies. Islam has condemned slavery in unequivocal terms. According to it, it is a mortal sin to deprive a person of his or her liberty, unless, of course, he or she renders himself
562
Ta‘ulu (do injustice) is derived from ‘Ala which means; (1) he had a large family; (2) he supported the family; (3) he was or became poor; (4) he acted wrongfully; or deviated from the right course (Lane).
وَاٰتُوا النِّسَآءَ صَدُقٰتِہِنَّ نِحۡلَۃً ۚ فَاِنۡ طِبۡنَ لَکُمۡ عَنۡ شَیۡءٍ مِّنۡہُ نَفۡسًا فَکُلُوۡہُ ہَنِیۡٓـًٔا مَّرِیۡٓـًٔا
4:25-26; 60:11.
4:25-26; 60:11.
Saduqat is the plural of Saduqah which means, dowry or a gift which is given to or for a bride (Lane).
The verse may be taken to be addressed to both the husband and the relations of the wife. In the latter case, it would mean that the relations of a woman should not spend her dowry to meet their own needs, but should faithfully hand it over to her. Primarily, however, the verse is addressed to the husband whom it requires to pay the agreed dowry to his wife willingly, cheerfully and without demur. The words "giving the dowry willingly and cheerfully" also imply that the amount of the dowry should be well within the means of the husband so that its payment may not be a burden to him. He should be in a position to pay it willingly and cheerfully.
4:25, 26; 60:11.
Important Words:
صدقات (dowries) which is the plural of صدقة (saduqah) and not صدقة (sadaqah), as might be wrongly supposed, is derived from صدق. They say صدق فی الحدیث i.e. he was true in his speech, or he spoke the truth, or he spoke truthfully. صدق فی القتال means, he fought well: he gave a good account of himself in the fight; he was true to his duty in the fight. صدق فی الوعدmeans, he was truthful in his promise. The expression صدقه النصیحة والاخاء means, he was sincere to him in his advice and brotherly affection. See also 2:32. صدقة (sadaqah) of which the plural is صدقات (sadaqat) means, anything given to win the pleasure of God and a good reward from Him; alms and charity; Zakah, i.e. the prescribed tax of Islam for helping the poor, etc. صدقة (saduqah) of which the plural is صدقات (saduqat) as in the present verse, means, dowry or nuptial gift a gift that is given to or for a bride (Lane & Aqrab). Another word for it is صداق (or مھر) which Islam prescribes for every marriage tie, making it binding on the husband to pay to his wife. It is so called because it is a symbol of truthfulness and sincerity on the part of the husband.
نحلة (willingly) is derived from نحل. The expression نحل المراة means, he gave his wife her مھر or dowry. They say نحل فلانا i.e. he gave such a one willingly and cheerfully without expecting a return. نحلة means, giving a thing willingly and cheerfully without expecting a return; payment of the dowry to a wife; a free gift. نحلة is distinguishable from ھبة (a free gift) in that everyھبة is نحلة but every نحلة is not ھبة (Aqrab & Mufradat).
Commentary:
The verse may be taken to be addressed to both the husband and the relations of the wife. In the latter case, it would mean that the relations of a woman should not spend her dowry received from the husband to meet their own needs, but should faithfully hand it over to her. Some persons receive the dowry of their female wards from their husbands and then, instead of giving it to them, keep it for themselves. Primarily, however, the verse is addressed to the husband whom it requires to pay the agreed dowry to his wife willingly, cheerfully and without demur. Some people fix dowries for their wives and then hesitate or even refuse to pay them, expecting them and even urging them to forego the right. The verse condemns this evil practice.
The word نحلة (paying the dowry willingly and cheerfully) also points to the amount of the dowry being reasonable it should be well within the means of the husband so that its payment may not be a painful burden to him. He should be in a position to pay it willingly and cheerfully.
The clause, if they, of their own pleasure, remit to you a part thereof, applies to those wives who voluntarily and willingly give up or pay back anything out of the agreed dowry. It does not apply to a case in which the wife is asked or made to relinquish the whole or part of the dowry before it has been actually paid to her. According to ‘Umar, a woman might claim back her dowry even after she has given it up, if she has done so under any vestige of pressure.
The words, then enjoy it as something pleasant and wholesome, imply a compliment to such husbands as evoke a willing and voluntary response from their wives owing to their kind and loving treatment of them. In such cases the wives are so pleased with their husbands that they offer to them a part of their dowry out of their own free will, as a token of the true love that exists between them.
a
4:25-26; 60:11.
a
4:25, 26; 60:11.
487
Important Words:
صدقات (dowries) which is the plural of صدقة (saduqah) and not صدقة (sadaqah), as might be wrongly supposed, is derived from صدق. They say صدق فی الحدیث i.e. he was true in his speech, or he spoke the truth, or he spoke truthfully. صدق فی القتال means, he fought well: he gave a good account of himself in the fight; he was true to his duty in the fight. صدق فی الوعدmeans, he was truthful in his promise. The expression صدقه النصیحة والاخاء means, he was sincere to him in his advice and brotherly affection. See also 2:32. صدقة (sadaqah) of which the plural is صدقات (sadaqat) means, anything given to win the pleasure of God and a good reward from Him; alms and charity; Zakah, i.e. the prescribed tax of Islam for helping the poor, etc. صدقة (saduqah) of which the plural is صدقات (saduqat) as in the present verse, means, dowry or nuptial gift a gift that is given to or for a bride (Lane & Aqrab). Another word for it is صداق (or مھر) which Islam prescribes for every marriage tie, making it binding on the husband to pay to his wife. It is so called because it is a symbol of truthfulness and sincerity on the part of the husband.
نحلة (willingly) is derived from نحل. The expression نحل المراة means, he gave his wife her مھر or dowry. They say نحل فلانا i.e. he gave such a one willingly and cheerfully without expecting a return. نحلة means, giving a thing willingly and cheerfully without expecting a return; payment of the dowry to a wife; a free gift. نحلة is distinguishable from ھبة (a free gift) in that everyھبة is نحلة but every نحلة is not ھبة (Aqrab & Mufradat).
Commentary:
The verse may be taken to be addressed to both the husband and the relations of the wife. In the latter case, it would mean that the relations of a woman should not spend her dowry received from the husband to meet their own needs, but should faithfully hand it over to her. Some persons receive the dowry of their female wards from their husbands and then, instead of giving it to them, keep it for themselves. Primarily, however, the verse is addressed to the husband whom it requires to pay the agreed dowry to his wife willingly, cheerfully and without demur. Some people fix dowries for their wives and then hesitate or even refuse to pay them, expecting them and even urging them to forego the right. The verse condemns this evil practice.
The word نحلة (paying the dowry willingly and cheerfully) also points to the amount of the dowry being reasonable it should be well within the means of the husband so that its payment may not be a painful burden to him. He should be in a position to pay it willingly and cheerfully.
The clause, if they, of their own pleasure, remit to you a part thereof, applies to those wives who voluntarily and willingly give up or pay back anything out of the agreed dowry. It does not apply to a case in which the wife is asked or made to relinquish the whole or part of the dowry before it has been actually paid to her. According to ‘Umar, a woman might claim back her dowry even after she has given it up, if she has done so under any vestige of pressure.
The words, then enjoy it as something pleasant and wholesome, imply a compliment to such husbands as evoke a willing and voluntary response from their wives owing to their kind and loving treatment of them. In such cases the wives are so pleased with their husbands that they offer to them a part of their dowry out of their own free will, as a token of the true love that exists between them.
a
4:25-26; 60:11.
563
Saduqat is the plural of Saduqah which means, dowry or a gift which is given to or for a bride (Lane).
564
The verse may be taken to be addressed to both the husband and the relations of the wife. In the latter case, it would mean that the relations of a woman should not spend her dowry to meet their own needs, but should faithfully hand it over to her. Primarily, however, the verse is addressed to the husband whom it requires to pay the agreed dowry to his wife willingly, cheerfully and without demur. The words "giving the dowry willingly and cheerfully" also imply that the amount of the dowry should be well within the means of the husband so that its payment may not be a burden to him. He should be in a position to pay it willingly and cheerfully.
یُوۡصِیۡکُمُ اللّٰہُ فِیۡۤ اَوۡلٰدِکُمۡ ۖ لِلذَّکَرِ مِثۡلُ حَظِّ الۡاُنۡثَیَیۡنِ ۚ فَاِنۡ کُنَّ نِسَآءً فَوۡقَ اثۡنَتَیۡنِ فَلَہُنَّ ثُلُثَا مَا تَرَکَ ۖ وَاِنۡ کَانَتۡ وٰحِدَۃً فَلَہَا النِّصۡفُ ۚ وَلِاَبَوَیۡہِ لِکُلِّ وٰحِدٍ مِّنۡہُمَا السُّدُسُ مِمَّا تَرَکَ اِنۡ کَانَ لَہٗ وَلَدٌ ۚ فَاِنۡ لَّمۡ یَکُنۡ لَّہٗ وَلَدٌ وَّوَرِثَہٗۤ اَبَوَاہُ فَلِاُمِّہِ الثُّلُثُ ۚ فَاِنۡ کَانَ لَہٗۤ اِخۡوَۃٌ فَلِاُمِّہِ السُّدُسُ ۚ مِنۡۢ بَعۡدِ وَصِیَّۃٍ یُّوۡصِیۡ بِہَاۤ اَوۡ دَیۡنٍ ۗ اٰبَآؤُکُمۡ وَاَبۡنَآؤُکُمۡ لَا تَدۡرُوۡنَ اَیُّہُمۡ اَقۡرَبُ لَکُمۡ نَفۡعًا ۚ فَرِیۡضَۃً مِّنَ اللّٰہِ ۗ اِنَّ اللّٰہَ کَانَ عَلِیۡمًا حَکِیۡمًا
4:177.
这节经文规定一个死者的近亲不论男女或出生的先后应得他遗产的份额。儿女、双亲、丈夫与妻子是主要继承人, 如果他们活着, 不论在什么情况下应得自己的一份, 其他有名份的亲戚只能在特殊情况下得到他们的一份。男的比女的应得的份额要多一倍, 因为他们负责维持家计 (مَعَانِی, Ma‘ani, ii.P.32)。这节经文开始时制定关于子女所得份额的比例的一般法则。一个儿子应得等于两个女儿的份额。因此, 凡是儿子和女儿都有的情况下, 就按这一法则办事。如果只有女儿而没有儿子, 经文规定把遗产的三分之二分给两个以上的女儿; 把二分之一给独生女。如果是两个女儿那应该分得多少, 经文没明确说明。但此句中用一个连接词 ف (fa, 但是), “但是如果有两个以上的女儿”, 这清楚地指出两个女儿已包括在前面 “两个女儿” 这几个字中。而且两个女人应得的份数可以在这节经文开始时所说的男女应得份数的比例中推想出来。按照那个比例, 一个儿子可得两个女儿的份数。因此, 如果有一个儿子和一个女儿, 那个儿子可得三分之二的遗产。可是, 由于一个儿子可得等于 “两个女儿” 的份额, 因此没有儿子而有两个女儿的情况下可得三分之二, 即等于经文明确说明给三个女儿相同的份额。因此, 这节经文的结构表明, 如果死者有两个女儿而没有儿子, 她们像有三个女儿的情况那样也可得三分之二的遗产。假如 «古兰经» 的这一句并不指两个女儿应得的份额, 那么, 这句用字就应该像这样, “一个男人应得一个女人两倍的份额”, 而不是像现在那样的句子。关于双亲的份额经文中谈了三种情况: (1) 如果一个人死了留下一个或几个儿女, 那么, 父母亲中每个人应得六分之一。(2) 如果一个人死后无儿女, 他的父母是惟一继承人 (死者没有妻子或丈夫), 那么, 母亲应得三分之一的财产, 其馀的三分之二归父亲所有。(3) 还有第三种情况, 实际上是第二种情况的例外。一个人死后无嗣, 他的父母亲是惟一的继承人, 但他有兄弟姐妹, 那么, 虽然他的兄弟姐妹不能继承他的财产, 但他们的存在会影响他父母亲的份额, 因为, 在这种情况下, 母亲将得六分之一 (不是像第二种情况那样得三份之一), 其余的六分之五归父亲所有。父亲在这种情况下被授予较大的份额的理由是, 父亲还要负担死者兄弟姐妹的生活。关于继承权的这一论题, 在随后的经文中继续谈下去。
4:177.
Father and mother both (Lane).
Walad means, (1) a child, son, daughter or a young one; (2) children, sons, daughters, offspring or young ones. The word is used both as singular and plural, feminine and masculine (Lane).
The verse prescribes suitable shares for all near relatives in the property of a deceased person without distinction of sex or order of birth. Children, parents, husbands and wives are the principal heirs who, if alive, get suitable shares in all circumstances, other relations having a title only in special cases. A male has been given double the share of a female because he has been made responsible for the maintenance of his family (Ma‘ani, ii. p.32). The verse begins by laying down a general rule as to the proportion of shares between sons and daughters. A son is to have as much as two daughters. So, wherever there are both sons and daughters, this rule will come in force. When, however, there are only daughters and no son, the verse allots two- thirds of the legacy to the daughters, if there are more than two of them; and one-half if there is only one. The share of daughters in case there are two is not expressly stated. But the use of the conjunction fa’ (but) in the clause, but if there be
4:177.
Important Words:
ابویه (his parents) is really ابوینه, the letter ن being dropped owing to اضافة. The word ابوین is the genitive of ابوان which is the dual form of اب which is originally ابو meaning, father or grandfather or any male ancestor or paternal uncle. ابوانliterally meaning "two fathers" signifies "father and mother" (Lane).
ولد (child) is very general in its significance meaning: (1) a child, son, daughter or a young one; (2) children, sons, daughters, offspring or young ones. Thus the word is used both as singular and plural, feminine and masculine (Lane).
Commentary:
This and the succeeding verse combined with the last verse of the Surah give the Islamic law of inheritance in a nutshell.
Islam prescribes suitable shares for all near relatives in the property of a deceased person without distinction of sex or order of birth. Children, parents, husbands and wives are the principal heirs who, if alive, get suitable shares in all circumstances, other relations having a title only in special cases. A male has been given double the share of a female because he has been made responsible for the maintenance of the family (Ma‘ani, vol. ii, p. 32).
The Islamic law of inheritance is perfect and it safeguards against all evils that result from laws prescribed by, or in vogue in, other faiths and communities. It aims at a fair distribution of wealth and equal chances of progress for all. To give the property of a deceased parent to the firstborn son only or to exclude the female members from inheritance or to disinherit parents in the presence of children has proved a veritable curse for society in many ways—moral, social and economic. The Islamic law of inheritance, reinforced by the system of Zakah (prescribed alms) and by the injunction prohibiting the giving and taking of interest, provides a golden mean between capitalism and communism—the two evil extremes of the present-day economic system.
The verse begins by laying down a general rule as to the proportion of shares between sons and daughters. A son is to have as much as two daughters. So wherever there are both sons and daughters, this rule will come in force. When, however, there are only daughters and no son, the verse allots two-thirds of the legacy to the daughters if there are more than two of them, and one-half if there is only one. The share of daughters, in case there are two, is not expressly stated. But the use of the conjunction فا (but) in the clause, but if there be females only, numbering more than two, clearly points to the fact that the share of two females has been referred to in the preceding words "two females". Moreover, the share of two females can be gathered from what has already been said in the beginning of the verse about the ratio between the shares of the males and the females. According to that ratio, a son is to get as much as two daughters. Thus, if there be one son and one daughter, the son will have two-thirds. But as the share of one son has been made equal to that of "two daughters", the latter, in case there is no son, will have two-thirds, viz., the same share as has been expressly fixed for three daughters. Thus, the very construction of the verse shows that if there be two daughters and no son, they too, as in the case of three daughters, will get two-thirds. If it had not been the object of the Quran to point to the share of two daughters in the clause, it would have been something like this, "a male shall have twice as much as a female", and not as it is now.
The above meaning is corroborated by a saying of the Holy Prophet himself. It is related that when a Companion of the Holy Prophet named Sa‘d bin Rabi‘ah died in the Battle of Uhud, leaving two daughters and one widow, his brother took away the whole property, leaving nothing for the two daughters. Thereupon the widow of Sa‘d went to the Holy Prophet and said, "Here are the two daughters of Sa‘d. Their uncle has taken the whole of his property and has left nothing for them." The Holy Prophet told her to wait till God should decide the matter. Then this verse was revealed and the Prophet called upon Sa‘d’s brother to give two-thirds of Sa‘d’s property to his two daughters and one-eighth to their mother and keep the rest for himself (Tirmidhi & Dawud).
The verse speaks of three cases as regards the share of the parents: (1) If a person dies leaving one or more children, then each of his parents shall have one-sixth; (2) If a person dies issueless and his parents are the sole heirs (there being no wife or husband of the deceased person), then the mother will have one-third of the property and the remaining two-thirds will go to the father; (3) There is a third case, which is really an exception to the second case. A man dies without issue and his parents are his sole heirs, but he has brothers or sisters. Then, although his brother or sisters will not inherit from him, yet their presence will affect the share of the parents, for, in this case, the mother will have one-sixth (instead of one-third, as in the second case) and the remaining five-sixths will go to the father. The reason why the father is awarded a larger share in this case is that the father has also to support the brothers or sisters of the deceased. The subject of inheritance is continued in the succeeding verse.
b
4:177.
314
这节经文规定一个死者的近亲不论男女或出生的先后应得他遗产的份额。儿女、双亲、丈夫与妻子是主要继承人, 如果他们活着, 不论在什么情况下应得自己的一份, 其他有名份的亲戚只能在特殊情况下得到他们的一份。男的比女的应得的份额要多一倍, 因为他们负责维持家计 (مَعَانِی, Ma‘ani, ii.P.32)。这节经文开始时制定关于子女所得份额的比例的一般法则。一个儿子应得等于两个女儿的份额。因此, 凡是儿子和女儿都有的情况下, 就按这一法则办事。如果只有女儿而没有儿子, 经文规定把遗产的三分之二分给两个以上的女儿; 把二分之一给独生女。如果是两个女儿那应该分得多少, 经文没明确说明。但此句中用一个连接词 ف (fa, 但是), “但是如果有两个以上的女儿”, 这清楚地指出两个女儿已包括在前面 “两个女儿” 这几个字中。而且两个女人应得的份数可以在这节经文开始时所说的男女应得份数的比例中推想出来。按照那个比例, 一个儿子可得两个女儿的份数。因此, 如果有一个儿子和一个女儿, 那个儿子可得三分之二的遗产。可是, 由于一个儿子可得等于 “两个女儿” 的份额, 因此没有儿子而有两个女儿的情况下可得三分之二, 即等于经文明确说明给三个女儿相同的份额。因此, 这节经文的结构表明, 如果死者有两个女儿而没有儿子, 她们像有三个女儿的情况那样也可得三分之二的遗产。假如 «古兰经» 的这一句并不指两个女儿应得的份额, 那么, 这句用字就应该像这样, “一个男人应得一个女人两倍的份额”, 而不是像现在那样的句子。关于双亲的份额经文中谈了三种情况: (1) 如果一个人死了留下一个或几个儿女, 那么, 父母亲中每个人应得六分之一。(2) 如果一个人死后无儿女, 他的父母是惟一继承人 (死者没有妻子或丈夫), 那么, 母亲应得三分之一的财产, 其馀的三分之二归父亲所有。(3) 还有第三种情况, 实际上是第二种情况的例外。一个人死后无嗣, 他的父母亲是惟一的继承人, 但他有兄弟姐妹, 那么, 虽然他的兄弟姐妹不能继承他的财产, 但他们的存在会影响他父母亲的份额, 因为, 在这种情况下, 母亲将得六分之一 (不是像第二种情况那样得三份之一), 其余的六分之五归父亲所有。父亲在这种情况下被授予较大的份额的理由是, 父亲还要负担死者兄弟姐妹的生活。关于继承权的这一论题, 在随后的经文中继续谈下去。
b
4:177.
494
Important Words:
ابویه (his parents) is really ابوینه, the letter ن being dropped owing to اضافة. The word ابوین is the genitive of ابوان which is the dual form of اب which is originally ابو meaning, father or grandfather or any male ancestor or paternal uncle. ابوانliterally meaning "two fathers" signifies "father and mother" (Lane).
ولد (child) is very general in its significance meaning: (1) a child, son, daughter or a young one; (2) children, sons, daughters, offspring or young ones. Thus the word is used both as singular and plural, feminine and masculine (Lane).
Commentary:
This and the succeeding verse combined with the last verse of the Surah give the Islamic law of inheritance in a nutshell.
Islam prescribes suitable shares for all near relatives in the property of a deceased person without distinction of sex or order of birth. Children, parents, husbands and wives are the principal heirs who, if alive, get suitable shares in all circumstances, other relations having a title only in special cases. A male has been given double the share of a female because he has been made responsible for the maintenance of the family (Ma‘ani, vol. ii, p. 32).
The Islamic law of inheritance is perfect and it safeguards against all evils that result from laws prescribed by, or in vogue in, other faiths and communities. It aims at a fair distribution of wealth and equal chances of progress for all. To give the property of a deceased parent to the firstborn son only or to exclude the female members from inheritance or to disinherit parents in the presence of children has proved a veritable curse for society in many ways—moral, social and economic. The Islamic law of inheritance, reinforced by the system of Zakah (prescribed alms) and by the injunction prohibiting the giving and taking of interest, provides a golden mean between capitalism and communism—the two evil extremes of the present-day economic system.
The verse begins by laying down a general rule as to the proportion of shares between sons and daughters. A son is to have as much as two daughters. So wherever there are both sons and daughters, this rule will come in force. When, however, there are only daughters and no son, the verse allots two-thirds of the legacy to the daughters if there are more than two of them, and one-half if there is only one. The share of daughters, in case there are two, is not expressly stated. But the use of the conjunction فا (but) in the clause, but if there be females only, numbering more than two, clearly points to the fact that the share of two females has been referred to in the preceding words "two females". Moreover, the share of two females can be gathered from what has already been said in the beginning of the verse about the ratio between the shares of the males and the females. According to that ratio, a son is to get as much as two daughters. Thus, if there be one son and one daughter, the son will have two-thirds. But as the share of one son has been made equal to that of "two daughters", the latter, in case there is no son, will have two-thirds, viz., the same share as has been expressly fixed for three daughters. Thus, the very construction of the verse shows that if there be two daughters and no son, they too, as in the case of three daughters, will get two-thirds. If it had not been the object of the Quran to point to the share of two daughters in the clause, it would have been something like this, "a male shall have twice as much as a female", and not as it is now.
The above meaning is corroborated by a saying of the Holy Prophet himself. It is related that when a Companion of the Holy Prophet named Sa‘d bin Rabi‘ah died in the Battle of Uhud, leaving two daughters and one widow, his brother took away the whole property, leaving nothing for the two daughters. Thereupon the widow of Sa‘d went to the Holy Prophet and said, "Here are the two daughters of Sa‘d. Their uncle has taken the whole of his property and has left nothing for them." The Holy Prophet told her to wait till God should decide the matter. Then this verse was revealed and the Prophet called upon Sa‘d’s brother to give two-thirds of Sa‘d’s property to his two daughters and one-eighth to their mother and keep the rest for himself (Tirmidhi & Dawud).
The verse speaks of three cases as regards the share of the parents: (1) If a person dies leaving one or more children, then each of his parents shall have one-sixth; (2) If a person dies issueless and his parents are the sole heirs (there being no wife or husband of the deceased person), then the mother will have one-third of the property and the remaining two-thirds will go to the father; (3) There is a third case, which is really an exception to the second case. A man dies without issue and his parents are his sole heirs, but he has brothers or sisters. Then, although his brother or sisters will not inherit from him, yet their presence will affect the share of the parents, for, in this case, the mother will have one-sixth (instead of one-third, as in the second case) and the remaining five-sixths will go to the father. The reason why the father is awarded a larger share in this case is that the father has also to support the brothers or sisters of the deceased. The subject of inheritance is continued in the succeeding verse.
b
4:177.
573
Father and mother both (Lane).
574
Walad means, (1) a child, son, daughter or a young one; (2) children, sons, daughters, offspring or young ones. The word is used both as singular and plural, feminine and masculine (Lane).
574A
The verse prescribes suitable shares for all near relatives in the property of a deceased person without distinction of sex or order of birth. Children, parents, husbands and wives are the principal heirs who, if alive, get suitable shares in all circumstances, other relations having a title only in special cases. A male has been given double the share of a female because he has been made responsible for the maintenance of his family (Ma‘ani, ii. p.32). The verse begins by laying down a general rule as to the proportion of shares between sons and daughters. A son is to have as much as two daughters. So, wherever there are both sons and daughters, this rule will come in force. When, however, there are only daughters and no son, the verse allots two- thirds of the legacy to the daughters, if there are more than two of them; and one-half if there is only one. The share of daughters in case there are two is not expressly stated. But the use of the conjunction fa’ (but) in the clause, but if there be
۞ وَلَکُمۡ نِصۡفُ مَا تَرَکَ اَزۡوٰجُکُمۡ اِنۡ لَّمۡ یَکُنۡ لَّہُنَّ وَلَدٌ ۚ فَاِنۡ کَانَ لَہُنَّ وَلَدٌ فَلَکُمُ الرُّبُعُ مِمَّا تَرَکۡنَ ۚ مِنۡۢ بَعۡدِ وَصِیَّۃٍ یُّوۡصِیۡنَ بِہَاۤ اَوۡ دَیۡنٍ ۚ وَلَہُنَّ الرُّبُعُ مِمَّا تَرَکۡتُمۡ اِنۡ لَّمۡ یَکُنۡ لَّکُمۡ وَلَدٌ ۚ فَاِنۡ کَانَ لَکُمۡ وَلَدٌ فَلَہُنَّ الثُّمُنُ مِمَّا تَرَکۡتُمۡ ۚ مِّنۡۢ بَعۡدِ وَصِیَّۃٍ تُوۡصُوۡنَ بِہَاۤ اَوۡ دَیۡنٍ ۗ وَاِنۡ کَانَ رَجُلٌ یُّوۡرَثُ کَلٰلَۃً اَوِ امۡرَاَۃٌ وَّلَہٗۤ اَخٌ اَوۡ اُخۡتٌ فَلِکُلِّ وٰحِدٍ مِّنۡہُمَا السُّدُسُ ۚ فَاِنۡ کَانُوۡۤا اَکۡثَرَ مِنۡ ذٰلِکَ فَہُمۡ شُرَکَآءُ فِی الثُّلُثِ ۚ مِنۡۢ بَعۡدِ وَصِیَّۃٍ یُّوۡصٰی بِہَاۤ اَوۡ دَیۡنٍ غَیۡرَ مُضَآرٍّ ۚ وَصِیَّۃً مِّنَ اللّٰہِ ۗ وَاللّٰہُ عَلِیۡمٌ حَلِیۡمٌ
4:177.
كَلَالَةْ (Kalalah) 是 (1) 一个身后没有父母, 也没有子女的人; (2) 一个既没有父亲, 也没有儿子的人。根据伊本•阿巴斯的解释, 他是一个没有儿子的人, 不管他的父亲是否活着。因此这里是该词的第三个词义 (Lane & مُفْرَدَات, Mufradat) Kalalah 的兄弟姐妹归三类: 第一类, 真正的兄弟姐妹--------同父母的子女 (这类兄弟姐妹从法律方面说称之为 اَعْيَانِی --------A‘yani); 第二类, 单属父亲一方的兄弟姐妹, 这类兄弟姐妹 (法律上称之为 عَلَّاتِی --------‘Allati); 第三类, 单属母亲一方的兄弟姐妹, 他 (她) 们的父亲与死者的父亲不是同一父亲 (这类兄弟姐妹法律上称之为 اَخْيَافِی --------Akhyafi)。在本节经文中所列举的指令正是属于上述最后一类;关于前两类兄弟姐妹的法律将在本章的最后一节经文中提到。分配给上述最后一类兄弟姐妹的份额比分配给前二类兄弟姐妹的份额要少, 理由是这一类兄弟姐妹单属母亲一方, 而另两类兄弟姐妹则属于与死者同一父亲的子女。在作为 كَلَالَةْ (Kalalah) 死去的人的财产中, 兄弟姐妹享有相等的分配份额, 在此情况下, 通常不按二比一之比例。
“不要立意损害任何人” 这句话很重要。意思是偿还债务不应由于分配遗产而受到损害。换句话说, 在分配遗产之前要先偿还债务。
کلالہ کے جن بہن بھائیوں کے وارث ہونے کی صورت بیان کی گئی ہے‘ وہ بہن بھائی ہیں جو ماں کی طرف سے ہوں۔
4:177.
Kalalah is (1) a person who leaves behind neither parent nor child, male or female; (2) a person who leaves behind neither father nor son. According to Ibn-e-‘Abbas he is a person who leaves no son irrespective of the fact whether his father is living or not. This would thus be the third meaning of the word (Lane & Mufradat). The brothers and sisters of a Kalalah fall under three heads: first, real brothers or sisters—offspring of the same parents (such brothers or sisters are technically known as A‘yani): secondly, brothers and sisters on the side of the father only (these are technically known as ‘Allati); thirdly, brothers and sisters on the side of the mother only, their father being not the same as that of the deceased (such brothers and sisters are technically called Akhyafi). It is to the last mentioned class that the commandment given in the present verse pertains; the law with regard to the first two classes of brothers and sisters having been given i
The words. "without intent to cause injury to any one" are important. They mean that the payment of debts should not suffer by the payment of bequests. In other words, debts are to be paid prior to the payment of bequests.
4:177.
Important Words:
کلالة (one who has neither parent nor child) is derived from کل i.e. he was or became fatigued, tired or wearied and could proceed no further; he was or became one having no child and no parent, the latter meaning being based on the former, as a person having no child or parent becomes, as it were, too fatigued for the racial march. کلالة is (1) a person who leaves behind neither father nor child, male or female; or (2) a person who leaves behind neither father nor son. According to Ibn ‘Abbas, کلالة is a person who leaves no son irrespective of the fact whether his father is living or not. This would thus be the third meaning of کلالة (Lane, Aqrab & Mufradat).
Commentary:
The first part of this verse determines the share of the husband and the wife in inheritance and needs no comment. The latter part deals with the case of a Kalalah, i.e. one who leaves neither parent nor child and whose property is inherited by his or her brother and sister. Now, if there is only one brother and one sister, each of them will get one-sixth. But if they are more than that, they will be sharers in one-third.
It should, however, be noted that in this respect brothers and sisters fall under three heads; firstly, real brothers or sisters, offspring of the same parents (such brothers or sisters are technically known as اعیانی a‘yani); secondly, brothers and sisters on the side of the father only (these are technically known as علاتی ‘allati); thirdly, brothers and sisters on the side of the mother only, their father being not the same as that of the deceased (such brothers and sisters being technically called اخیافی akhyafi). It is to the last-mentioned class that the commandment given in the present verse pertains; the law with regard to the first two classes of brothers and sisters being given in the last verse of this Surah.
The reader will further note that the shares allotted to the brothers and sisters of the last-mentioned class are smaller than those allotted to the brothers and sisters of the first two classes, the reason being that the brothers and sisters of this class are on the side of the mother only, while the brothers and the sisters of the other two classes are the children of the same father as the deceased.
It is also noteworthy that in the property of a person who dies as a Kalalah, as mentioned in the present verse, both brothers and sisters have equal shares, the usual ratio of two to one not being observed in their case.
The words, "without prejudice to the debt", are important. They mean that the payment of debts should not suffer by the payment of bequests. In other words, debts are to be paid prior to the payment of bequests. It was in compliance with this Quranic injunction that the Holy Prophet used to have the debts paid before the payment of bequests. The rights of other people must be safeguarded before any bequest made by the deceased is complied with. So strict was the Holy Prophet in these matters that he refused to perform the funeral service of the man whose debts were likely to remain unpaid.
It may incidentally be noted here that heirs are divided into two main groups:
1. ذووالفرائض (Dhawul-Fara’id), i.e. persons to whom Islam allots a fixed and definite share (1/2, 1/4, 1/8, 2/3, 1/3 or 1/6), or in the estate of a deceased person.
2. عصبات (‘Asabat), i.e. the heirs who receive the residue after the Dhawul-Fara’id have received their allotted shares.
It is, however, not necessary that a member of the first group should always remain a Dhul-Faridah. In certain cases, he may be both a Dhul-Faridah (sharer) and an ‘Asaba (residuary) and in other cases he may be simply an ‘Asaba.
The Dhawul-Fara’id (sharers) are 12 in number, four males and eight females. The males are: 1. father, 2. paternal grandfather, 3. husband and 4. half-brother on the maternal side. The females are: (1) daughter, (2) son’s daughter, (3) mother, (4) wife, (5) full sister, (6) half-sister on paternal side, (7) half-sister on maternal side, and (8) grandmother whether paternal or maternal.
The ‘Asabat (residuaries) are of four kinds: (1) ascendants of the deceased, i.e. father, paternal grandfather, etc. (2) descendants of the deceased, i.e. son, son’s son, etc. (3) descendants of the father of the deceased, i.e. full brother, brother’s son, etc. (4) descendants of the grandfather, i.e. full paternal uncle, paternal uncle’s son, etc.
a
4:177.
315
كَلَالَةْ (Kalalah) 是 (1) 一个身后没有父母, 也没有子女的人; (2) 一个既没有父亲, 也没有儿子的人。根据伊本•阿巴斯的解释, 他是一个没有儿子的人, 不管他的父亲是否活着。因此这里是该词的第三个词义 (Lane & مُفْرَدَات, Mufradat) Kalalah 的兄弟姐妹归三类: 第一类, 真正的兄弟姐妹--------同父母的子女 (这类兄弟姐妹从法律方面说称之为 اَعْيَانِی --------A‘yani); 第二类, 单属父亲一方的兄弟姐妹, 这类兄弟姐妹 (法律上称之为 عَلَّاتِی --------‘Allati); 第三类, 单属母亲一方的兄弟姐妹, 他 (她) 们的父亲与死者的父亲不是同一父亲 (这类兄弟姐妹法律上称之为 اَخْيَافِی --------Akhyafi)。在本节经文中所列举的指令正是属于上述最后一类;关于前两类兄弟姐妹的法律将在本章的最后一节经文中提到。分配给上述最后一类兄弟姐妹的份额比分配给前二类兄弟姐妹的份额要少, 理由是这一类兄弟姐妹单属母亲一方, 而另两类兄弟姐妹则属于与死者同一父亲的子女。在作为 كَلَالَةْ (Kalalah) 死去的人的财产中, 兄弟姐妹享有相等的分配份额, 在此情况下, 通常不按二比一之比例。
316
“不要立意损害任何人” 这句话很重要。意思是偿还债务不应由于分配遗产而受到损害。换句话说, 在分配遗产之前要先偿还债务。
1
کلالہ کے جن بہن بھائیوں کے وارث ہونے کی صورت بیان کی گئی ہے‘ وہ بہن بھائی ہیں جو ماں کی طرف سے ہوں۔
a
4:177.
495
Important Words:
کلالة (one who has neither parent nor child) is derived from کل i.e. he was or became fatigued, tired or wearied and could proceed no further; he was or became one having no child and no parent, the latter meaning being based on the former, as a person having no child or parent becomes, as it were, too fatigued for the racial march. کلالة is (1) a person who leaves behind neither father nor child, male or female; or (2) a person who leaves behind neither father nor son. According to Ibn ‘Abbas, کلالة is a person who leaves no son irrespective of the fact whether his father is living or not. This would thus be the third meaning of کلالة (Lane, Aqrab & Mufradat).
Commentary:
The first part of this verse determines the share of the husband and the wife in inheritance and needs no comment. The latter part deals with the case of a Kalalah, i.e. one who leaves neither parent nor child and whose property is inherited by his or her brother and sister. Now, if there is only one brother and one sister, each of them will get one-sixth. But if they are more than that, they will be sharers in one-third.
It should, however, be noted that in this respect brothers and sisters fall under three heads; firstly, real brothers or sisters, offspring of the same parents (such brothers or sisters are technically known as اعیانی a‘yani); secondly, brothers and sisters on the side of the father only (these are technically known as علاتی ‘allati); thirdly, brothers and sisters on the side of the mother only, their father being not the same as that of the deceased (such brothers and sisters being technically called اخیافی akhyafi). It is to the last-mentioned class that the commandment given in the present verse pertains; the law with regard to the first two classes of brothers and sisters being given in the last verse of this Surah.
The reader will further note that the shares allotted to the brothers and sisters of the last-mentioned class are smaller than those allotted to the brothers and sisters of the first two classes, the reason being that the brothers and sisters of this class are on the side of the mother only, while the brothers and the sisters of the other two classes are the children of the same father as the deceased.
It is also noteworthy that in the property of a person who dies as a Kalalah, as mentioned in the present verse, both brothers and sisters have equal shares, the usual ratio of two to one not being observed in their case.
The words, "without prejudice to the debt", are important. They mean that the payment of debts should not suffer by the payment of bequests. In other words, debts are to be paid prior to the payment of bequests. It was in compliance with this Quranic injunction that the Holy Prophet used to have the debts paid before the payment of bequests. The rights of other people must be safeguarded before any bequest made by the deceased is complied with. So strict was the Holy Prophet in these matters that he refused to perform the funeral service of the man whose debts were likely to remain unpaid.
It may incidentally be noted here that heirs are divided into two main groups:
1. ذووالفرائض (Dhawul-Fara’id), i.e. persons to whom Islam allots a fixed and definite share (1/2, 1/4, 1/8, 2/3, 1/3 or 1/6), or in the estate of a deceased person.
2. عصبات (‘Asabat), i.e. the heirs who receive the residue after the Dhawul-Fara’id have received their allotted shares.
It is, however, not necessary that a member of the first group should always remain a Dhul-Faridah. In certain cases, he may be both a Dhul-Faridah (sharer) and an ‘Asaba (residuary) and in other cases he may be simply an ‘Asaba.
The Dhawul-Fara’id (sharers) are 12 in number, four males and eight females. The males are: 1. father, 2. paternal grandfather, 3. husband and 4. half-brother on the maternal side. The females are: (1) daughter, (2) son’s daughter, (3) mother, (4) wife, (5) full sister, (6) half-sister on paternal side, (7) half-sister on maternal side, and (8) grandmother whether paternal or maternal.
The ‘Asabat (residuaries) are of four kinds: (1) ascendants of the deceased, i.e. father, paternal grandfather, etc. (2) descendants of the deceased, i.e. son, son’s son, etc. (3) descendants of the father of the deceased, i.e. full brother, brother’s son, etc. (4) descendants of the grandfather, i.e. full paternal uncle, paternal uncle’s son, etc.
a
4:177.
575
Kalalah is (1) a person who leaves behind neither parent nor child, male or female; (2) a person who leaves behind neither father nor son. According to Ibn-e-‘Abbas he is a person who leaves no son irrespective of the fact whether his father is living or not. This would thus be the third meaning of the word (Lane & Mufradat). The brothers and sisters of a Kalalah fall under three heads: first, real brothers or sisters—offspring of the same parents (such brothers or sisters are technically known as A‘yani): secondly, brothers and sisters on the side of the father only (these are technically known as ‘Allati); thirdly, brothers and sisters on the side of the mother only, their father being not the same as that of the deceased (such brothers and sisters are technically called Akhyafi). It is to the last mentioned class that the commandment given in the present verse pertains; the law with regard to the first two classes of brothers and sisters having been given i
575A
The words. "without intent to cause injury to any one" are important. They mean that the payment of debts should not suffer by the payment of bequests. In other words, debts are to be paid prior to the payment of bequests.
وَالّٰتِیۡ یَاۡتِیۡنَ الۡفٰحِشَۃَ مِنۡ نِّسَآئِکُمۡ فَاسۡتَشۡہِدُوۡا عَلَیۡہِنَّ اَرۡبَعَۃً مِّنۡکُمۡ ۖ فَاِنۡ شَہِدُوۡا فَاَمۡسِکُوۡہُنَّ فِی الۡبُیُوۡتِ حَتّٰی یَتَوَفّٰٮہُنَّ الۡمَوۡتُ اَوۡ یَجۡعَلَ اللّٰہُ لَہُنَّ سَبِیۡلًا
4:20, 26; 24:20.
在 «古兰经» (7:29; 33:31; 65:2 )中 فَاحِشَةْ (Fahishah) 未必意味着在 24:3中所规定要惩罚的私通或通奸。这一个词是指可能扰乱社会关系及导致破坏社会秩序显著的不正当行为。在本节经文中所指的妇女, 像在下节中所提到犯有类似罪恶而惩罚未确定的男人一样, 是那些除了私通或通奸以外, 犯有邪恶或不道德行为的妇女。这也是阿布•穆斯林 (اَبُوْ مُسْلِمْ, Abu Muslim) 和穆甲海德 (مُجَاهِدْ, Mujahid) 的见解。这类妇女应受禁和其他妇女在一起相处, 直到改过自新或结婚的时候, 结婚是安拉给她们的一条出路。由于所提到的这种罪过是严重的, 必须考虑四个见证, 以免该妇女受屈辱。
اس آیت اور اگلی آیت میں معروف ناپسندیدہ افعال کی سزا مقرر کی ہے۔ عورت کے لئے یہ کہ خاندان کے چار گواہوں کی گواہی پر اسے گھر سے آزادنکلنے سے روکا جائے اور مردوں کے لئے یہ کہ تمدنی گرفت ان پر کی جائے۔ اس میں ہرگز کسی شہوانی جرم کا ذکر نہیں۔ کیونکہ اُس کا ذکر سورہ نور میں آتا ہے اور وہاں اس کی سزا بھی بیان کی گئی ہے۔ چونکہ سورہ نور میں بیان شدہ سزا اور اِس آیت میں بیان شدہ سزا دونوں آپس میں مختلف ہیں۔ اس لئے معلوم ہوا کہ اس آیت میں بیان شدہ جن امور کی سزا ہے۔ وہ ناپسندیدہ افعال اور بُرے اخلاق کی باتیں ہیں۔
4:20, 26; 24:20.
Fahishah as used in the Qur’an (7:29; 33:31; 65:2) does not necessarily mean fornication or adultery for which punishment is prescribed in 24:3. The word refers to any glaringly improper conduct which may disturb social relations and may lead to breaches of the peace. The women referred to in this verse, as the men in the next in which similar offence with an undefined punishment is mentioned, are those guilty of foul or immoral conduct short of fornication or adultery. This is the view also of Abu Muslim and Mujahid. Such women should be prevented from mixing with other women until they reform themselves or get married, marriage being the way opened for them by Allah. As the offence mentioned is a serious one, four witnesses are considered necessary lest injustice be done to women reported against.
4:20, 26; 24:20.
Important Words:
الفاحشة (lewdness) is derived from فحش. They say فحش الامر i.e. the matter or the affair or the thing was or became foul, evil, immodest or lewd; or it became excessively foul, etc. فحشت المرأة means, the woman became foul or ugly. فاحشهmeans, he vied with him or strove to surpass him in foul or obscene speech or language, etc. فاحشة therefore means, an excess or enormity or anything exceeding the bounds of rectitude; or a thing excessively and enormously foul, evil, immoral, lewd or obscene; a sin or crime which is excessively foul; adultery or fornication. فحشاءbesides giving the same meaning as فاحشة also signifies avarice or niggardliness in the payment of Zakah or the poor-rate (Lane).
Commentary:
The women referred to in this verse are those guilty of foul or immoral conduct short of adultery. Abu Muslim and Mujahid, among others, have also held this view.
The words, confine them to the houses until death overtake them or Allah open for them a way, mean that they should be prevented from mixing with other women until they reform themselves or get married, marriage being an effective means of weaning people from immoral practices. As the offence mentioned is a serious one, four witnesses are considered necessary in order to prevent injustice being done to women.
Some scholars have sought to interpret the verse in the light of a saying of the Holy Prophet which runs as follows: "Learn from me, Allah has indeed opened for them a way, which is that if an unmarried couple commit fornication with each other they should receive a hundred stripes and should be banished for one year. But if a married man commits adultery with a married woman, then they should receive a hundred stripes each and be stoned to death" (Jarir, iv. 182). These scholars hold that the word فاحشة (fahishah) mentioned in the verse means "adultery" and that this verse prescribed that the women who committed adultery were to be detained in their houses till their death or till the time when God should open a way for them, i.e. reveal the law concerning them; and that the law which was afterwards revealed was to the effect that an unmarried woman committing fornication should receive a hundred stripes and one year’s banishment, while a married woman guilty of adultery should be stoned to death after she had received a hundred stripes. This interpretation, however, is open to many objections:
1. If the words, confine them to the houses until death overtake them or Allah open for them a way, mean that they were to be detained in their houses until God gave His law concerning them, the question is, what hindered God from giving His law at the very time of the revelation of the verse under comment? There is no hint here that the time was not yet ripe for such a law to be revealed. In this case, the only inference will be that God hesitated to give the necessary law at the time when this verse was revealed because He was not yet decided, the matter being still under His consideration. Such a supposition cannot be made about God.
2. The law mentioned in the above-quoted hadith is not found in the Quran.
3. The Holy Prophet’s own practice was against this hadith. No less than four persons were stoned to death for adultery in his lifetime, but none of them was given the punishment of a hundred stripes before being stoned as the above-mentioned hadith prescribes.
It may also be pointed out here that according to the usage of the Quran, the word فاحشة (fahishah) does not always mean "adultery" but as shown under Important Words above, it is also applied to all sorts of excesses or sins or crimes or acts exceeding the bounds of rectitude. For this meaning of the word the reader is referred to 33:31 which says: O wives of the Prophet, if any of you be guilty of فاحشة مبینة (manifestly dishonourable conduct); and 65:2 which says: unless they commit فاحشة مبینة (an act which is manifestly foul); and 7:29 which says: and when they commit فاحشة (a foul deed). In none of these verses does the word فاحشة mean adultery.
b
4:20, 26; 24:20.
317
在 «古兰经» (7:29; 33:31; 65:2 )中 فَاحِشَةْ (Fahishah) 未必意味着在 24:3中所规定要惩罚的私通或通奸。这一个词是指可能扰乱社会关系及导致破坏社会秩序显著的不正当行为。在本节经文中所指的妇女, 像在下节中所提到犯有类似罪恶而惩罚未确定的男人一样, 是那些除了私通或通奸以外, 犯有邪恶或不道德行为的妇女。这也是阿布•穆斯林 (اَبُوْ مُسْلِمْ, Abu Muslim) 和穆甲海德 (مُجَاهِدْ, Mujahid) 的见解。这类妇女应受禁和其他妇女在一起相处, 直到改过自新或结婚的时候, 结婚是安拉给她们的一条出路。由于所提到的这种罪过是严重的, 必须考虑四个见证, 以免该妇女受屈辱。
2
اس آیت اور اگلی آیت میں معروف ناپسندیدہ افعال کی سزا مقرر کی ہے۔ عورت کے لئے یہ کہ خاندان کے چار گواہوں کی گواہی پر اسے گھر سے آزادنکلنے سے روکا جائے اور مردوں کے لئے یہ کہ تمدنی گرفت ان پر کی جائے۔ اس میں ہرگز کسی شہوانی جرم کا ذکر نہیں۔ کیونکہ اُس کا ذکر سورہ نور میں آتا ہے اور وہاں اس کی سزا بھی بیان کی گئی ہے۔ چونکہ سورہ نور میں بیان شدہ سزا اور اِس آیت میں بیان شدہ سزا دونوں آپس میں مختلف ہیں۔ اس لئے معلوم ہوا کہ اس آیت میں بیان شدہ جن امور کی سزا ہے۔ وہ ناپسندیدہ افعال اور بُرے اخلاق کی باتیں ہیں۔
a
4:20, 26; 24:20.
496
Important Words:
الفاحشة (lewdness) is derived from فحش. They say فحش الامر i.e. the matter or the affair or the thing was or became foul, evil, immodest or lewd; or it became excessively foul, etc. فحشت المرأة means, the woman became foul or ugly. فاحشهmeans, he vied with him or strove to surpass him in foul or obscene speech or language, etc. فاحشة therefore means, an excess or enormity or anything exceeding the bounds of rectitude; or a thing excessively and enormously foul, evil, immoral, lewd or obscene; a sin or crime which is excessively foul; adultery or fornication. فحشاءbesides giving the same meaning as فاحشة also signifies avarice or niggardliness in the payment of Zakah or the poor-rate (Lane).
Commentary:
The women referred to in this verse are those guilty of foul or immoral conduct short of adultery. Abu Muslim and Mujahid, among others, have also held this view.
The words, confine them to the houses until death overtake them or Allah open for them a way, mean that they should be prevented from mixing with other women until they reform themselves or get married, marriage being an effective means of weaning people from immoral practices. As the offence mentioned is a serious one, four witnesses are considered necessary in order to prevent injustice being done to women.
Some scholars have sought to interpret the verse in the light of a saying of the Holy Prophet which runs as follows: "Learn from me, Allah has indeed opened for them a way, which is that if an unmarried couple commit fornication with each other they should receive a hundred stripes and should be banished for one year. But if a married man commits adultery with a married woman, then they should receive a hundred stripes each and be stoned to death" (Jarir, iv. 182). These scholars hold that the word فاحشة (fahishah) mentioned in the verse means "adultery" and that this verse prescribed that the women who committed adultery were to be detained in their houses till their death or till the time when God should open a way for them, i.e. reveal the law concerning them; and that the law which was afterwards revealed was to the effect that an unmarried woman committing fornication should receive a hundred stripes and one year’s banishment, while a married woman guilty of adultery should be stoned to death after she had received a hundred stripes. This interpretation, however, is open to many objections:
1. If the words, confine them to the houses until death overtake them or Allah open for them a way, mean that they were to be detained in their houses until God gave His law concerning them, the question is, what hindered God from giving His law at the very time of the revelation of the verse under comment? There is no hint here that the time was not yet ripe for such a law to be revealed. In this case, the only inference will be that God hesitated to give the necessary law at the time when this verse was revealed because He was not yet decided, the matter being still under His consideration. Such a supposition cannot be made about God.
2. The law mentioned in the above-quoted hadith is not found in the Quran.
3. The Holy Prophet’s own practice was against this hadith. No less than four persons were stoned to death for adultery in his lifetime, but none of them was given the punishment of a hundred stripes before being stoned as the above-mentioned hadith prescribes.
It may also be pointed out here that according to the usage of the Quran, the word فاحشة (fahishah) does not always mean "adultery" but as shown under Important Words above, it is also applied to all sorts of excesses or sins or crimes or acts exceeding the bounds of rectitude. For this meaning of the word the reader is referred to 33:31 which says: O wives of the Prophet, if any of you be guilty of فاحشة مبینة (manifestly dishonourable conduct); and 65:2 which says: unless they commit فاحشة مبینة (an act which is manifestly foul); and 7:29 which says: and when they commit فاحشة (a foul deed). In none of these verses does the word فاحشة mean adultery.
d
4:20, 26; 24:20.
576
Fahishah as used in the Qur’an (7:29; 33:31; 65:2) does not necessarily mean fornication or adultery for which punishment is prescribed in 24:3. The word refers to any glaringly improper conduct which may disturb social relations and may lead to breaches of the peace. The women referred to in this verse, as the men in the next in which similar offence with an undefined punishment is mentioned, are those guilty of foul or immoral conduct short of fornication or adultery. This is the view also of Abu Muslim and Mujahid. Such women should be prevented from mixing with other women until they reform themselves or get married, marriage being the way opened for them by Allah. As the offence mentioned is a serious one, four witnesses are considered necessary lest injustice be done to women reported against.
وَالَّذَانِ یَاۡتِیٰنِہَا مِنۡکُمۡ فَاٰذُوۡہُمَا ۖ فَاِنۡ تَابَا وَاَصۡلَحَا فَاَعۡرِضُوۡا عَنۡہُمَاۤ ۗ اِنَّ اللّٰہَ کَانَ تَوَّابًا رَّحِیۡمًا
اَلَّذَانِ (Alladhani) 这词未必意指两个男性, 这里所提的特定惩罚方式应由有关当局决定。这节与上节经文所指出的一些罪行, 其惩戒方式都未见载于经典中, 所以要由当局按照当时的实际情况裁定。本节经文也可指两个男性间反常的犯罪行为或近似的犯罪行为。
مفسرین کہتے ہیں کہ اس سے مراد بدکاری ہے لیکن قرآن کے الفاظ ظاہر ہیں کہ آیت سے مراد یہ ہے کہ وہ ناپسندیدہ بات کریں اور سیاق و سباق سے ظاہر ہے کہ اس جگہ جھگڑا فساد مراد ہے۔
The word Alladhani does not necessarily imply two males. What particular form the punishment mentioned here should take is left to the discretion of the authorities concerned. Both this and the preceding verse refer to offences for which no punishment has been fixed by the Law, the matter having been left to the discretion of the authorities to be decided according to the circumstances then obtaining. The verse may also refer to two males being guilty of an unnatural offence or something approaching it.
Commentary:
The verse refers to two males who are guilty of an unnatural offence or something approaching it. What particular form the punishment mentioned here should take has been left to the discretion of the authorities concerned.
Both this verse and the preceding one refer to offences for which no حد شرعی (punishment definitely fixed by the Law) has been prescribed, the matter having been left to the discretion of the authorities to be decided according to circumstances.
318
اَلَّذَانِ (Alladhani) 这词未必意指两个男性, 这里所提的特定惩罚方式应由有关当局决定。这节与上节经文所指出的一些罪行, 其惩戒方式都未见载于经典中, 所以要由当局按照当时的实际情况裁定。本节经文也可指两个男性间反常的犯罪行为或近似的犯罪行为。
3
مفسرین کہتے ہیں کہ اس سے مراد بدکاری ہے لیکن قرآن کے الفاظ ظاہر ہیں کہ آیت سے مراد یہ ہے کہ وہ ناپسندیدہ بات کریں اور سیاق و سباق سے ظاہر ہے کہ اس جگہ جھگڑا فساد مراد ہے۔
497
Commentary:
The verse refers to two males who are guilty of an unnatural offence or something approaching it. What particular form the punishment mentioned here should take has been left to the discretion of the authorities concerned.
Both this verse and the preceding one refer to offences for which no حد شرعی (punishment definitely fixed by the Law) has been prescribed, the matter having been left to the discretion of the authorities to be decided according to circumstances.
577
The word Alladhani does not necessarily imply two males. What particular form the punishment mentioned here should take is left to the discretion of the authorities concerned. Both this and the preceding verse refer to offences for which no punishment has been fixed by the Law, the matter having been left to the discretion of the authorities to be decided according to the circumstances then obtaining. The verse may also refer to two males being guilty of an unnatural offence or something approaching it.
یٰۤاَیُّہَا الَّذِیۡنَ اٰمَنُوۡا لَا یَحِلُّ لَکُمۡ اَنۡ تَرِثُوا النِّسَآءَ کَرۡہًا ۖ وَّلَا تَعۡضُلُوۡہُنَّ لِتَذۡہَبُوۡا بِبَعۡضِ مَاۤ اٰتَیۡتُمُوۡہُنَّ اِلَّاۤ اَنۡ یَّاۡتِیۡنَ بِفٰحِشَۃٍ مُّبَیِّنَۃٍ ۚ وَعَاشِرُوۡہُنَّ بِالۡمَعۡرُوۡفِ ۚ فَاِنۡ کَرِہۡتُمُوۡہُنَّ فَعَسٰۤی اَنۡ تَکۡرَہُوۡا شَیۡـًٔا وَّیَجۡعَلَ اللّٰہُ فِیۡہِ خَیۡرًا کَثِیۡرًا
2:217.
4:16.
死者的亲戚不能阻止他的寡妇再婚以求得到她的财产; 但如果她打算嫁一个品质显然可恶的人, 他们可以阻止她结婚。如果这话是对丈夫说的, 本节经文就意味着, 假如妻子不想与其丈夫生活在一起而要与丈夫分居, 她们可以根据 خُلْع (Khul‘) 这样做, 丈夫不应出于贪图妻子的钱而阻止分居。可是倘若妻子要干出明显的丑事时, 他们可以阻止。
خُلْع (Khul‘): 经由交付赔偿或商量, 妻子所获得的离婚权利。
据传穆圣说过, “你们之中最好的人就是对待妻子最好的人。” (بُخَارِی, Bukhari)。عَاشِرُوْهُنَّ (‘Ashiruhunna) 一词属于阿语词律 مُفَاعَلَة (Mufa‘alah), 表示互惠;夫妻双方都应该和睦相处, 相亲相爱。
یعنی پہلی آیت کے مطابق ان کو باہر نکلنے سے روک سکتے ہو۔ ان کا مال چھیننے کے لئے ایسا نہ کرو۔ اس آیت میں جو اِلَّا (یعنی سوائے) کا لفظ ہے اس سے یہ مرادنہیں کہ اگر وہ فاحشہ کی مرتکب ہوں تو مال چھین سکتے ہو بلکہ استثنا گھروں میں روکنے کے متعلق ہے نہ کہ مال لینے کے متعلق اور مراد یہ ہے کہ پہلی آیت کے مطابق وہ فاحشہ کی مرتکب ہوں تو صرف اس صورت میں ان کو گھروں سے نکلنے سے روک سکتے ہو۔
See 4:16.
2:217.
The deceased person’s relatives cannot prevent his widow from contracting a new marriage so that they may get hold of her property; but they can prevent her from doing so if she intends to marry a person of manifestly objectionable character. If the address is to the husbands, the verse would mean that if the wives do not want to live with their husbands and seek separation from them, which they can do by means of Khula’ the husbands should not prevent them from doing so out of greed for their money. But they can do so, if the wives are going to be guilty of a manifestly foul act.
The Holy Prophet is reported to have said, "The best among you is he who treats his wife best" (Bukhari). The expression ‘Ashiruhunna being of the measure Mufa‘alah denotes reciprocity; husbands and wives are both enjoined to live amicably with each other and reciprocate each other’s love.
See 4:16.
2:217.
Commentary:
Men become heirs of women against their will in various ways: (1) A man does not like his wife and does not treat her well, yet he does not divorce her, hoping to possess her property after her death; (2) He treats his wife harshly and compels her by ill-treatment to obtain separation (khula‘) from him by giving him a part or whole of her property, or by surrendering her dowry; (3) The relations of the deceased husband of a widow prevent her from marrying another husband in order to get possession of her property after her death; (4) They force her to marry someone from among themselves against her will, treating her virtually as a part of the property left by her dead husband; (5) The husband takes by force the property of his wife, as if it were his by legal right; (6) The relatives of the deceased husband take away by force the property of his widow, depriving her of her right of inheritance.
The deceased person’s relatives cannot prevent his widow from contracting a new marriage so that they may get hold of her property; but they can prevent her from doing so, if she intends to marry a person of manifestly objectionable character.
If the address is to the husbands, the verse would mean that if the wives do not want to live with their husbands and seek separation from them, which they can do by means of khula‘, the husbands should not prevent them from doing so out of greed for their money. But they can do so, if the wives are going to be guilty of a manifestly foul act.
The words, consort with them in kindness, embody the pith of the Islamic teachings about the treatment of wives. They are not to be treated in a dry, businesslike way, but with love and kindness. The Holy Prophet is reported to have said: خیر کم خیر کم لاھله i.e. "the best among you is he who is best in his treatment of his wife" (Tirmidhi). But as a one-sided affair can never be truly successful, the Quran uses the expression عاشروھن (consort with them), which, being of the measure مفاعلةdenotes reciprocity. So husbands and wives are both enjoined to live amicably with each other and reciprocate each other’s love and kindness.
A woman cannot adequately appreciate and acknowledge the great debt she owes to the Quran. No other Scripture has given to her the high status that the Quran gives her. It not only lays down her inalienable rights but also exhorts men to overlook the weaknesses and shortcomings of their wives, and treat them with kindness and benevolence even if they do not like them. The memorable words of the Holy Prophet quoted above, i.e. "The best of you is he who is best in his treatment of his wife" (Tirmidhi), are only an echo of the noble teachings of the Quran with regard to women.
a
2:217.
c
4:16.
321
死者的亲戚不能阻止他的寡妇再婚以求得到她的财产; 但如果她打算嫁一个品质显然可恶的人, 他们可以阻止她结婚。如果这话是对丈夫说的, 本节经文就意味着, 假如妻子不想与其丈夫生活在一起而要与丈夫分居, 她们可以根据 خُلْع (Khul‘) 这样做, 丈夫不应出于贪图妻子的钱而阻止分居。可是倘若妻子要干出明显的丑事时, 他们可以阻止。
خُلْع (Khul‘): 经由交付赔偿或商量, 妻子所获得的离婚权利。
322
据传穆圣说过, “你们之中最好的人就是对待妻子最好的人。” (بُخَارِی, Bukhari)。عَاشِرُوْهُنَّ (‘Ashiruhunna) 一词属于阿语词律 مُفَاعَلَة (Mufa‘alah), 表示互惠;夫妻双方都应该和睦相处, 相亲相爱。
1
یعنی پہلی آیت کے مطابق ان کو باہر نکلنے سے روک سکتے ہو۔ ان کا مال چھیننے کے لئے ایسا نہ کرو۔ اس آیت میں جو اِلَّا (یعنی سوائے) کا لفظ ہے اس سے یہ مرادنہیں کہ اگر وہ فاحشہ کی مرتکب ہوں تو مال چھین سکتے ہو بلکہ استثنا گھروں میں روکنے کے متعلق ہے نہ کہ مال لینے کے متعلق اور مراد یہ ہے کہ پہلی آیت کے مطابق وہ فاحشہ کی مرتکب ہوں تو صرف اس صورت میں ان کو گھروں سے نکلنے سے روک سکتے ہو۔
b
See 4:16.
c
2:217.
499
Commentary:
Men become heirs of women against their will in various ways: (1) A man does not like his wife and does not treat her well, yet he does not divorce her, hoping to possess her property after her death; (2) He treats his wife harshly and compels her by ill-treatment to obtain separation (khula‘) from him by giving him a part or whole of her property, or by surrendering her dowry; (3) The relations of the deceased husband of a widow prevent her from marrying another husband in order to get possession of her property after her death; (4) They force her to marry someone from among themselves against her will, treating her virtually as a part of the property left by her dead husband; (5) The husband takes by force the property of his wife, as if it were his by legal right; (6) The relatives of the deceased husband take away by force the property of his widow, depriving her of her right of inheritance.
The deceased person’s relatives cannot prevent his widow from contracting a new marriage so that they may get hold of her property; but they can prevent her from doing so, if she intends to marry a person of manifestly objectionable character.
If the address is to the husbands, the verse would mean that if the wives do not want to live with their husbands and seek separation from them, which they can do by means of khula‘, the husbands should not prevent them from doing so out of greed for their money. But they can do so, if the wives are going to be guilty of a manifestly foul act.
The words, consort with them in kindness, embody the pith of the Islamic teachings about the treatment of wives. They are not to be treated in a dry, businesslike way, but with love and kindness. The Holy Prophet is reported to have said: خیر کم خیر کم لاھله i.e. "the best among you is he who is best in his treatment of his wife" (Tirmidhi). But as a one-sided affair can never be truly successful, the Quran uses the expression عاشروھن (consort with them), which, being of the measure مفاعلةdenotes reciprocity. So husbands and wives are both enjoined to live amicably with each other and reciprocate each other’s love and kindness.
A woman cannot adequately appreciate and acknowledge the great debt she owes to the Quran. No other Scripture has given to her the high status that the Quran gives her. It not only lays down her inalienable rights but also exhorts men to overlook the weaknesses and shortcomings of their wives, and treat them with kindness and benevolence even if they do not like them. The memorable words of the Holy Prophet quoted above, i.e. "The best of you is he who is best in his treatment of his wife" (Tirmidhi), are only an echo of the noble teachings of the Quran with regard to women.
b
See 4:16.
c
2:217.
580
The deceased person’s relatives cannot prevent his widow from contracting a new marriage so that they may get hold of her property; but they can prevent her from doing so if she intends to marry a person of manifestly objectionable character. If the address is to the husbands, the verse would mean that if the wives do not want to live with their husbands and seek separation from them, which they can do by means of Khula’ the husbands should not prevent them from doing so out of greed for their money. But they can do so, if the wives are going to be guilty of a manifestly foul act.
581
The Holy Prophet is reported to have said, "The best among you is he who treats his wife best" (Bukhari). The expression ‘Ashiruhunna being of the measure Mufa‘alah denotes reciprocity; husbands and wives are both enjoined to live amicably with each other and reciprocate each other’s love.
حُرِّمَتۡ عَلَیۡکُمۡ اُمَّہٰتُکُمۡ وَبَنَاتُکُمۡ وَاَخَوٰتُکُمۡ وَعَمّٰتُکُمۡ وَخٰلٰتُکُمۡ وَبَنَاتُ الۡاَخِ وَبَنَاتُ الۡاُخۡتِ وَاُمَّہٰتُکُمُ الّٰتِیۡۤ اَرۡضَعۡنَکُمۡ وَاَخَوٰتُکُمۡ مِّنَ الرَّضٰعَۃِ وَاُمَّہٰتُ نِسَآئِکُمۡ وَرَبٰٓئِبُکُمُ الّٰتِیۡ فِیۡ حُجُوۡرِکُمۡ مِّنۡ نِّسَآئِکُمُ الّٰتِیۡ دَخَلۡتُمۡ بِہِنَّ فَاِنۡ لَّمۡ تَکُوۡنُوۡا دَخَلۡتُمۡ بِہِنَّ فَلَا جُنَاحَ عَلَیۡکُمۡ وَحَلٰٓئِلُ اَبۡنَآئِکُمُ الَّذِیۡنَ مِنۡ اَصۡلٰبِکُمۡ وَاَنۡ تَجۡمَعُوۡا بَیۡنَ الۡاُخۡتَیۡنِ اِلَّا مَا قَدۡ سَلَفَ ۗ اِنَّ اللّٰہَ کَانَ غَفُوۡرًا رَّحِیۡمًا
The Holy Prophet is reported to have said that the relatives of foster- mothers are as forbidden as those within the prohibited degrees of relationship of real mothers. It is not lawful to marry foster-sisters and foster-daughters and so on.
Theologians differ as to what number of sucks makes the marriage of foster-mothers and foster-sisters and their relations (within prohibited degrees of marriage) unlawful.
Important Words:
ربائب (step-daughters) is derived from رب and is the plural of ربیبة meaning the daughter of a woman’s husband by another wife or the daughter of a man’s wife by another husband, because he or she rears her in spite of her being not a real daughter; or it means the wife of a man having child by another wife; also a woman who has the charge of a child, who rears or fosters it (Lane & Aqrab).
حجور (wards) is the plural of حجر which is derived from حجر meaning, he prevented or hindered it. حجر means, bosom or breast or the part beneath the armpit; custody, care or guardianship. They say, نشأ زید فی حجر عمرو i.e. Zaid grew up in the care and protection of ‘Amr. The expression التی فی حجور کم would, therefore, mean, those who are under your care or guardianship, i.e. your wards (Lane Aqrab & Mufradat).
حلائل (wives) is the plural of حلیلand حلیلة which are both derived from حل i.e. he alighted or took up his abode; or he or it became lawful; or he untied a knot, etc. حلیل means, husband and حلیلةwife. حلیل also means, a fellow-lodger or fellow-resident of another in one house (Aqrab). It also means a neighbour and a guest (Lane).
ارضعنکم (have given you suck) is derived from رضع. They say رضع امه i.e. he sucked the breast of his mother. ھذا اخی من الرضاعةmeans, he is my foster-brother, we both having sucked the breast of the same woman. ارضعته امه means, his mother suckled him; and استرضعت المرأة ولدی means, I sought or demanded of the woman that she should suckle my child (Lane).
Commentary:
The prohibition about marrying mothers, sisters and daughters may look superfluous; but there are certain people (e.g. certain sects among the Hindus) who regard such marriages as not only permissible, but even meritorious. The Quran, being a perfect code of Law, contains everything essential for man’s physical, moral and spiritual well-being. The Quranic laws are in perfect harmony with human nature; in fact, they only remind us of what is writ large on the book of human nature by God’s own hand. Human nature responds to what is taught by the Quran and the Qurancommands that which human nature demands, and it prohibits what human nature revolts against. The Holy Prophet is reported to have said that the relatives of foster mothers are as forbidden as those within prohibited degree of relationship of real mothers. It is not lawful to marry foster-sisters and foster-daughters and so on. There exists, however, a difference of opinion among Muslim theologians as to what amount of suckling makes the marriage of foster mothers and foster-sisters and their relations (within prohibited degree of marriage) unlawful. Some hold the view that the prohibition comes into operation in all cases even when a woman has given suck to a child only once. According to others who derive their authority from a saying of the Holy Prophet, reported by ‘A’ishah, viz. لا تحرم المصة ولا المصتان i.e. "A suck or two do not make marriage unlawful" (Tirmidhi, ch. on Rida’), the least number of sucks to render marriage unlawful is three. But there is yet another saying of the Holy Prophet, also reported by ‘A’ishah, that mentionsخمس رضعات معلومات (five distinctly known sucks) as necessary to make marriage unlawful (Muslim), and this appears to be the correct view. One suck amounts to the quantity taken by a child at one stretch, i.e. when for the time being it should leave off sucking of its own accord and before returning to it. The age of the child must be within two years at the time of sucking.
The qualifying clause, who are your wards, is only added to draw our attention to the fact that we should bring up our wards with the same care and tenderness that we bestow upon our own children; otherwise marriage with the daughters of women with whom conjugal relations have been established is unlawful, whether or not they are brought up as wards. The daughters of those women with whom such relations have not been established can be taken into marriage and this is the meaning of the words, but if you have not gone in unto them, there shall be no sin upon you.
The expression, of your sons that are from your loins, is added to exclude wife’s sons as well as adopted ones. Islam does not recognize the system of adoption. It wants us to look upon all Muslims as brothers; and as the adoption of certain individuals as sons conflicts with this principle of universal brotherhood, it has been prohibited by Islam. The system of adoption also leads to contention and litigation.
In conformity with the command contained in the words, it is forbidden to you to have two sisters together in marriage, the Holy Prophet is reported to have ordered one of the two sisters who were together the wives of one man to be divorced by him after this injunction was revealed (Tirmidhi, ch. on Nikah). The injunction is based on sentiments of deference to near relationship and is meant to exclude possibility of dissensions in the close family circle.
For similar reasons the Holy Prophet has forbidden to unite in marriage a maternal aunt and her sister’s daughter, or a paternal aunt and her brother’s daughter.
503
Important Words:
ربائب (step-daughters) is derived from رب and is the plural of ربیبة meaning the daughter of a woman’s husband by another wife or the daughter of a man’s wife by another husband, because he or she rears her in spite of her being not a real daughter; or it means the wife of a man having child by another wife; also a woman who has the charge of a child, who rears or fosters it (Lane & Aqrab).
حجور (wards) is the plural of حجر which is derived from حجر meaning, he prevented or hindered it. حجر means, bosom or breast or the part beneath the armpit; custody, care or guardianship. They say, نشأ زید فی حجر عمرو i.e. Zaid grew up in the care and protection of ‘Amr. The expression التی فی حجور کم would, therefore, mean, those who are under your care or guardianship, i.e. your wards (Lane Aqrab & Mufradat).
حلائل (wives) is the plural of حلیلand حلیلة which are both derived from حل i.e. he alighted or took up his abode; or he or it became lawful; or he untied a knot, etc. حلیل means, husband and حلیلةwife. حلیل also means, a fellow-lodger or fellow-resident of another in one house (Aqrab). It also means a neighbour and a guest (Lane).
ارضعنکم (have given you suck) is derived from رضع. They say رضع امه i.e. he sucked the breast of his mother. ھذا اخی من الرضاعةmeans, he is my foster-brother, we both having sucked the breast of the same woman. ارضعته امه means, his mother suckled him; and استرضعت المرأة ولدی means, I sought or demanded of the woman that she should suckle my child (Lane).
Commentary:
The prohibition about marrying mothers, sisters and daughters may look superfluous; but there are certain people (e.g. certain sects among the Hindus) who regard such marriages as not only permissible, but even meritorious. The Quran, being a perfect code of Law, contains everything essential for man’s physical, moral and spiritual well-being. The Quranic laws are in perfect harmony with human nature; in fact, they only remind us of what is writ large on the book of human nature by God’s own hand. Human nature responds to what is taught by the Quran and the Qurancommands that which human nature demands, and it prohibits what human nature revolts against. The Holy Prophet is reported to have said that the relatives of foster mothers are as forbidden as those within prohibited degree of relationship of real mothers. It is not lawful to marry foster-sisters and foster-daughters and so on. There exists, however, a difference of opinion among Muslim theologians as to what amount of suckling makes the marriage of foster mothers and foster-sisters and their relations (within prohibited degree of marriage) unlawful. Some hold the view that the prohibition comes into operation in all cases even when a woman has given suck to a child only once. According to others who derive their authority from a saying of the Holy Prophet, reported by ‘A’ishah, viz. لا تحرم المصة ولا المصتان i.e. "A suck or two do not make marriage unlawful" (Tirmidhi, ch. on Rida’), the least number of sucks to render marriage unlawful is three. But there is yet another saying of the Holy Prophet, also reported by ‘A’ishah, that mentionsخمس رضعات معلومات (five distinctly known sucks) as necessary to make marriage unlawful (Muslim), and this appears to be the correct view. One suck amounts to the quantity taken by a child at one stretch, i.e. when for the time being it should leave off sucking of its own accord and before returning to it. The age of the child must be within two years at the time of sucking.
The qualifying clause, who are your wards, is only added to draw our attention to the fact that we should bring up our wards with the same care and tenderness that we bestow upon our own children; otherwise marriage with the daughters of women with whom conjugal relations have been established is unlawful, whether or not they are brought up as wards. The daughters of those women with whom such relations have not been established can be taken into marriage and this is the meaning of the words, but if you have not gone in unto them, there shall be no sin upon you.
The expression, of your sons that are from your loins, is added to exclude wife’s sons as well as adopted ones. Islam does not recognize the system of adoption. It wants us to look upon all Muslims as brothers; and as the adoption of certain individuals as sons conflicts with this principle of universal brotherhood, it has been prohibited by Islam. The system of adoption also leads to contention and litigation.
In conformity with the command contained in the words, it is forbidden to you to have two sisters together in marriage, the Holy Prophet is reported to have ordered one of the two sisters who were together the wives of one man to be divorced by him after this injunction was revealed (Tirmidhi, ch. on Nikah). The injunction is based on sentiments of deference to near relationship and is meant to exclude possibility of dissensions in the close family circle.
For similar reasons the Holy Prophet has forbidden to unite in marriage a maternal aunt and her sister’s daughter, or a paternal aunt and her brother’s daughter.
586
The Holy Prophet is reported to have said that the relatives of foster- mothers are as forbidden as those within the prohibited degrees of relationship of real mothers. It is not lawful to marry foster-sisters and foster-daughters and so on.
587
Theologians differ as to what number of sucks makes the marriage of foster-mothers and foster-sisters and their relations (within prohibited degrees of marriage) unlawful.
وَمَنۡ لَّمۡ یَسۡتَطِعۡ مِنۡکُمۡ طَوۡلًا اَنۡ یَّنۡکِحَ الۡمُحۡصَنٰتِ الۡمُؤۡمِنٰتِ فَمِنۡ مَّا مَلَکَتۡ اَیۡمٰنُکُمۡ مِّنۡ فَتَیٰتِکُمُ الۡمُؤۡمِنٰتِ ۚ وَاللّٰہُ اَعۡلَمُ بِاِیۡمٰنِکُمۡ ۚ بَعۡضُکُمۡ مِّنۡۢ بَعۡضٍ ۚ فَانۡکِحُوۡہُنَّ بِاِذۡنِ اَہۡلِہِنَّ وَاٰتُوۡہُنَّ اُجُوۡرَہُنَّ بِالۡمَعۡرُوۡفِ مُحۡصَنٰتٍ غَیۡرَ مُسٰفِحٰتٍ وَّلَا مُتَّخِذٰتِ اَخۡدَانٍ ۚ فَاِذَاۤ اُحۡصِنَّ فَاِنۡ اَتَیۡنَ بِفٰحِشَۃٍ فَعَلَیۡہِنَّ نِصۡفُ مَا عَلَی الۡمُحۡصَنٰتِ مِنَ الۡعَذَابِ ۚ ذٰلِکَ لِمَنۡ خَشِیَ الۡعَنَتَ مِنۡکُمۡ ۚ وَاَنۡ تَصۡبِرُوۡا خَیۡرٌ لَّکُمۡ ۗ وَاللّٰہُ غَفُوۡرٌ رَّحِیۡمٌ
4:16, 20; 24:20.
本节经文规定了三条重要原则: (a) 女奴应先正式结婚而后才发生夫妻关系。这在 2:222; 4:4; 及24:33各章中也明确说明。因此伊斯兰教根除了它诞生以前阿拉伯社会非常盛行的男女非法同居。(b) 如果女奴犯了通奸, 其处罚为自由妇女犯同样罪恶, 打100鞭子的一半, 这说明用石头砸死并非 (像被误解的那样) 是对通奸的惩罚, 因为用石头砸死是无法减半的。(c) 顺便提一下, 经文似乎指出, 在阿拉伯社会, 结婚的女奴比结婚的自由妇女享有较低的社会地位, 这也许因为女奴曾参加过摧毁伊斯兰教国家的战争。
یہ مطلب نہیں کہ پاکباز ہوں تو مہر دو ورنہ نہ دو۔ بلکہ مطلب یہ ہے کہ ایسی ہی لونڈیوں سے نکاح کرو جن کی پاک دامنی تم پر ثابت ہو۔ اور پھر ان کے مہر آزاد عورتوں کی طرح ادا کرو۔
یعنی لونڈیوں سے شادی کرنا صرف اضطراری حالت میں جائز ہے۔ کیونکہ وہ غیر مذہب اور غیر قوم سے تعلق رکھتی ہیں۔ بہتر یہی ہے کہ اپنی ہم مذہب اور ہم قوم آزاد عورت سے شادی کرو۔
4:16, 20; 24:20.
In Islam no stigma attaches to the status of a handmaid as such; but owing to her relationships and associations she may not prove such a perfect companion as a free believing woman.
This means that only such of them may be married as are chaste and virtuous. Once they are married their dowries must be paid just as in the case of free women.
The verse has laid down three vital principles: (a) Bondwomen should be properly married before conjugal relations are had with them. This is also clear from 2:222; 4:4; and 24:33. Thus Islam has cut at the root of concubinage which was so prevalent in Arab society before its advent. (b) If they commit adultery, bondwomen are to have half the punishment which is 100 stripes for free women for the same offence which shows that stoning to death is not the punishment for adultery, as mistakenly understood, because stoning to death cannot be halved. (c) Incidentally, the verse seems to indicate that a bondwoman taken in marriage had a lower social status in Arab society than a free woman taken in marriage, perhaps because of her having taken part in a war waged to destroy an Islamic State.
4:16, 20; 24:20.
Important Words:
طولا (to afford) is noun from طال i.e. he or it was or became long, tall or high. طول means, bounty or gift; ampleness of means; excellence; excess or increase; power or ability; wealth or competence. It may also mean, dowry or expenses of marriage (Lane, Aqrab & Mufradat).
اخدان (secret paramours) is the plural of خدن. They say خادنه i.e. he was or became his friend or companion; or he was or became his secret or private friend. اخدان means friends or secret friends; amorous companions or associates; companions or associates affected with sensual appetency (Lane & Mufradat).
العنت (sins) is the noun-infinitive from عنت i.e. he fell into a difficulty; or he committed a sin or a crime or an act of disobedience; or he committed fornication or adultery. عنت therefore, means, severe difficulty or hardship; a state of perdition; a corrupt or evil state or conduct; a sin or crime, or an act of disobedience deserving punishment; a wrong action (intentional or unintentional); fornication or adultery (Lane & Aqrab). See also 3:119, 2:221.
Commentary:
As God attaches great value to the faith of a Muslim, He does not like it to become impaired by his marrying disbelieving women. Hence the condition that even the bondwoman a Muslim may marry should be a believer.
The words, you are all one from another, are meant to raise believing bondwomen in the estimation of Muslims, who are hereby required not to despise them or treat them with contempt on account of their so-called lower status.
The words, half the punishment, mean 50 stripes, the punishment for (unmarried) free women being 100 stripes. See also 24:3. The word half shows that the verse refers to a punishment which can be halved, and not to stoning to death, which was inflicted on married free women. The punishment definitely prescribed in the Quran (24:3) for a fornicator and a fornicatress is only a hundred stripes, but as the Holy Prophet differentiated between married and unmarried persons, inflicting on the former the punishment of stoning to death, the aforesaid verse has been taken as only applying to unmarried persons.
The expression, this is for him among you who fears lest he should commit sin, shows that Muslims are enjoined to avoid, as far as possible, contracting conjugal relations with bond women taken prisoner from belligerent disbelievers. This is to be done only if, on the one hand, one is not able to marry a free woman and, on the other, by remaining unmarried, one fears to fall into sin. The Muslim Empire of Baghdad fell to pieces because the khalifahs took to contracting conjugal relations with bondwomen. The incompetent princes born of them ruined the State. In most cases, marital relations with bondwomen are calculated to have a demoralizing effect on both husbands and children.
a
4:16, 20; 24:20.
324
本节经文规定了三条重要原则: (a) 女奴应先正式结婚而后才发生夫妻关系。这在 2:222; 4:4; 及24:33各章中也明确说明。因此伊斯兰教根除了它诞生以前阿拉伯社会非常盛行的男女非法同居。(b) 如果女奴犯了通奸, 其处罚为自由妇女犯同样罪恶, 打100鞭子的一半, 这说明用石头砸死并非 (像被误解的那样) 是对通奸的惩罚, 因为用石头砸死是无法减半的。(c) 顺便提一下, 经文似乎指出, 在阿拉伯社会, 结婚的女奴比结婚的自由妇女享有较低的社会地位, 这也许因为女奴曾参加过摧毁伊斯兰教国家的战争。
3
یہ مطلب نہیں کہ پاکباز ہوں تو مہر دو ورنہ نہ دو۔ بلکہ مطلب یہ ہے کہ ایسی ہی لونڈیوں سے نکاح کرو جن کی پاک دامنی تم پر ثابت ہو۔ اور پھر ان کے مہر آزاد عورتوں کی طرح ادا کرو۔
4
یعنی لونڈیوں سے شادی کرنا صرف اضطراری حالت میں جائز ہے۔ کیونکہ وہ غیر مذہب اور غیر قوم سے تعلق رکھتی ہیں۔ بہتر یہی ہے کہ اپنی ہم مذہب اور ہم قوم آزاد عورت سے شادی کرو۔
a
4:16, 20; 24:20.
505
Important Words:
طولا (to afford) is noun from طال i.e. he or it was or became long, tall or high. طول means, bounty or gift; ampleness of means; excellence; excess or increase; power or ability; wealth or competence. It may also mean, dowry or expenses of marriage (Lane, Aqrab & Mufradat).
اخدان (secret paramours) is the plural of خدن. They say خادنه i.e. he was or became his friend or companion; or he was or became his secret or private friend. اخدان means friends or secret friends; amorous companions or associates; companions or associates affected with sensual appetency (Lane & Mufradat).
العنت (sins) is the noun-infinitive from عنت i.e. he fell into a difficulty; or he committed a sin or a crime or an act of disobedience; or he committed fornication or adultery. عنت therefore, means, severe difficulty or hardship; a state of perdition; a corrupt or evil state or conduct; a sin or crime, or an act of disobedience deserving punishment; a wrong action (intentional or unintentional); fornication or adultery (Lane & Aqrab). See also 3:119, 2:221.
Commentary:
As God attaches great value to the faith of a Muslim, He does not like it to become impaired by his marrying disbelieving women. Hence the condition that even the bondwoman a Muslim may marry should be a believer.
The words, you are all one from another, are meant to raise believing bondwomen in the estimation of Muslims, who are hereby required not to despise them or treat them with contempt on account of their so-called lower status.
The words, half the punishment, mean 50 stripes, the punishment for (unmarried) free women being 100 stripes. See also 24:3. The word half shows that the verse refers to a punishment which can be halved, and not to stoning to death, which was inflicted on married free women. The punishment definitely prescribed in the Quran (24:3) for a fornicator and a fornicatress is only a hundred stripes, but as the Holy Prophet differentiated between married and unmarried persons, inflicting on the former the punishment of stoning to death, the aforesaid verse has been taken as only applying to unmarried persons.
The expression, this is for him among you who fears lest he should commit sin, shows that Muslims are enjoined to avoid, as far as possible, contracting conjugal relations with bond women taken prisoner from belligerent disbelievers. This is to be done only if, on the one hand, one is not able to marry a free woman and, on the other, by remaining unmarried, one fears to fall into sin. The Muslim Empire of Baghdad fell to pieces because the khalifahs took to contracting conjugal relations with bondwomen. The incompetent princes born of them ruined the State. In most cases, marital relations with bondwomen are calculated to have a demoralizing effect on both husbands and children.
a
4:16, 20; 24:20.
591
In Islam no stigma attaches to the status of a handmaid as such; but owing to her relationships and associations she may not prove such a perfect companion as a free believing woman.
591A
This means that only such of them may be married as are chaste and virtuous. Once they are married their dowries must be paid just as in the case of free women.
592
The verse has laid down three vital principles: (a) Bondwomen should be properly married before conjugal relations are had with them. This is also clear from 2:222; 4:4; and 24:33. Thus Islam has cut at the root of concubinage which was so prevalent in Arab society before its advent. (b) If they commit adultery, bondwomen are to have half the punishment which is 100 stripes for free women for the same offence which shows that stoning to death is not the punishment for adultery, as mistakenly understood, because stoning to death cannot be halved. (c) Incidentally, the verse seems to indicate that a bondwoman taken in marriage had a lower social status in Arab society than a free woman taken in marriage, perhaps because of her having taken part in a war waged to destroy an Islamic State.
اَلرِّجَالُ قَوّٰمُوۡنَ عَلَی النِّسَآءِ بِمَا فَضَّلَ اللّٰہُ بَعۡضَہُمۡ عَلٰی بَعۡضٍ وَّبِمَاۤ اَنۡفَقُوۡا مِنۡ اَمۡوٰلِہِمۡ ۚ فَالصّٰلِحٰتُ قٰنِتٰتٌ حٰفِظٰتٌ لِّلۡغَیۡبِ بِمَا حَفِظَ اللّٰہُ ۚ وَالّٰتِیۡ تَخَافُوۡنَ نُشُوۡزَہُنَّ فَعِظُوۡہُنَّ وَاہۡجُرُوۡہُنَّ فِی الۡمَضَاجِعِ وَاضۡرِبُوۡہُنَّ ۖ فَاِنۡ اَطَعۡنَکُمۡ فَلَا تَبۡغُوۡا عَلَیۡہِنَّ سَبِیۡلًا ۗ اِنَّ اللّٰہَ کَانَ عَلِیًّا کَبِیۡرًا
2:238; 4:33.
2:229.
قَوّٰمُوْن (Qawwamun) 源自 قَامَ عَلَى الْمَرْأَةِ (Qama ‘Alal-Mar’ati) 意指他负责赡养妇女; 他保护她。因此, قَوّٰمُوْن (Qawwamun) 意指赡养者, 事务管理人; 保护人 (لِسَانْ, Lisan)。经文对男人为什么一直作为家庭之主, 说明了两条道理: (a) 他优越的智力与体力; (b) 他是家庭中谋生者和赡养人。因此, 为赡养家庭而谋生计并给钱的他, 处理家事中享有监管的地位, 这是自然而公正的。
نَشَزَتِ الْمَرْأَةُ عَلٰی زَوْجِهَا (Nashazatil-Mar’atu ‘ala Zauji-ha) 意指妇女起来反对她的丈夫; 反抗他; 遗弃他 (Lane & تَاجْ, Taj)。
这一句话可以解释为 (a) 违避夫妻关系; (b) 分床睡觉; (c) 不与她们讲话。这些办法并不是无限期实行的方法, 因为妻子不可能像东西那样悬挂起来。(4:130) 按照 «古兰经» 戒绝夫妻关系即实际分离, 最长期限为四个月。(2:227) 如果丈夫认为事情很严重, 他将必须奉行4:16中所提到的各项条件。
据传穆圣说过, 如果一个穆斯林既然非得打他妻子不可, 也不能在她身上打出伤痕来。(تِرْمِذِی, Tirmidhi & مُسْلِمْ, Muslim) 但打妻子的丈夫总不是你们男人中最好的。(كَثِيْر, Kathir, iii)
نافرمانی سے اس جگہ زنا مرادنہیں بلکہ اس سے اتر کر گناہ مراد ہے جن سے ہمسایوں میں انسان کی بے عزتی ہوتی ہے۔ اس لئے ایسی سزا مقرر کی جس سے عورت عام طور پر محلہ میں نہ پھر سکے۔ ہاں اگر اس میں مرد ظلم سے کام لے تو عورت کو قاضی کے پاس شکایت کرنے کی اجازت ہے۔
2:229.
2:238; 4:33.
Qawwamun is derived from Qama and Qama ‘Alal-Mar’ati means, he undertook the maintenance of the woman; he protected her. Qawwamun, therefore, means, maintainers, managers of affairs; protectors (Lisan). The verse gives two reasons why man has been made the head of the family, (a) his superior mental and physical faculties; and (b) his being the bread-earner and maintainer of the family. It is, therefore, natural and fair that he, who earns and supplies the money for the maintenance of the family, should enjoy a supervisory status in the disposal of its affairs.
Nashazatu-Mar’atu ‘ala Zauji-ha means, the woman rose against her husband; resisted him; deserted him (Lane & Taj).
The clause may signify, (a) abstention from conjugal relations; (b) sleeping in separate beds; (c) ceasing to talk to them. These measures are not to remain in force for an indefinite period, for wives are not to be left like a thing suspended (4:130). Four months, according to the Qur’an, is the maximum limit for abstention from conjugal relations, i.e. practical separation (2:227). If the husband deems the affair to be sufficiently grave, he will have to observe the conditions mentioned in 4:16.
The Holy Prophet is reported to have said that if at all a Muslim has to beat his wife, the beating should not be such as to leave any mark on her body (Tirmidhi & Muslim) but the husbands who beat their wives are not the best among men (Kathir, iii).
2:229.
2:238; 4:33.
Important Words:
قوامون (guardians) is derived from قام i.e. he stood. They say قام علیه i.e. he tended or took care of it or him. قام بالیتم means, he maintained the orphan. قام علی المرأة means, he undertook the maintenance of the woman; he undertook or managed her affairs; he protected her, or became her guardian. قوم الشیء (qawwama) means, he set the thing right, or made it straight or even. قوام therefore means, one who manages affairs well; a ruler or governor; one in a position to issue orders (Lane & Aqrab).
قانتات (obedient) is the plural of قانتة being the active participle from قنت. They say قنت لله i.e. he was obedient to God. امرأة قنوت means, a woman humble, submissive and obedient to her husband (Lane). See also 2:117.
نشوز (disobedience) is the noun-infinitive from نشز i.e. he rose or raised himself. نشزت المرأة علی زوجھا means, the woman rose against, or was disobedient to her husband and exalted herself against him and resisted him and was an evil companion to him. نشز المرء علی زوجته means, the husband treated his wife unjustly and was unkind to her or forsook her or hated her and was an evil companion to her (Lane & Aqrab).
اھجروھن (leave them alone). ھجر means, he cut him off from friendly or loving communion or intercourse; he forsook or abandoned him; he "cut" him, i.e. he boycotted him and ceased to speak to him or to associate with him. ھجر الشیء means, he forsook, or abandoned the thing; he shunned or avoided it. ھجر زوجته means, he separated himself from his wife or kept away from her (Lane & Mufradat).
اضربوھن (chastise them) is derived from ضرب. They say ضربه i.e. he beat, struck, smote or hit him (with hand, stick, etc.); hence, he chastised him.
علیا (High) is derived from علا i.e. he or it was or became high, elevated, lofty or exalted. تعالی means, he was or became high, elevated, exalted or supremely exalted or extolled. علی means high, elevated or lofty in rank, condition or state. العلیwhich is one of the attributive names of God (e.g. 2:256) means, the High; the Most High; He above Whom is nothing. المتعالی is also an attributive name of God (e.g. 13:10) meaning, He Who is Great or Supremely Great, the High or the Most High; One Higher than every other high one. تعال means, come thou, as if said by a man in a high place when calling upon a man in a low place, but is also used generally (Lane).
Commentary:
The verse gives two reasons why man has been made the head of the family: (a) his superior mental and physical powers; (b) his being bread-earner and maintainer of the family. It is natural and fair that he who earns and supplies the money should have the final say in the disposal of affairs.
The word قانتات (obedient) spoken of wives may mean either obedient to God, or to husbands.
The expression, guard the secrets of their husbands, means that when the husbands are at home, they are obedient to them and guard their secrets; and when they are away, they not only guard their secrets but take care of their property and guard their own chastity.
The clause, leave them alone in their beds, may mean: (a) abstention from conjugal relations with them; (b) sleeping in separate beds; or (c) ceasing to talk to them. The use of the word "beds" also incidentally implies that the disobedient wives are to stay at home and are not to be allowed to leave or be turned out of their homes.
The measures mentioned in the verse are not to remain in force for an indefinite period, for wives are not to be left like a thing suspended (4:130). Four months, according to the Quran, is the utmost limit for abstention from conjugal relations, i.e. for practical separation (2:227).
If the husband deems the affair to be sufficiently grave, he will have to observe the conditions mentioned in 4:16.
Regarding "chastisement" mentioned as a last resort in the verse under comment a Companion reports the Holy Prophet to have said that if at all a Muslim has to beat his wife, the beating should not be such as to leave any mark on her body (Tirmidhi, ch. on Rida‘). According to Abu Dawud and Nasa’i, the Holy Prophet forbade the beating of women at all, but when ‘Umar complained that they had become refractory, he gave the permission with the aforementioned condition; but on complaint of ill-treatment of women by their husbands he indignantly said that the husbands who beat their wives were not the best among men (Kathir, iii). On another occasion the Holy Prophet is reported to have said: "The best among you is he who treats his wife best and I am the best of you in this respect" (Tirmidhi).
The Divine attributes of "High and Great" mentioned at the end of the verse are also intended to warn husbands that the chastisement of their wives, if at all resorted to should not be unjust or vindictive or highhanded; for if they are high and great above their wives, there is One Who is High and Great above all and He shall call husbands to account for any improper use of the qualified authority given to them over their wives.
b
2:238; 4:33.
c
2:229.
326
قَوّٰمُوْن (Qawwamun) 源自 قَامَ عَلَى الْمَرْأَةِ (Qama ‘Alal-Mar’ati) 意指他负责赡养妇女; 他保护她。因此, قَوّٰمُوْن (Qawwamun) 意指赡养者, 事务管理人; 保护人 (لِسَانْ, Lisan)。经文对男人为什么一直作为家庭之主, 说明了两条道理: (a) 他优越的智力与体力; (b) 他是家庭中谋生者和赡养人。因此, 为赡养家庭而谋生计并给钱的他, 处理家事中享有监管的地位, 这是自然而公正的。
327
نَشَزَتِ الْمَرْأَةُ عَلٰی زَوْجِهَا (Nashazatil-Mar’atu ‘ala Zauji-ha) 意指妇女起来反对她的丈夫; 反抗他; 遗弃他 (Lane & تَاجْ, Taj)。
328
这一句话可以解释为 (a) 违避夫妻关系; (b) 分床睡觉; (c) 不与她们讲话。这些办法并不是无限期实行的方法, 因为妻子不可能像东西那样悬挂起来。(4:130) 按照 «古兰经» 戒绝夫妻关系即实际分离, 最长期限为四个月。(2:227) 如果丈夫认为事情很严重, 他将必须奉行4:16中所提到的各项条件。
329
据传穆圣说过, 如果一个穆斯林既然非得打他妻子不可, 也不能在她身上打出伤痕来。(تِرْمِذِی, Tirmidhi & مُسْلِمْ, Muslim) 但打妻子的丈夫总不是你们男人中最好的。(كَثِيْر, Kathir, iii)
2
نافرمانی سے اس جگہ زنا مرادنہیں بلکہ اس سے اتر کر گناہ مراد ہے جن سے ہمسایوں میں انسان کی بے عزتی ہوتی ہے۔ اس لئے ایسی سزا مقرر کی جس سے عورت عام طور پر محلہ میں نہ پھر سکے۔ ہاں اگر اس میں مرد ظلم سے کام لے تو عورت کو قاضی کے پاس شکایت کرنے کی اجازت ہے۔
b
2:229.
c
2:238; 4:33.
512
Important Words:
قوامون (guardians) is derived from قام i.e. he stood. They say قام علیه i.e. he tended or took care of it or him. قام بالیتم means, he maintained the orphan. قام علی المرأة means, he undertook the maintenance of the woman; he undertook or managed her affairs; he protected her, or became her guardian. قوم الشیء (qawwama) means, he set the thing right, or made it straight or even. قوام therefore means, one who manages affairs well; a ruler or governor; one in a position to issue orders (Lane & Aqrab).
قانتات (obedient) is the plural of قانتة being the active participle from قنت. They say قنت لله i.e. he was obedient to God. امرأة قنوت means, a woman humble, submissive and obedient to her husband (Lane). See also 2:117.
نشوز (disobedience) is the noun-infinitive from نشز i.e. he rose or raised himself. نشزت المرأة علی زوجھا means, the woman rose against, or was disobedient to her husband and exalted herself against him and resisted him and was an evil companion to him. نشز المرء علی زوجته means, the husband treated his wife unjustly and was unkind to her or forsook her or hated her and was an evil companion to her (Lane & Aqrab).
اھجروھن (leave them alone). ھجر means, he cut him off from friendly or loving communion or intercourse; he forsook or abandoned him; he "cut" him, i.e. he boycotted him and ceased to speak to him or to associate with him. ھجر الشیء means, he forsook, or abandoned the thing; he shunned or avoided it. ھجر زوجته means, he separated himself from his wife or kept away from her (Lane & Mufradat).
اضربوھن (chastise them) is derived from ضرب. They say ضربه i.e. he beat, struck, smote or hit him (with hand, stick, etc.); hence, he chastised him.
علیا (High) is derived from علا i.e. he or it was or became high, elevated, lofty or exalted. تعالی means, he was or became high, elevated, exalted or supremely exalted or extolled. علی means high, elevated or lofty in rank, condition or state. العلیwhich is one of the attributive names of God (e.g. 2:256) means, the High; the Most High; He above Whom is nothing. المتعالی is also an attributive name of God (e.g. 13:10) meaning, He Who is Great or Supremely Great, the High or the Most High; One Higher than every other high one. تعال means, come thou, as if said by a man in a high place when calling upon a man in a low place, but is also used generally (Lane).
Commentary:
The verse gives two reasons why man has been made the head of the family: (a) his superior mental and physical powers; (b) his being bread-earner and maintainer of the family. It is natural and fair that he who earns and supplies the money should have the final say in the disposal of affairs.
The word قانتات (obedient) spoken of wives may mean either obedient to God, or to husbands.
The expression, guard the secrets of their husbands, means that when the husbands are at home, they are obedient to them and guard their secrets; and when they are away, they not only guard their secrets but take care of their property and guard their own chastity.
The clause, leave them alone in their beds, may mean: (a) abstention from conjugal relations with them; (b) sleeping in separate beds; or (c) ceasing to talk to them. The use of the word "beds" also incidentally implies that the disobedient wives are to stay at home and are not to be allowed to leave or be turned out of their homes.
The measures mentioned in the verse are not to remain in force for an indefinite period, for wives are not to be left like a thing suspended (4:130). Four months, according to the Quran, is the utmost limit for abstention from conjugal relations, i.e. for practical separation (2:227).
If the husband deems the affair to be sufficiently grave, he will have to observe the conditions mentioned in 4:16.
Regarding "chastisement" mentioned as a last resort in the verse under comment a Companion reports the Holy Prophet to have said that if at all a Muslim has to beat his wife, the beating should not be such as to leave any mark on her body (Tirmidhi, ch. on Rida‘). According to Abu Dawud and Nasa’i, the Holy Prophet forbade the beating of women at all, but when ‘Umar complained that they had become refractory, he gave the permission with the aforementioned condition; but on complaint of ill-treatment of women by their husbands he indignantly said that the husbands who beat their wives were not the best among men (Kathir, iii). On another occasion the Holy Prophet is reported to have said: "The best among you is he who treats his wife best and I am the best of you in this respect" (Tirmidhi).
The Divine attributes of "High and Great" mentioned at the end of the verse are also intended to warn husbands that the chastisement of their wives, if at all resorted to should not be unjust or vindictive or highhanded; for if they are high and great above their wives, there is One Who is High and Great above all and He shall call husbands to account for any improper use of the qualified authority given to them over their wives.
a
2:229.
b
2:238; 4:33.
598
Qawwamun is derived from Qama and Qama ‘Alal-Mar’ati means, he undertook the maintenance of the woman; he protected her. Qawwamun, therefore, means, maintainers, managers of affairs; protectors (Lisan). The verse gives two reasons why man has been made the head of the family, (a) his superior mental and physical faculties; and (b) his being the bread-earner and maintainer of the family. It is, therefore, natural and fair that he, who earns and supplies the money for the maintenance of the family, should enjoy a supervisory status in the disposal of its affairs.
599
Nashazatu-Mar’atu ‘ala Zauji-ha means, the woman rose against her husband; resisted him; deserted him (Lane & Taj).
600
The clause may signify, (a) abstention from conjugal relations; (b) sleeping in separate beds; (c) ceasing to talk to them. These measures are not to remain in force for an indefinite period, for wives are not to be left like a thing suspended (4:130). Four months, according to the Qur’an, is the maximum limit for abstention from conjugal relations, i.e. practical separation (2:227). If the husband deems the affair to be sufficiently grave, he will have to observe the conditions mentioned in 4:16.
601
The Holy Prophet is reported to have said that if at all a Muslim has to beat his wife, the beating should not be such as to leave any mark on her body (Tirmidhi & Muslim) but the husbands who beat their wives are not the best among men (Kathir, iii).
یٰۤاَیُّہَا الَّذِیۡنَ اٰمَنُوۡۤا اَطِیۡعُوا اللّٰہَ وَاَطِیۡعُوا الرَّسُوۡلَ وَاُولِی الۡاَمۡرِ مِنۡکُمۡ ۖ فَاِنۡ تَنٰزَعۡتُمۡ فِیۡ شَیۡءٍ فَرُدُّوۡہُ اِلَی اللّٰہِ وَالرَّسُوۡلِ اِنۡ کُنۡتُمۡ تُؤۡمِنُوۡنَ بِاللّٰہِ وَالۡیَوۡمِ الۡاٰخِرِ ۚ ذٰلِکَ خَیۡرٌ وَّاَحۡسَنُ تَاۡوِیۡلًا
4:84.
4:66.
为了指出对由法律恰当地指定的权威的服从就是对安拉和安拉的使者的服从, “服从” 这词是重复用在 “安拉” 和 “使者” 这两词前面, 而在那些 “当权的” 字句前面这词是省略的。体现在 “把它交给安拉和安拉的使者” 这句话中的指令可以指统治者之间的分歧, 也可以指被统治者内部的分歧。就前者而言就是, 如果统治者与被统治者对某事产生不同意见, 就应该按照 «古兰经» 的教导来决定;如意见不能一致就在圣行和圣训中找根据。可是, 如果 «古兰经»、圣行和圣训对此问题均未曾提到, 就应该留待有权处理穆斯林之间事务的当局去解决。这节经文似乎提到了那些特别跟国家大事有关的事情。在这方面的基本指令是, 对权力的完全服从不能超过安拉和他的使者的服从。可是, “如果对于社会问题等有不同意见和争论” 正如经文提及:“如果你们有分歧”, 那么, 应该按伊斯兰经典而不是按任何其它法律。
4:84
4:66
The word "obey" which has been repeated before the words "Allah" and "Messenger" has been omitted before the words, those who are in authority, in order to point out that obedience to the authority properly constituted by Law amounts to obedience to God and His Messenger. The injunction embodied in the words, "refer it to Allah and His Messenger" may either relate to differences between the rulers and the ruled or to those among the ruled themselves. In the former case the significance is that if there is a matter on which disagreement arises between the rulers and the ruled, it should be decided in the light of the Quranic teaching, or failing that, in that of the Sunnah and the Hadith. If, however, the Qur’an, the Sunnah and the Hadith are silent on the question, it should be left to those in whom is vested the authority to manage the affairs of Muslims. The verse seems to refer to matters concerning particularly the affairs of the State. The basic commandment in this respect is that all obedien
4:84.
4:66.
Important Words:
اولی الامر (those in authority) is made up of two words: (1) اولی which is originally اولوا meaning, possessors of or possessing or having; and (2) امر meaning, rule, authority, command, affair or matter, etc. اولی الامر means: (1) those who possess or hold authority command or rule; and (2) the learned men who, as it were, possess authority in knowledge (Taj & Aqrab).
Commentary:
The word "obey" which has been repeated before the words "Allah" and "Messenger" has been omitted before the words, those who are in authority, in order to point out that obedience to the authority properly constituted by Law is in reality obedience to God and His Messenger.
The clause, refer it to Allah and His Messenger, means that in case of difference, the matter should be referred to the Quran and the authentic Sunnah and Hadith of the Holy Prophet. The injunction may either relate to differences between the rulers and the ruled or to those among the ruled themselves. In the former case, the significance is that if there is a matter on which disagreement arises between the rulers and the ruled, it should be decided in the light of the Quranic teaching, or failing that, in that of the authentic Sunnah and Hadith. If, however, the Quran, the Sunnah and Hadith are silent on the question, it should be left in the hands of those in whom is vested the authority to manage the affairs of Muslims; and the latter are enjoined to abide by their decision even if they do not see eye to eye with them, because true obedience consists in obeying against one’s will and judgement. The words, refer it to Allah and His Messenger, may also mean that in case of a difference between the people and those in authority, the former are enjoined to do as Allah and His Messenger have bidden them to do on such occasions, i.e. that in such a case they should obey those in authority.
Primarily, however, the words, if you differ, do not refer to any differences between the rulers and the ruled but to disagreements arising among the ruled themselves. In this case the injunction embodied in the verse is that in matters pertaining to discipline and administration, Muslims should obey those in authority, but in disputes and differences regarding social matters, etc. they should be guided by the Law of Islam and not by other laws. This is the interpretation which Ibn Kathir (iii. 130-31) has adopted and which is in keeping with the context. The next verse also refers only to disputes among the ruled, and not to those between rulers and ruled.
The words, those in authority, in their wider significance include even such non-Muslims as may happen to be in authority over Muslims. In this case the additional words منکم would not mean "from among you" but simply "among you", i.e. "over you". The practice of the Holy Prophet as well as his sayings make it clear that in secular matters Muslims should obey even such of their rulers as are not Muslims.
a
4:84.
b
4:66.
332
为了指出对由法律恰当地指定的权威的服从就是对安拉和安拉的使者的服从, “服从” 这词是重复用在 “安拉” 和 “使者” 这两词前面, 而在那些 “当权的” 字句前面这词是省略的。体现在 “把它交给安拉和安拉的使者” 这句话中的指令可以指统治者之间的分歧, 也可以指被统治者内部的分歧。就前者而言就是, 如果统治者与被统治者对某事产生不同意见, 就应该按照 «古兰经» 的教导来决定;如意见不能一致就在圣行和圣训中找根据。可是, 如果 «古兰经»、圣行和圣训对此问题均未曾提到, 就应该留待有权处理穆斯林之间事务的当局去解决。这节经文似乎提到了那些特别跟国家大事有关的事情。在这方面的基本指令是, 对权力的完全服从不能超过安拉和他的使者的服从。可是, “如果对于社会问题等有不同意见和争论” 正如经文提及:“如果你们有分歧”, 那么, 应该按伊斯兰经典而不是按任何其它法律。
a
4:84.
b
4:66.
533
Important Words:
اولی الامر (those in authority) is made up of two words: (1) اولی which is originally اولوا meaning, possessors of or possessing or having; and (2) امر meaning, rule, authority, command, affair or matter, etc. اولی الامر means: (1) those who possess or hold authority command or rule; and (2) the learned men who, as it were, possess authority in knowledge (Taj & Aqrab).
Commentary:
The word "obey" which has been repeated before the words "Allah" and "Messenger" has been omitted before the words, those who are in authority, in order to point out that obedience to the authority properly constituted by Law is in reality obedience to God and His Messenger.
The clause, refer it to Allah and His Messenger, means that in case of difference, the matter should be referred to the Quran and the authentic Sunnah and Hadith of the Holy Prophet. The injunction may either relate to differences between the rulers and the ruled or to those among the ruled themselves. In the former case, the significance is that if there is a matter on which disagreement arises between the rulers and the ruled, it should be decided in the light of the Quranic teaching, or failing that, in that of the authentic Sunnah and Hadith. If, however, the Quran, the Sunnah and Hadith are silent on the question, it should be left in the hands of those in whom is vested the authority to manage the affairs of Muslims; and the latter are enjoined to abide by their decision even if they do not see eye to eye with them, because true obedience consists in obeying against one’s will and judgement. The words, refer it to Allah and His Messenger, may also mean that in case of a difference between the people and those in authority, the former are enjoined to do as Allah and His Messenger have bidden them to do on such occasions, i.e. that in such a case they should obey those in authority.
Primarily, however, the words, if you differ, do not refer to any differences between the rulers and the ruled but to disagreements arising among the ruled themselves. In this case the injunction embodied in the verse is that in matters pertaining to discipline and administration, Muslims should obey those in authority, but in disputes and differences regarding social matters, etc. they should be guided by the Law of Islam and not by other laws. This is the interpretation which Ibn Kathir (iii. 130-31) has adopted and which is in keeping with the context. The next verse also refers only to disputes among the ruled, and not to those between rulers and ruled.
The words, those in authority, in their wider significance include even such non-Muslims as may happen to be in authority over Muslims. In this case the additional words منکم would not mean "from among you" but simply "among you", i.e. "over you". The practice of the Holy Prophet as well as his sayings make it clear that in secular matters Muslims should obey even such of their rulers as are not Muslims.
a
4:84
b
4:66
623
The word "obey" which has been repeated before the words "Allah" and "Messenger" has been omitted before the words, those who are in authority, in order to point out that obedience to the authority properly constituted by Law amounts to obedience to God and His Messenger. The injunction embodied in the words, "refer it to Allah and His Messenger" may either relate to differences between the rulers and the ruled or to those among the ruled themselves. In the former case the significance is that if there is a matter on which disagreement arises between the rulers and the ruled, it should be decided in the light of the Quranic teaching, or failing that, in that of the Sunnah and the Hadith. If, however, the Qur’an, the Sunnah and the Hadith are silent on the question, it should be left to those in whom is vested the authority to manage the affairs of Muslims. The verse seems to refer to matters concerning particularly the affairs of the State. The basic commandment in this respect is that all obedien
وَاِنَّ مِنۡکُمۡ لَمَنۡ لَّیُبَطِّئَنَّ فَاِنۡ اَصٰبَتۡکُمۡ مُّصِیۡبَۃٌ قَالَ قَدۡ اَنۡعَمَ اللّٰہُ عَلَیَّ اِذۡ لَمۡ اَکُنۡ مَّعَہُمۡ شَہِیۡدًا
The verse refers to Hypocrites or the internal enemies of Islam and mentions their two prominent traits.
Important Words:
لیبطئن (tarries behind) is derived from بطؤ meaning, he was or became slow, late or backward. بطأ means, it made him slow, late or backward. But بطأ is also used intransitively, as in the tradition من بطأبه عمله i.e. he whom his evil deeds hold back (lit. he whose evil deeds keep back along with him). So بطأ would mean, (1) he held back or tarried behind, and (2) he made others hold back and tarry behind (Aqrab, Lane, Mufradat & Kashshaf).
Commentary:
This verse refers to the internal enemies of Islam. It gives two characteristics of hypocrites: (1) they fail to march out with Muslims and are glad to do so; (2) they do not share with Muslims their joys and sorrows. They are more anxious about their own selves than about the success of Islam. If Muslims meet with trouble, they rejoice that they themselves escaped it by remaining behind, and exultingly remind Muslims of the advice which they gave them and by acting against which the Muslims came to grief, as they did after the Battle of Uhud.
It is worthy of note here that though in connection with the Battle of Uhud, the Holy Prophet himself was at first in favour of fighting the enemy by staying in Medina, he did not rebuke the Muslims when they suffered a reverse by telling them that they had met with a disaster by going against his wish. But the hypocrites did taunt the Muslims that they had suffered defeat by defying their advice. It is for this taunting that the hypocrites have been reprimanded in this verse, because such a course, if allowed, is calculated to prove detrimental to the cause of communal unity and concord.
544
Important Words:
لیبطئن (tarries behind) is derived from بطؤ meaning, he was or became slow, late or backward. بطأ means, it made him slow, late or backward. But بطأ is also used intransitively, as in the tradition من بطأبه عمله i.e. he whom his evil deeds hold back (lit. he whose evil deeds keep back along with him). So بطأ would mean, (1) he held back or tarried behind, and (2) he made others hold back and tarry behind (Aqrab, Lane, Mufradat & Kashshaf).
Commentary:
This verse refers to the internal enemies of Islam. It gives two characteristics of hypocrites: (1) they fail to march out with Muslims and are glad to do so; (2) they do not share with Muslims their joys and sorrows. They are more anxious about their own selves than about the success of Islam. If Muslims meet with trouble, they rejoice that they themselves escaped it by remaining behind, and exultingly remind Muslims of the advice which they gave them and by acting against which the Muslims came to grief, as they did after the Battle of Uhud.
It is worthy of note here that though in connection with the Battle of Uhud, the Holy Prophet himself was at first in favour of fighting the enemy by staying in Medina, he did not rebuke the Muslims when they suffered a reverse by telling them that they had met with a disaster by going against his wish. But the hypocrites did taunt the Muslims that they had suffered defeat by defying their advice. It is for this taunting that the hypocrites have been reprimanded in this verse, because such a course, if allowed, is calculated to prove detrimental to the cause of communal unity and concord.
632
The verse refers to Hypocrites or the internal enemies of Islam and mentions their two prominent traits.
وَدُّوۡا لَوۡ تَکۡفُرُوۡنَ کَمَا کَفَرُوۡا فَتَکُوۡنُوۡنَ سَوَآءً ۖ فَلَا تَتَّخِذُوۡا مِنۡہُمۡ اَوۡلِیَآءَ حَتّٰی یُہَاجِرُوۡا فِیۡ سَبِیۡلِ اللّٰہِ ۚ فَاِنۡ تَوَلَّوۡا فَخُذُوۡہُمۡ وَاقۡتُلُوۡہُمۡ حَیۡثُ وَجَدتُّمُوۡہُمۡ ۖ وَلَا تَتَّخِذُوۡا مِنۡہُمۡ وَلِیًّا وَّلَا نَصِیۡرًا
یہ ان منافقوں کا ذکر ہے جو کفار کے ملک میں رہتے تھے اور جب مسلمانوں کو بڑھتا دیکھتے تھے کفار کی مدد کرنے لگتے تھے تا مسلمانوں کو یہ کہہ کر دھوکا دیں کہ وہ مسلمان ہیں اور کافروں کو اپنی مدد سے دھوکا دیں۔
’’پھر جائیں‘‘ سے یہ مراد ہے کہ رسول کی اطاعت کے متعلق ہمارے حکم کو نہ مانیں۔
2:110; 4:45; 14:14.
The reference is to the Bedouin tribes of the desert. The Qur’an forbids Muslims to have anything to do with them, or make friends with them or seek their help.
As Qatl is also used in the sense of severing all social contacts (2:62), the expression Uqtuluhum may also mean, "have nothing to do with them." This meaning of the expression finds support from the words, take no friend nor helper from among them.
2:110; 4:45; 14:14.
Commentary:
The word کفر (disbelief) as used in this verse stands for hypocrisy, as a hypocrite is none but a disbeliever at heart. The hypocrites belonging to the Bedouin tribes of the desert, referred to in the preceding verse, claimed to be believers but rendered no help to Islam. Believers are enjoined to have nothing to do with them.
The words, until they migrate in the way of Allah, show that the hypocrites referred to in this verse did not belong to the town of Medina but to outside territory. They attached no value to faith and through cowardice wished that all should become like themselves, making friends with the enemies of Islam and mixing with them as they liked. The Quran forbids Muslims to take such people as friends, or to seek help from them, unless they migrate in the way of God and sever all connection with the enemy.
As the word قتل is also used in the sense of boycotting (see 2:62), the words اقتلوھم (kill them) may also mean boycott them, i.e. have nothing to do with them; treat them in the same manner in which you treat those with whom they have made common cause. This meaning finds support in the fact that the expression اقتلوھم (kill them) is followed by the words, take no friend nor helper from among them.
a
2:110; 4:45; 14:14.
339
由于قَتْل (Qatl) 也有 “与…断绝一切社会接触” 的意思 (2:62), اُقْتُلُوْهُمْ (Uqtuluhum) 这一用语也可以作 “与他们没有关系” 解。这一意义在 “不要把他们当作朋友和帮助者” 这句话中得到证实。
2
یہ ان منافقوں کا ذکر ہے جو کفار کے ملک میں رہتے تھے اور جب مسلمانوں کو بڑھتا دیکھتے تھے کفار کی مدد کرنے لگتے تھے تا مسلمانوں کو یہ کہہ کر دھوکا دیں کہ وہ مسلمان ہیں اور کافروں کو اپنی مدد سے دھوکا دیں۔
3
’’پھر جائیں‘‘ سے یہ مراد ہے کہ رسول کی اطاعت کے متعلق ہمارے حکم کو نہ مانیں۔
a
2:110; 4:45; 14:14.
558
Commentary:
The word کفر (disbelief) as used in this verse stands for hypocrisy, as a hypocrite is none but a disbeliever at heart. The hypocrites belonging to the Bedouin tribes of the desert, referred to in the preceding verse, claimed to be believers but rendered no help to Islam. Believers are enjoined to have nothing to do with them.
The words, until they migrate in the way of Allah, show that the hypocrites referred to in this verse did not belong to the town of Medina but to outside territory. They attached no value to faith and through cowardice wished that all should become like themselves, making friends with the enemies of Islam and mixing with them as they liked. The Quran forbids Muslims to take such people as friends, or to seek help from them, unless they migrate in the way of God and sever all connection with the enemy.
As the word قتل is also used in the sense of boycotting (see 2:62), the words اقتلوھم (kill them) may also mean boycott them, i.e. have nothing to do with them; treat them in the same manner in which you treat those with whom they have made common cause. This meaning finds support in the fact that the expression اقتلوھم (kill them) is followed by the words, take no friend nor helper from among them.
a
2:110; 4:45; 14:14.
645
The reference is to the Bedouin tribes of the desert. The Qur’an forbids Muslims to have anything to do with them, or make friends with them or seek their help.
646
As Qatl is also used in the sense of severing all social contacts (2:62), the expression Uqtuluhum may also mean, "have nothing to do with them." This meaning of the expression finds support from the words, take no friend nor helper from among them.
سَتَجِدُوۡنَ اٰخَرِیۡنَ یُرِیۡدُوۡنَ اَنۡ یَّاۡمَنُوۡکُمۡ وَیَاۡمَنُوۡا قَوۡمَہُمۡ کُلَّ مَا رُدُّوۡۤا اِلَی الۡفِتۡنَۃِ اُرۡکِسُوۡا فِیۡہَا ۚ فَاِنۡ لَّمۡ یَعۡتَزِلُوۡکُمۡ وَیُلۡقُوۡۤا اِلَیۡکُمُ السَّلَمَ وَیَکُفُّوۡۤا اَیۡدِیَہُمۡ فَخُذُوۡہُمۡ وَاقۡتُلُوۡہُمۡ حَیۡثُ ثَقِفۡتُمُوۡہُمۡ ۚ وَاُولٰٓئِکُمۡ جَعَلۡنَا لَکُمۡ عَلَیۡہِمۡ سُلۡطٰنًا مُّبِیۡنًا
33:15.
اوپر کی آیت میں معاہدین کا ذکر تھا۔ اس آیت میں منافقوں کا ذکر ہے۔ پس سلوک کا فرق حالات کی وجہ سے ہے۔
33:15.
9:5.
The reference seems to be to the two tribes, Asad and Ghatfan who had no treaty of alliance with the Muslims. They played a double game and awaited their opportunity. When invited by their people to join them in fighting against the Muslims, they readily accepted the invitation. The directions contained in these verses come into operation when a virtual state of war exists and danger stalks along the land.
By Fitnah is here meant, war with the Muslims.
33:15.
9:5.
Important Words:
ارکسوا (fall headlong) is in the passive voice and the right translation of it would be, "are made to fall headlong", or "are overthrown" etc. but for the sake of clearness the word has been translated here in the active voice. ارکسوا is formed from رکس. They say رکس الشیء i.e. he turned the thing over or upside down. ارکس الشیء means, he turned the thing to its former state; he turned or threw it over upon its head; he reversed it or turned it back; he made the first part of it to be the last. أرکس الله عدوك means, may God turn thine enemy upon his head; or may He overthrow him or change or reverse his condition (Lane & Aqrab).
الفتنة (hostility) generally meaning, (1) persecution, (2) mischief, (3) discord and dissension, (4) civil war, etc., also means war, i.e. hostility (Lane). See also 2:192.
سلطان (authority) is the noun-infinitive from سلط which means, he or it overcame, prevailed or predominated; he became firm or established in superior power; he possessed power or dominion or sovereignty; he was or became sharp; it was or became hard or strong; he was or became chaste or perspicuous in speech, or eloquent and sharp in tongue. They say قد جعلت لك سلطانا علی اخذ حقی من فلان i.e. I have given you the power or authority to take my dues from such a one. سلطان means, strength, might, force or power; predominance; power or authority; the sovereign or ruling power; king or ruler; sharpness; hardness; proof or argument; evidence; plea (Lane & Aqrab).
Commentary:
The reference in this verse is to those people who had no alliance with Muslims or any tribe having an alliance with them. They were time-servers who awaited their opportunity. The difference between these people and those mentioned in the previous verse is that the latter had some sort of alliance with this or that party though they did not
possess the strength to assert themselves, while the former only sought security by deceitful means and hastened to make common cause with the enemies of Islam whenever invited to do so. Fighting was enjoined against this class of people, unless they entered into a treaty of peace with Muslims and loyally observed its terms.
a
33:15.
1
اوپر کی آیت میں معاہدین کا ذکر تھا۔ اس آیت میں منافقوں کا ذکر ہے۔ پس سلوک کا فرق حالات کی وجہ سے ہے۔
a
33:15.
b
9:5.
560
Important Words:
ارکسوا (fall headlong) is in the passive voice and the right translation of it would be, "are made to fall headlong", or "are overthrown" etc. but for the sake of clearness the word has been translated here in the active voice. ارکسوا is formed from رکس. They say رکس الشیء i.e. he turned the thing over or upside down. ارکس الشیء means, he turned the thing to its former state; he turned or threw it over upon its head; he reversed it or turned it back; he made the first part of it to be the last. أرکس الله عدوك means, may God turn thine enemy upon his head; or may He overthrow him or change or reverse his condition (Lane & Aqrab).
الفتنة (hostility) generally meaning, (1) persecution, (2) mischief, (3) discord and dissension, (4) civil war, etc., also means war, i.e. hostility (Lane). See also 2:192.
سلطان (authority) is the noun-infinitive from سلط which means, he or it overcame, prevailed or predominated; he became firm or established in superior power; he possessed power or dominion or sovereignty; he was or became sharp; it was or became hard or strong; he was or became chaste or perspicuous in speech, or eloquent and sharp in tongue. They say قد جعلت لك سلطانا علی اخذ حقی من فلان i.e. I have given you the power or authority to take my dues from such a one. سلطان means, strength, might, force or power; predominance; power or authority; the sovereign or ruling power; king or ruler; sharpness; hardness; proof or argument; evidence; plea (Lane & Aqrab).
Commentary:
The reference in this verse is to those people who had no alliance with Muslims or any tribe having an alliance with them. They were time-servers who awaited their opportunity. The difference between these people and those mentioned in the previous verse is that the latter had some sort of alliance with this or that party though they did not
possess the strength to assert themselves, while the former only sought security by deceitful means and hastened to make common cause with the enemies of Islam whenever invited to do so. Fighting was enjoined against this class of people, unless they entered into a treaty of peace with Muslims and loyally observed its terms.
a
33:15.
b
9:5.
647
The reference seems to be to the two tribes, Asad and Ghatfan who had no treaty of alliance with the Muslims. They played a double game and awaited their opportunity. When invited by their people to join them in fighting against the Muslims, they readily accepted the invitation. The directions contained in these verses come into operation when a virtual state of war exists and danger stalks along the land.
648
By Fitnah is here meant, war with the Muslims.
وَمَا کَانَ لِمُؤۡمِنٍ اَنۡ یَّقۡتُلَ مُؤۡمِنًا اِلَّا خَطَـًٔا ۚ وَمَنۡ قَتَلَ مُؤۡمِنًا خَطَـًٔا فَتَحۡرِیۡرُ رَقَبَۃٍ مُّؤۡمِنَۃٍ وَّدِیَۃٌ مُّسَلَّمَۃٌ اِلٰۤی اَہۡلِہٖۤ اِلَّاۤ اَنۡ یَّصَّدَّقُوۡا ۚ فَاِنۡ کَانَ مِنۡ قَوۡمٍ عَدُوٍّ لَّکُمۡ وَہُوَ مُؤۡمِنٌ فَتَحۡرِیۡرُ رَقَبَۃٍ مُّؤۡمِنَۃٍ ۖ وَّاِنۡ کَانَ مِنۡ قَوۡمٍۭ بَیۡنَکُمۡ وَبَیۡنَہُمۡ مِّیۡثٰقٌ فَدِیَۃٌ مُّسَلَّمَۃٌ اِلٰۤی اَہۡلِہٖ وَتَحۡرِیۡرُ رَقَبَۃٍ مُّؤۡمِنَۃٍ ۖ فَمَنۡ لَّمۡ یَجِدۡ فَصِیَامُ شَہۡرَیۡنِ مُتَتَابِعَیۡنِ تَوۡبَۃً مِّنَ اللّٰہِ ۗ وَکَانَ اللّٰہُ عَلِیۡمًا حَکِیۡمًا
58:5.
As when actual or virtual state of war exists there is the likelihood that a Muslim may be killed by another Muslim by mistake, the present verse gives a timely warning to Muslims to be always on their guard against such an eventuality.
In case the slain person is a believer but happens to belong to a hostile people, then the offender shall only free a believing slave and no blood-money shall be levied on him, because money paid to a hostile people would go to strengthen their military power against Islam. In the expression, and if he be of a people between whom and you is a pact, the words, and he be a believer, have not been repeated, in order to point out that the law with regard to the Dhimmis (disbelievers under the protection of Muslims), or Mu‘ahids (disbelievers belonging to a people in alliance with Muslims) is the same as for the Muslims.
It is worthy of note that disbelievers who are in alliance with Muslims have not only been placed on a par with the latter, but even a distinction has been made in their favour. In case a Muslim is slain, the command relating to the payment of penalty has been placed after the injunction to free a slave; while in case one belonging to a people in alliance with Muslims is slain, the order has been reversed; the injunction to pay the penalty to his heirs having been put before the injunction to free a slave. This has been done to impress upon Muslims the need of showing special regard for treaties and pacts. The payment of penalty was an obligation which Muslims owed to disbelievers with whom they had made a pact, and it is in order to bring home to them the lesson that they should have particular regard for their pacts and treaties, that the injunction to pay the penalty has in their case been placed before the injunction to free a slave.
58:5.
Commentary:
As the preceding verses contained injunctions which if misconstrued or misapplied, were likely to lead to a Muslim being killed by a Muslim, the present verse gives a timely warning against such an eventuality.
The words, It does not become a believer to kill a believer, have been used to make a touching appeal to believers to abstain from killing each other, since they are like brothers. It, in no case, behoves a brother to kill a brother. The words thus contain an important injunction which forms a fitting sequence to the one contained in the preceding verses concerning the hypocrites. The verse cautions a Muslim to be always on his guard lest in carelessness he should happen to kill a brother Muslim.
In case the slain person is a believer but happens to belong to a hostile people, then the offender shall only free a believing slave and no blood money shall be levied on him, because money paid to a hostile people would go to strengthen their military power against Islam which can in no case be allowed.
In the expression, and if he be of a people between whom and you is a pact, the words, and he be a believer, have not been repeated, in order to point out that the law with regard to the dhimmis (disbelievers under the protection of Muslims), or Mu‘ahids (disbelievers belonging to a people in alliance with Muslims) is the same as for Muslims.
It is worthy of note here that disbelievers who are in alliance with Muslims have not only been placed on a par with the latter, but even a distinction has been made in favour of the former. In case a Muslim is slain, the command relating to the payment of fine has been placed after the injunction to free a slave; while in case one belonging to a people in alliance with Muslims is slain, the order has been reversed, the injunction to pay the fine to his heirs being put before the injunction to free a slave. This has been done to impress upon Muslims the need of showing special regard for treaties and pacts. The payment of fine was an obligation which Muslims owed to disbelievers with whom they had made a pact, and in order to bring home to Muslims the lesson that they should have particular regard for their pacts and treaties, the injunction to pay the fine has in their case been placed before the injunction to free a slave.
a
9:5.
b
58:5.
a
58:5.
561
Commentary:
As the preceding verses contained injunctions which if misconstrued or misapplied, were likely to lead to a Muslim being killed by a Muslim, the present verse gives a timely warning against such an eventuality.
The words, It does not become a believer to kill a believer, have been used to make a touching appeal to believers to abstain from killing each other, since they are like brothers. It, in no case, behoves a brother to kill a brother. The words thus contain an important injunction which forms a fitting sequence to the one contained in the preceding verses concerning the hypocrites. The verse cautions a Muslim to be always on his guard lest in carelessness he should happen to kill a brother Muslim.
In case the slain person is a believer but happens to belong to a hostile people, then the offender shall only free a believing slave and no blood money shall be levied on him, because money paid to a hostile people would go to strengthen their military power against Islam which can in no case be allowed.
In the expression, and if he be of a people between whom and you is a pact, the words, and he be a believer, have not been repeated, in order to point out that the law with regard to the dhimmis (disbelievers under the protection of Muslims), or Mu‘ahids (disbelievers belonging to a people in alliance with Muslims) is the same as for Muslims.
It is worthy of note here that disbelievers who are in alliance with Muslims have not only been placed on a par with the latter, but even a distinction has been made in favour of the former. In case a Muslim is slain, the command relating to the payment of fine has been placed after the injunction to free a slave; while in case one belonging to a people in alliance with Muslims is slain, the order has been reversed, the injunction to pay the fine to his heirs being put before the injunction to free a slave. This has been done to impress upon Muslims the need of showing special regard for treaties and pacts. The payment of fine was an obligation which Muslims owed to disbelievers with whom they had made a pact, and in order to bring home to Muslims the lesson that they should have particular regard for their pacts and treaties, the injunction to pay the fine has in their case been placed before the injunction to free a slave.
a
58:5.
649
As when actual or virtual state of war exists there is the likelihood that a Muslim may be killed by another Muslim by mistake, the present verse gives a timely warning to Muslims to be always on their guard against such an eventuality.
650
In case the slain person is a believer but happens to belong to a hostile people, then the offender shall only free a believing slave and no blood-money shall be levied on him, because money paid to a hostile people would go to strengthen their military power against Islam. In the expression, and if he be of a people between whom and you is a pact, the words, and he be a believer, have not been repeated, in order to point out that the law with regard to the Dhimmis (disbelievers under the protection of Muslims), or Mu‘ahids (disbelievers belonging to a people in alliance with Muslims) is the same as for the Muslims.
651
It is worthy of note that disbelievers who are in alliance with Muslims have not only been placed on a par with the latter, but even a distinction has been made in their favour. In case a Muslim is slain, the command relating to the payment of penalty has been placed after the injunction to free a slave; while in case one belonging to a people in alliance with Muslims is slain, the order has been reversed; the injunction to pay the penalty to his heirs having been put before the injunction to free a slave. This has been done to impress upon Muslims the need of showing special regard for treaties and pacts. The payment of penalty was an obligation which Muslims owed to disbelievers with whom they had made a pact, and it is in order to bring home to them the lesson that they should have particular regard for their pacts and treaties, that the injunction to pay the penalty has in their case been placed before the injunction to free a slave.
اَلَّذِیۡنَ یَتَرَبَّصُوۡنَ بِکُمۡ فَاِنۡ کَانَ لَکُمۡ فَتۡحٌ مِّنَ اللّٰہِ قَالُوۡۤا اَلَمۡ نَکُنۡ مَّعَکُمۡ وَاِنۡ کَانَ لِلۡکٰفِرِیۡنَ نَصِیۡبٌ قَالُوۡۤا اَلَمۡ نَسۡتَحۡوِذۡ عَلَیۡکُمۡ وَنَمۡنَعۡکُمۡ مِّنَ الۡمُؤۡمِنِیۡنَ ۚ فَاللّٰہُ یَحۡکُمُ بَیۡنَکُمۡ یَوۡمَ الۡقِیٰمَۃِ ۗ وَلَنۡ یَّجۡعَلَ اللّٰہُ لِلۡکٰفِرِیۡنَ عَلَی الۡمُؤۡمِنِیۡنَ سَبِیۡلًا
9:98; 57:15.
یعنی اس سے پہلے ایک موقع پر کیا مسلمان غالب نہیں آگئے تھے۔ جو ہماری ہی فتح تھی۔ مگر ہم نے ان سے سفارشیں کرکے تم کو بچا لیا۔
9:98; 57:15.
9:98; 57:15.
Important Words:
نستحوذ علیکم (get the better of you). نستحوذ is derived from حاذ. They say حاذہ i.e. he guarded or protected it and took care of it. حاذ الابل means, he drove the camels quickly or he gained mastery over the camels and collected them together. استحوذ علیهmeans, he overcame or mastered or gained mastery of him or it; he got the better of him or it (Taj).
نمنعکم (protected you) is derived from منع i.e. (1) he prevented or hindered: (2) he denied or refused (3) he protected or guarded (Lane).
Commentary:
The words, did we not get the better of you, are addressed by the hypocrites to the disbelievers and mean "we had you in our power but we spared you". Similarly, the words, and protect you against the believers, may be interpreted something like this: "We separated ourselves from the Muslims with the result that they became weak and you were thus saved from them." Or the words may mean, "some of the faint-hearted among you wished to make peace with the Muslims, but we prevented them from doing so, and now the result is that you are victorious." In the latter case the clause نمنعکم من المؤمنینwould be translated as "we prevented you from making peace with the believers".
The last sentence of the verse means that the hypocrites will never be able to bring a valid objection against Muslims.
a
9:98; 57:15.
1
یعنی اس سے پہلے ایک موقع پر کیا مسلمان غالب نہیں آگئے تھے۔ جو ہماری ہی فتح تھی۔ مگر ہم نے ان سے سفارشیں کرکے تم کو بچا لیا۔
a
9:98; 57:15.
605
Important Words:
نستحوذ علیکم (get the better of you). نستحوذ is derived from حاذ. They say حاذہ i.e. he guarded or protected it and took care of it. حاذ الابل means, he drove the camels quickly or he gained mastery over the camels and collected them together. استحوذ علیهmeans, he overcame or mastered or gained mastery of him or it; he got the better of him or it (Taj).
نمنعکم (protected you) is derived from منع i.e. (1) he prevented or hindered: (2) he denied or refused (3) he protected or guarded (Lane).
Commentary:
The words, did we not get the better of you, are addressed by the hypocrites to the disbelievers and mean "we had you in our power but we spared you". Similarly, the words, and protect you against the believers, may be interpreted something like this: "We separated ourselves from the Muslims with the result that they became weak and you were thus saved from them." Or the words may mean, "some of the faint-hearted among you wished to make peace with the Muslims, but we prevented them from doing so, and now the result is that you are victorious." In the latter case the clause نمنعکم من المؤمنینwould be translated as "we prevented you from making peace with the believers".
The last sentence of the verse means that the hypocrites will never be able to bring a valid objection against Muslims.
b
9:98; 57:15.
یَسۡتَفۡتُوۡنَکَ قُلِ اللّٰہُ یُفۡتِیۡکُمۡ فِی الۡکَلٰلَۃِ ۚ اِنِ امۡرُؤٌا ہَلَکَ لَیۡسَ لَہٗ وَلَدٌ وَّلَہٗۤ اُخۡتٌ فَلَہَا نِصۡفُ مَا تَرَکَ ۚ وَہُوَ یَرِثُہَاۤ اِنۡ لَّمۡ یَکُنۡ لَّہَا وَلَدٌ ۚ فَاِنۡ کَانَتَا اثۡنَتَیۡنِ فَلَہُمَا الثُّلُثَانِ مِمَّا تَرَکَ ۚ وَاِنۡ کَانُوۡۤا اِخۡوَۃً رِّجَالًا وَّنِسَآءً فَلِلذَّکَرِ مِثۡلُ حَظِّ الۡاُنۡثَیَیۡنِ ۗ یُبَیِّنُ اللّٰہُ لَکُمۡ اَنۡ تَضِلُّوۡا ۗ وَاللّٰہُ بِکُلِّ شَیۡءٍ عَلِیۡمٌۢ
4:12.
4:27.
4:13.
4:13 经文谈及一种 كَلَالَةْ (Kalalah, 身后无父母子女者), 只有母方的兄弟和姐妹。本节中述及另一种 كَلَالَةْ (身后无父母子女者) 他既有父方的又有母方的兄弟和姐妹, 或者只有父方的。把现在注释的经文同4:13经文比较一下, 就清楚地可以看出, 前一种兄弟姐妹分得的份量比后一种要少的明显理由。
这部分继承法刻意与4:12, 13经文中述及的法律分开来处理。«古兰经» 在详细论述犹太人针对伊撒的攻击以后, 在本章末尾又回到 كَلَالَةْ (Kalalah, 身后无父母子女者) 这个论题上来。这样, {除了使有关 كَلَالَةْ (Kalalah) 的法律完整以外} 要求人们注意伊撒在精神上的无继承性, 他在某种意义上说, 也是一个 كَلَالَةْ (Kalalah)。伊撒是在没有父亲的媒介下出生的, 他死后没有精神继承人。伊本, 阿巴斯给 كَلَالَةْ (Kalalah) 下的定义是一个没有子女的人。伊撒在精神上是 كَلَالَةْ (Kalalah), 因为他死后没有精神继承人。
میرے ایک استاد کہا کرتے تھے کہ اس جگہ کلالہ سے مراد مسیحؑ ہے کیونکہ اوپر انہی کا ذکر ہے۔ واللہ اعلم بالصواب۔
کلالہ کے ورثہ کی تقسیم کے متعلق ایک حکم سورۃ نساء کی آیت۱۳ میں گزر چکا ہے۔ اس جگہ کلالہ کے ورثہ کی تقسیم کا جو مسئلہ بیان کیا گیا ہے‘ وہ پہلے سے مختلف ہے۔ سورۃ نساء کی آیت۱۳ میں یہ ذکر تھا کہ اگر کلالہ مر جائے اس کے بہن بھائی ماں کی طرف سے ہوں تو ان کو ۶ / ۱ یا ۳ / ۱ ملے گا۔ لیکن اِس جگہ اس کلالہ کا ذکر ہے جس کے بہن بھائی ماں اور باپ دونوں کی طرف سے ہوں یا صرف باپ کی طرف سے۔
4:12.
4:27.
4:13.
In 4:13 mention was made of one kind of Kalalah who leaves behind neither a parent nor an offspring and who has brothers and sisters from the side of mother only. The present verse refers to a Kalalah who has brothers and sisters from both his parents, or from the side of his father only. By comparing the verse under comment with 4:13 it becomes clear that for obvious reasons the share allotted to the former class of brothers and sisters is less than that allotted to those of the latter class.
This part of the law of inheritance has been purposely treated separately from the law dealt with in 4:12, 13. After dealing at some length with the charges levelled against Jesus by the Jews, the Qur’an reverts to the subject of Kalalah at the end of the Surah, thus seeking (beside completing the law relating to Kalalah) to draw attention to the spiritual heirlessness of Jesus who in a sense was also a Kalalah. Jesus was born without the agency of a father, and he
4:13.
4:12.
4:27.
Important Words:
For the meaning of the word کلالة see 4:13.
Commentary:
ولد (child) means, child or children whether male or female, but as کلالة (kalalah) means, one having no child and no parent, the words ولا والد (and neither parent) may be taken as being understood after the words لیس له ولد. The word اثنتین (lit. two) here means two or more sisters. This meaning is supported by a verdict of the Holy Prophet in which he applied this verse to the case of Jabir who died, leaving seven sisters (Jarir, vi. 24). The word اخوة (brethren) here includes sisters and brothers both, as the words رجالا و نساء (both men and women), forming case in apposition with اخوة indicate.
This verse, placed as it is in between the verses dealing with the Christians and their false doctrines, appears to be rather misplaced. But as the following note will show, it is very fittingly placed here, furnishing a striking proof of the Quran as well as its present arrangement being the work of God.
In 4:13 mention was made of one kind of Kalalah (one who leaves behind neither a parent nor an offspring) who had brothers and sisters from the side of his mother only. The present verse refers to a Kalalah who has brothers and sisters from both his parents, or from the side of his father only. By comparing the verse under comment with 4:13 it becomes clear that for obvious reasons the share allotted to the former class of brothers and sisters is less than that allotted to those of the latter class.
This part of the law of inheritance has been purposely treated separately from the main portion of the law dealt with in 4:12, 13 in the beginning of the Surah. The object in doing so is not far to seek. After dealing at some length with the charges levelled against Jesus by the Jews and clearing his position, the Quran reverts to the subject of Kalalah at the end of the Surah, thus seeking (beside completing the law relating to Kalalah) to draw, by a most fitting parable, our attention to the spiritual heirlessness of Jesus who, in a sense, was also a Kalalah. He was born without the agency of a father, and he left behind no spiritual successor to succeed him in his prophetic office, which was, after his death, inherited by the Ishmaelites. In this case the words, If a man dies, leaving no child, may also signify that Jesus was a Kalalah, not in the sense that spiritually speaking he had neither parents nor child, but in the restricted sense that he had no child. See 4:13 under Important Words where Ibn ‘Abbas defines a Kalalah as simply one who leaves no child. Thus Jesus was spiritually a Kalalah in the sense that he left behind no spiritual successor. Compare also the prophecy, "I will raise them a prophet from among their brethren" (Deut. 18:18).
a
4:12.
b
4:27.
e
4:13.
367
4:13 经文谈及一种 كَلَالَةْ (Kalalah, 身后无父母子女者), 只有母方的兄弟和姐妹。本节中述及另一种 كَلَالَةْ (身后无父母子女者) 他既有父方的又有母方的兄弟和姐妹, 或者只有父方的。把现在注释的经文同4:13经文比较一下, 就清楚地可以看出, 前一种兄弟姐妹分得的份量比后一种要少的明显理由。
这部分继承法刻意与4:12, 13经文中述及的法律分开来处理。«古兰经» 在详细论述犹太人针对伊撒的攻击以后, 在本章末尾又回到 كَلَالَةْ (Kalalah, 身后无父母子女者) 这个论题上来。这样, {除了使有关 كَلَالَةْ (Kalalah) 的法律完整以外} 要求人们注意伊撒在精神上的无继承性, 他在某种意义上说, 也是一个 كَلَالَةْ (Kalalah)。伊撒是在没有父亲的媒介下出生的, 他死后没有精神继承人。伊本, 阿巴斯给 كَلَالَةْ (Kalalah) 下的定义是一个没有子女的人。伊撒在精神上是 كَلَالَةْ (Kalalah), 因为他死后没有精神继承人。
1
میرے ایک استاد کہا کرتے تھے کہ اس جگہ کلالہ سے مراد مسیحؑ ہے کیونکہ اوپر انہی کا ذکر ہے۔ واللہ اعلم بالصواب۔
کلالہ کے ورثہ کی تقسیم کے متعلق ایک حکم سورۃ نساء کی آیت۱۳ میں گزر چکا ہے۔ اس جگہ کلالہ کے ورثہ کی تقسیم کا جو مسئلہ بیان کیا گیا ہے‘ وہ پہلے سے مختلف ہے۔ سورۃ نساء کی آیت۱۳ میں یہ ذکر تھا کہ اگر کلالہ مر جائے اس کے بہن بھائی ماں کی طرف سے ہوں تو ان کو ۶ / ۱ یا ۳ / ۱ ملے گا۔ لیکن اِس جگہ اس کلالہ کا ذکر ہے جس کے بہن بھائی ماں اور باپ دونوں کی طرف سے ہوں یا صرف باپ کی طرف سے۔
a
4:13.
b
4:12.
c
4:27.
639
Important Words:
For the meaning of the word کلالة see 4:13.
Commentary:
ولد (child) means, child or children whether male or female, but as کلالة (kalalah) means, one having no child and no parent, the words ولا والد (and neither parent) may be taken as being understood after the words لیس له ولد. The word اثنتین (lit. two) here means two or more sisters. This meaning is supported by a verdict of the Holy Prophet in which he applied this verse to the case of Jabir who died, leaving seven sisters (Jarir, vi. 24). The word اخوة (brethren) here includes sisters and brothers both, as the words رجالا و نساء (both men and women), forming case in apposition with اخوة indicate.
This verse, placed as it is in between the verses dealing with the Christians and their false doctrines, appears to be rather misplaced. But as the following note will show, it is very fittingly placed here, furnishing a striking proof of the Quran as well as its present arrangement being the work of God.
In 4:13 mention was made of one kind of Kalalah (one who leaves behind neither a parent nor an offspring) who had brothers and sisters from the side of his mother only. The present verse refers to a Kalalah who has brothers and sisters from both his parents, or from the side of his father only. By comparing the verse under comment with 4:13 it becomes clear that for obvious reasons the share allotted to the former class of brothers and sisters is less than that allotted to those of the latter class.
This part of the law of inheritance has been purposely treated separately from the main portion of the law dealt with in 4:12, 13 in the beginning of the Surah. The object in doing so is not far to seek. After dealing at some length with the charges levelled against Jesus by the Jews and clearing his position, the Quran reverts to the subject of Kalalah at the end of the Surah, thus seeking (beside completing the law relating to Kalalah) to draw, by a most fitting parable, our attention to the spiritual heirlessness of Jesus who, in a sense, was also a Kalalah. He was born without the agency of a father, and he left behind no spiritual successor to succeed him in his prophetic office, which was, after his death, inherited by the Ishmaelites. In this case the words, If a man dies, leaving no child, may also signify that Jesus was a Kalalah, not in the sense that spiritually speaking he had neither parents nor child, but in the restricted sense that he had no child. See 4:13 under Important Words where Ibn ‘Abbas defines a Kalalah as simply one who leaves no child. Thus Jesus was spiritually a Kalalah in the sense that he left behind no spiritual successor. Compare also the prophecy, "I will raise them a prophet from among their brethren" (Deut. 18:18).
a
4:12.
b
4:27.
c
4:13.
715
In 4:13 mention was made of one kind of Kalalah who leaves behind neither a parent nor an offspring and who has brothers and sisters from the side of mother only. The present verse refers to a Kalalah who has brothers and sisters from both his parents, or from the side of his father only. By comparing the verse under comment with 4:13 it becomes clear that for obvious reasons the share allotted to the former class of brothers and sisters is less than that allotted to those of the latter class.
This part of the law of inheritance has been purposely treated separately from the law dealt with in 4:12, 13. After dealing at some length with the charges levelled against Jesus by the Jews, the Qur’an reverts to the subject of Kalalah at the end of the Surah, thus seeking (beside completing the law relating to Kalalah) to draw attention to the spiritual heirlessness of Jesus who in a sense was also a Kalalah. Jesus was born without the agency of a father, and he
قَالُوۡا یٰمُوۡسٰۤی اِنَّ فِیۡہَا قَوۡمًا جَبَّارِیۡنَ وَاِنَّا لَنۡ نَّدۡخُلَہَا حَتّٰی یَخۡرُجُوۡا مِنۡہَا فَاِنۡ یَّخۡرُجُوۡا مِنۡہَا فَاِنَّا دٰخِلُوۡنَ
اس وقت اس جگہ عمالقہ اور دوسری عرب قومیں بستی تھیں ان سے یہود ڈر گئے۔
This means that the annals of these people were known to the Israelites. The Amalekites and other unruly Arab tribes lived in the Holy Land at that time. The Israelites were very much afraid of them.
Compare this insolent and cowardly attitude of the companions of Moses to the willing and almost unbelievable sacrifices of the Companions of the Holy Prophet, who were ever eager to jump into the very jaws of death at the slightest bidding of their Master. When the Holy Prophet, with a handful of his ill-equipped Companions intended to go forth to meet the vastly superior and much better-equipped Meccan force at Badr, he consulted them about it. Thereupon one of the Companions stood up and addressed the Holy Prophet in the memorable words: "We would not say to thee, O Prophet of God, as was said by the companions of Moses, 'go thou and thy Lord and fight and here we sit.' On the contrary, O Prophet of the Lord! We are ever with thee and we will go with thee whither thou goest. We will fight the enemy on thy right and on thy left and in thy front and behind thy back; and we trust God that thou wilt see from us what will comfort thine eyes" (Bukhari).
Important Words:
جبّارین (haughty and powerful) is the plural of جبار which is derived from جبر. They say جبرالعظم (jabaral-‘azma) or جبّرالعظم(jabbaral-‘azma), i.e. he set the bone; he reduced it from the fractured state. جبرالرجل (jabaral-rajula) or جبّرالرجل (jabbaral-rajula) means, he restored the man from the state of poverty and weakness to that of wealth and strength. جبرت الیتیم means, I put the affairs of the orphan into good order. جبّره means, he compelled and forced him against his will. جبّار means, one who magnifies himself and behaves proudly, haughtily and insolently; one who slays when in anger or one who slays unjustly; one who domineers over others by absolute force and power; one extravagant in acts of wrongdoing, disobedience and rebellion; one huge, tall and strong; a giant. When used about God, الجبّار means, One Who can force His creatures to obey His commands; the Supreme, the Unattainable, the High above His creatures; the Restorer of the poor and the weak to wealth and power; the Reformer of the people by raising them from a low state to a high one (Lane & Aqrab).
Commentary:
Compare this insolent and cowardly attitude of the companions of Moses to the willing and almost unbelievable sacrifices of the Companions of the Holy Prophet, who were ever eager to jump into the very jaws of death at the bidding of their Master.
1
اس وقت اس جگہ عمالقہ اور دوسری عرب قومیں بستی تھیں ان سے یہود ڈر گئے۔
659
Important Words:
جبّارین (haughty and powerful) is the plural of جبار which is derived from جبر. They say جبرالعظم (jabaral-‘azma) or جبّرالعظم(jabbaral-‘azma), i.e. he set the bone; he reduced it from the fractured state. جبرالرجل (jabaral-rajula) or جبّرالرجل (jabbaral-rajula) means, he restored the man from the state of poverty and weakness to that of wealth and strength. جبرت الیتیم means, I put the affairs of the orphan into good order. جبّره means, he compelled and forced him against his will. جبّار means, one who magnifies himself and behaves proudly, haughtily and insolently; one who slays when in anger or one who slays unjustly; one who domineers over others by absolute force and power; one extravagant in acts of wrongdoing, disobedience and rebellion; one huge, tall and strong; a giant. When used about God, الجبّار means, One Who can force His creatures to obey His commands; the Supreme, the Unattainable, the High above His creatures; the Restorer of the poor and the weak to wealth and power; the Reformer of the people by raising them from a low state to a high one (Lane & Aqrab).
Commentary:
Compare this insolent and cowardly attitude of the companions of Moses to the willing and almost unbelievable sacrifices of the Companions of the Holy Prophet, who were ever eager to jump into the very jaws of death at the bidding of their Master.
732
This means that the annals of these people were known to the Israelites. The Amalekites and other unruly Arab tribes lived in the Holy Land at that time. The Israelites were very much afraid of them.
733
Compare this insolent and cowardly attitude of the companions of Moses to the willing and almost unbelievable sacrifices of the Companions of the Holy Prophet, who were ever eager to jump into the very jaws of death at the slightest bidding of their Master. When the Holy Prophet, with a handful of his ill-equipped Companions intended to go forth to meet the vastly superior and much better-equipped Meccan force at Badr, he consulted them about it. Thereupon one of the Companions stood up and addressed the Holy Prophet in the memorable words: "We would not say to thee, O Prophet of God, as was said by the companions of Moses, 'go thou and thy Lord and fight and here we sit.' On the contrary, O Prophet of the Lord! We are ever with thee and we will go with thee whither thou goest. We will fight the enemy on thy right and on thy left and in thy front and behind thy back; and we trust God that thou wilt see from us what will comfort thine eyes" (Bukhari).
سَمّٰعُوۡنَ لِلۡکَذِبِ اَکّٰلُوۡنَ لِلسُّحۡتِ ۚ فَاِنۡ جَآءُوۡکَ فَاحۡکُمۡ بَیۡنَہُمۡ اَوۡ اَعۡرِضۡ عَنۡہُمۡ ۖ وَاِنۡ تُعۡرِضۡ عَنۡہُمۡ فَلَنۡ یَّضُرُّوۡکَ شَیۡـًٔا ۖ وَّاِنۡ حَکَمۡتَ فَاحۡکُمۡ بَیۡنَہُمۡ بِالۡقِسۡطِ ۚ اِنَّ اللّٰہَ یُحِبُّ الۡمُقۡسِطِیۡنَ
5:63, 64.
5:63, 64.
Suht means, a thing which is forbidden or unlawful; that which is foul and of bad repute; a bribe that is given to a judge or the like; or anything paltry, mean and inconsiderable (Lane).
5:63, 64.
Important Words:
السحت (things forbidden) is the noun-infinitive from سحت. They say سحته i.e. he extirpated or destroyed it utterly. سحت شعرهmeans, he removed his hair utterly (in shaving and cutting). سحت فی تجارته means, he earned foul or unlawful gain in his trade. An Arab would say ماله سحت i.e. his property may be destroyed with impunity. سحت therefore means, a thing which is forbidden or unlawful; that which is foul and of bad repute; a bribe that is given to a judge or the like; anything little or small in quantity or number; or anything paltry, mean and inconsiderable (Lane).
Commentary:
The words اکالون للسحت mean: (1) that the Jews devour things that are forbidden and unlawful; or (2) they devour things the result of which is spiritual ruin and national destruction; or (3) they do not hesitate to take paltry and mean things unlawfully; or (4) they accept bribes. For an explanation of the words سماعون للکذب see the previous verse.
a
5:63, 64.
a
5:63, 64.
674
Important Words:
السحت (things forbidden) is the noun-infinitive from سحت. They say سحته i.e. he extirpated or destroyed it utterly. سحت شعرهmeans, he removed his hair utterly (in shaving and cutting). سحت فی تجارته means, he earned foul or unlawful gain in his trade. An Arab would say ماله سحت i.e. his property may be destroyed with impunity. سحت therefore means, a thing which is forbidden or unlawful; that which is foul and of bad repute; a bribe that is given to a judge or the like; anything little or small in quantity or number; or anything paltry, mean and inconsiderable (Lane).
Commentary:
The words اکالون للسحت mean: (1) that the Jews devour things that are forbidden and unlawful; or (2) they devour things the result of which is spiritual ruin and national destruction; or (3) they do not hesitate to take paltry and mean things unlawfully; or (4) they accept bribes. For an explanation of the words سماعون للکذب see the previous verse.
c
5:63, 64.
747
Suht means, a thing which is forbidden or unlawful; that which is foul and of bad repute; a bribe that is given to a judge or the like; or anything paltry, mean and inconsiderable (Lane).
وَاَنِ احۡکُمۡ بَیۡنَہُمۡ بِمَاۤ اَنۡزَلَ اللّٰہُ وَلَا تَتَّبِعۡ اَہۡوَآءَہُمۡ وَاحۡذَرۡہُمۡ اَنۡ یَّفۡتِنُوۡکَ عَنۡۢ بَعۡضِ مَاۤ اَنۡزَلَ اللّٰہُ اِلَیۡکَ ۖ فَاِنۡ تَوَلَّوۡا فَاعۡلَمۡ اَنَّمَا یُرِیۡدُ اللّٰہُ اَنۡ یُّصِیۡبَہُمۡ بِبَعۡضِ ذُنُوۡبِہِمۡ ۗ وَاِنَّ کَثِیۡرًا مِّنَ النَّاسِ لَفٰسِقُوۡنَ
5:49.
17:74.
5:49.
17:74.
Important Words:
یفتنوك (cause thee to fall into affliction). یفتنون is derived from فتن. They say فتنه i.e. he burnt it; he or it caused him to fall into trial, affliction, trouble or distress; he made him turn from or quit the position in which he was; or he made him turn from the right course (Lane & Aqrab). See also 2:103, 192; 4:92.
عن (on account of) is a particle used to give a number of meanings. Here it signifies "because of" or "on account of" (Lane).
Commentary:
The words, they cause thee to fall into affliction on account of part of what Allah has revealed to thee, mean that the cause of the enmity and hatred of the disbelievers for the Holy Prophet is the revelation which God has sent down to him. His enemies hatch plots against him and seek to involve him in trouble because some parts of his teachings are particularly repugnant to them, running counter to their most cherished views.
d
5:49.
e
17:74.
a
5:49.
b
17:74.
681
Important Words:
یفتنوك (cause thee to fall into affliction). یفتنون is derived from فتن. They say فتنه i.e. he burnt it; he or it caused him to fall into trial, affliction, trouble or distress; he made him turn from or quit the position in which he was; or he made him turn from the right course (Lane & Aqrab). See also 2:103, 192; 4:92.
عن (on account of) is a particle used to give a number of meanings. Here it signifies "because of" or "on account of" (Lane).
Commentary:
The words, they cause thee to fall into affliction on account of part of what Allah has revealed to thee, mean that the cause of the enmity and hatred of the disbelievers for the Holy Prophet is the revelation which God has sent down to him. His enemies hatch plots against him and seek to involve him in trouble because some parts of his teachings are particularly repugnant to them, running counter to their most cherished views.
c
5:49.
d
17:74.
وَاَطِیۡعُوا اللّٰہَ وَاَطِیۡعُوا الرَّسُوۡلَ وَاحۡذَرُوۡا ۚ فَاِنۡ تَوَلَّیۡتُمۡ فَاعۡلَمُوۡۤا اَنَّمَا عَلٰی رَسُوۡلِنَا الۡبَلٰغُ الۡمُبِیۡنُ
3:133; 4:70; 64:13.
5:100; 16:83; 36:18; 64:13.
Commentary:
The words, be on your guard, may either mean, "you should be on your guard against evils" or they may signify that if you obey Allah and obey the Prophet, the result will be that you will be able to guard yourselves against evil.
The concluding part of the verse means that the duty of a Messenger of God is only to convey to men His commandments. It forms no part of his work to force them to follow him. This exposes the absurdity of the objection that Islam enjoins the use of force for its propagation. Elsewhere the Quran says: There should be no compulsion in religion (2:257). Both these verses and many similar others were revealed at Medina when a state of war existed between disbelievers and believers, which clearly shows that the Holy Prophet took up arms only to defend himself and his followers and not to propagate his religion at the point of the sword, as is often maliciously alleged by the opponents of Islam.
a
3:133; 4:70; 64:13.
b
5:100; 16:83; 36:18; 64:13.
a
3:133; 4:70; 64:13.
b
5:100; 16:83; 36:18; 64:13.
720
Commentary:
The words, be on your guard, may either mean, "you should be on your guard against evils" or they may signify that if you obey Allah and obey the Prophet, the result will be that you will be able to guard yourselves against evil.
The concluding part of the verse means that the duty of a Messenger of God is only to convey to men His commandments. It forms no part of his work to force them to follow him. This exposes the absurdity of the objection that Islam enjoins the use of force for its propagation. Elsewhere the Quran says: There should be no compulsion in religion (2:257). Both these verses and many similar others were revealed at Medina when a state of war existed between disbelievers and believers, which clearly shows that the Holy Prophet took up arms only to defend himself and his followers and not to propagate his religion at the point of the sword, as is often maliciously alleged by the opponents of Islam.
c
3:133; 4:70; 64:13.
d
5:100; 16:83; 36:18; 64:13.
فَاِنۡ عُثِرَ عَلٰۤی اَنَّہُمَا اسۡتَحَقَّاۤ اِثۡمًا فَاٰخَرَانِ یَقُوۡمَانِ مَقَامَہُمَا مِنَ الَّذِیۡنَ اسۡتَحَقَّ عَلَیۡہِمُ الۡاَوۡلَیٰنِ فَیُقۡسِمَانِ بِاللّٰہِ لَشَہٰدَتُنَاۤ اَحَقُّ مِنۡ شَہٰدَتِہِمَا وَمَا اعۡتَدَیۡنَاۤ اِنَّاۤ اِذًا لَّمِنَ الظّٰلِمِیۡنَ
The word Aulayan refers to the first two witnesses and signifies that these two were in a better position to give true evidence, being the persons who were with the deceased at the time of his death and in whose presence the will was made and to whom the property was entrusted to be handed over to the heirs of the deceased. The "other" two witnesses should be from among the deceased person’s heirs.
Important Words:
اَولیان (the two who were in a better position) is derived from ولی being the dual of اولی which means, one more worthy or more competent or more entitled or more deserving or better fitted or having a better claim to do a thing, etc. (Lane). See also 4:136.
استحقااثما (the two are guilty of sin) and استحق علیھم (against whom they sinfully deposed). The word استحق is derived from حقwhich means, it was or became suitable to the requirements of wisdom, justice, right and truth; it was or became right, proper, correct or true; it became established as a truth. استحقه means, he demanded it as his right or due; he had a right or title or claim to it; he deserved or merited it. They say استحق اثما i.e. he did what necessitated sin; or he was guilty of a sin and deserved it being said of him that he was a sinner. The expression علیھم added the word استحق means "against them", the particle علی sometimes meaning "against". استحقھا علی المشتری means, he has a right to it in preference to the purchaser, i.e. he has a better claim to it as against the buyer. The words استحق علیھم therefore, would mean, they (the two witnesses who were in a better position to give true evidence) gave false evidence against their just rights, seeking to deprive them (heirs of the deceased) of their rights by giving false evidence against them.
Commentary:
See collective note on 5:109.
735
Important Words:
اَولیان (the two who were in a better position) is derived from ولی being the dual of اولی which means, one more worthy or more competent or more entitled or more deserving or better fitted or having a better claim to do a thing, etc. (Lane). See also 4:136.
استحقااثما (the two are guilty of sin) and استحق علیھم (against whom they sinfully deposed). The word استحق is derived from حقwhich means, it was or became suitable to the requirements of wisdom, justice, right and truth; it was or became right, proper, correct or true; it became established as a truth. استحقه means, he demanded it as his right or due; he had a right or title or claim to it; he deserved or merited it. They say استحق اثما i.e. he did what necessitated sin; or he was guilty of a sin and deserved it being said of him that he was a sinner. The expression علیھم added the word استحق means "against them", the particle علی sometimes meaning "against". استحقھا علی المشتری means, he has a right to it in preference to the purchaser, i.e. he has a better claim to it as against the buyer. The words استحق علیھم therefore, would mean, they (the two witnesses who were in a better position to give true evidence) gave false evidence against their just rights, seeking to deprive them (heirs of the deceased) of their rights by giving false evidence against them.
Commentary:
See collective note on 5:109.
802
The word Aulayan refers to the first two witnesses and signifies that these two were in a better position to give true evidence, being the persons who were with the deceased at the time of his death and in whose presence the will was made and to whom the property was entrusted to be handed over to the heirs of the deceased. The "other" two witnesses should be from among the deceased person’s heirs.
اُولٰٓئِکَ الَّذِیۡنَ اٰتَیۡنٰہُمُ الۡکِتٰبَ وَالۡحُکۡمَ وَالنُّبُوَّۃَ ۚ فَاِنۡ یَّکۡفُرۡ بِہَا ہٰٓؤُلَآءِ فَقَدۡ وَکَّلۡنَا بِہَا قَوۡمًا لَّیۡسُوۡا بِہَا بِکٰفِرِیۡنَ
45:17.
这节经文并不意味着每个先知都赐有一本各自的经典。“赐了经典” 是 «古兰经» 中的一个习用语。它的意义一般是通过一位特有经典的先知来赐予经典。«古兰经» 在其他经文中 (45:17) 说, 经典、主权和先知品位是赐予所有以色列后裔的三样东西。在5:45节中我们看到, 穆撒之后出现无数的先知, 他们没赐有新的经典而是遵循 «摩西五经» 所载的经律而且依它来判断。事实上, 先知有两种--------持有经典的先知, 即赐予他们一本经典 (经律) 的先知, 以及没有赐予他们经典的先知, 即遵循有经先知的经典的那些先知。在他们的情况下, “我赐了他们经典” 这一句话的意思是, 赐了他们这经典的知识, 或者从他们持有经典的前辈那里继承了经典。
45:17.
The verse does not mean that every Prophet was given a separate Book. "Giving of the Book" is an expression used in the Qur’an generally in the sense of giving it through a Law-bearing Prophet. Elsewhere in the Qur’an (45:17) it is stated that three things, viz. Book, dominion and Prophethood were given to all the Children of Israel. In 5:45 we read that a galaxy of Prophets appeared after Moses who were given no new Law but followed the Law as given in the Torah and judged by it. In fact, Prophets are of two categories—Law-bearing Prophets to whom a Book (Law or the Shari‘ah) is given and Prophets, who are given no Book or Shari‘ah, and who follow the Shari‘ah of the Law-bearing Prophet. In their case the expression "We gave them the Book" means that they were given the knowledge of the Book or they inherited the Book or the Shari‘ah from their Law-bearing predecessor.
45:17.
Commentary:
The giving of a Book by God generally occurs in two ways: Firstly, directly, as in the case of Moses and the Holy Prophet of Islam. Secondly, indirectly, as in the case of those Prophets to whom no new Book was revealed and who only followed a Book that had been revealed to a previous Prophet. Thus of the Torah we are told in the Quran, Surely, We sent down the Torah wherein was guidance and light. By it did the Prophets who were obedient to Us judge for the Jews(5:45). The above quoted verse proves that there appeared many Prophets among the Israelites to whom no new Book was revealed and who only followed the Torah. This statement of the Quran is also borne out by history, which tells us that there were many Prophets among the Israelites to whom no Book was revealed. Hence, when the verse under comment says: It is these to whom We gave the Book, it does not mean that a Book was given to every Prophet separately but only that every Prophet received knowledge of the Divine Book. Another consideration which lends support to the above conclusion is that the word "these" put in the beginning of the verse not only refers to the Prophets named in the foregoing verses, but also to some of their fathers and their children and their brethren (6:88), and it is evident that the latter did not receive any new Book.
There are also other verses of the Quran in which the expression, "We gave the Book" has been used in the sense of giving the Book indirectly. Among others the reader is referred to 2:122; 2:147; 29:48 & 45:17. It is of interest that in the last-mentioned verse, i.e. 45:17, not only the Book but all the three things mentioned in the verse under comment have been spoken of as having been given to the Children of Israel. The verse runs thus: And We gave the Children of Israel the Book, and sovereignty, and prophethood, and We provided them with good things, and exalted them over the people of the time (45:17).
In short, when on the one hand we learn not only from the Quran but also from history that there have been many Prophets who did not receive any new Book directly, and on the other hand, we see that the expression, "We gave the Book" has also been used in the Quran in the sense of giving a Book indirectly, the verse under comment cannot be interpreted to mean that every Prophet was given a Book directly from God. Muslim commentators are agreed in holding that every Prophet was not given a Book directly by God, and that in the case of those Prophets to whom no Book was given directly, the words, "We gave the Book", simply mean, "We gave them knowledge or understanding of the Book", or "We made them inherit the Book."
The word "people" in the latter portion of the verse refers to Muslims; and the pronoun "them" at the end refers to the Book, dominion and prophethood mentioned in the opening clause of the verse.
c
45:17.
436
这节经文并不意味着每个先知都赐有一本各自的经典。“赐了经典” 是 «古兰经» 中的一个习用语。它的意义一般是通过一位特有经典的先知来赐予经典。«古兰经» 在其他经文中 (45:17) 说, 经典、主权和先知品位是赐予所有以色列后裔的三样东西。在5:45节中我们看到, 穆撒之后出现无数的先知, 他们没赐有新的经典而是遵循 «摩西五经» 所载的经律而且依它来判断。事实上, 先知有两种--------持有经典的先知, 即赐予他们一本经典 (经律) 的先知, 以及没有赐予他们经典的先知, 即遵循有经先知的经典的那些先知。在他们的情况下, “我赐了他们经典” 这一句话的意思是, 赐了他们这经典的知识, 或者从他们持有经典的前辈那里继承了经典。
b
45:17.
832
Commentary:
The giving of a Book by God generally occurs in two ways: Firstly, directly, as in the case of Moses and the Holy Prophet of Islam. Secondly, indirectly, as in the case of those Prophets to whom no new Book was revealed and who only followed a Book that had been revealed to a previous Prophet. Thus of the Torah we are told in the Quran, Surely, We sent down the Torah wherein was guidance and light. By it did the Prophets who were obedient to Us judge for the Jews(5:45). The above quoted verse proves that there appeared many Prophets among the Israelites to whom no new Book was revealed and who only followed the Torah. This statement of the Quran is also borne out by history, which tells us that there were many Prophets among the Israelites to whom no Book was revealed. Hence, when the verse under comment says: It is these to whom We gave the Book, it does not mean that a Book was given to every Prophet separately but only that every Prophet received knowledge of the Divine Book. Another consideration which lends support to the above conclusion is that the word "these" put in the beginning of the verse not only refers to the Prophets named in the foregoing verses, but also to some of their fathers and their children and their brethren (6:88), and it is evident that the latter did not receive any new Book.
There are also other verses of the Quran in which the expression, "We gave the Book" has been used in the sense of giving the Book indirectly. Among others the reader is referred to 2:122; 2:147; 29:48 & 45:17. It is of interest that in the last-mentioned verse, i.e. 45:17, not only the Book but all the three things mentioned in the verse under comment have been spoken of as having been given to the Children of Israel. The verse runs thus: And We gave the Children of Israel the Book, and sovereignty, and prophethood, and We provided them with good things, and exalted them over the people of the time (45:17).
In short, when on the one hand we learn not only from the Quran but also from history that there have been many Prophets who did not receive any new Book directly, and on the other hand, we see that the expression, "We gave the Book" has also been used in the Quran in the sense of giving a Book indirectly, the verse under comment cannot be interpreted to mean that every Prophet was given a Book directly from God. Muslim commentators are agreed in holding that every Prophet was not given a Book directly by God, and that in the case of those Prophets to whom no Book was given directly, the words, "We gave the Book", simply mean, "We gave them knowledge or understanding of the Book", or "We made them inherit the Book."
The word "people" in the latter portion of the verse refers to Muslims; and the pronoun "them" at the end refers to the Book, dominion and prophethood mentioned in the opening clause of the verse.
b
45:17.
871
The verse does not mean that every Prophet was given a separate Book. "Giving of the Book" is an expression used in the Qur’an generally in the sense of giving it through a Law-bearing Prophet. Elsewhere in the Qur’an (45:17) it is stated that three things, viz. Book, dominion and Prophethood were given to all the Children of Israel. In 5:45 we read that a galaxy of Prophets appeared after Moses who were given no new Law but followed the Law as given in the Torah and judged by it. In fact, Prophets are of two categories—Law-bearing Prophets to whom a Book (Law or the Shari‘ah) is given and Prophets, who are given no Book or Shari‘ah, and who follow the Shari‘ah of the Law-bearing Prophet. In their case the expression "We gave them the Book" means that they were given the knowledge of the Book or they inherited the Book or the Shari‘ah from their Law-bearing predecessor.
فَاِنۡ کَذَّبُوۡکَ فَقُل رَّبُّکُمۡ ذُوۡ رَحۡمَۃٍ وّٰسِعَۃٍ وَّلَا یُرَدُّ بَاۡسُہٗ عَنِ الۡقَوۡمِ الۡمُجۡرِمِیۡنَ
6:134; 7:157.
6:134; 7:157.
6:134; 7:157.
Commentary:
The verse answers an implied objection of the Jews, viz. if God had forbidden them certain extra things, why was not the prohibition continued in Islam? The verse answers this objection by saying that whereas the divine law of punishment demanded that Jews should be punished, the law of mercy demanded that Muslims should be shown mercy. It was unfair to continue a special prohibition that had been imposed by way of punishment under a new dispensation.
d
6:134; 7:157.
a
6:134; 7:157.
887
Commentary:
The verse answers an implied objection of the Jews, viz. if God had forbidden them certain extra things, why was not the prohibition continued in Islam? The verse answers this objection by saying that whereas the divine law of punishment demanded that Jews should be punished, the law of mercy demanded that Muslims should be shown mercy. It was unfair to continue a special prohibition that had been imposed by way of punishment under a new dispensation.
b
6:134; 7:157.
قُلۡ ہَلُمَّ شُہَدَآءَکُمُ الَّذِیۡنَ یَشۡہَدُوۡنَ اَنَّ اللّٰہَ حَرَّمَ ہٰذَا ۖ فَاِنۡ شَہِدُوۡا فَلَا تَشۡہَدۡ مَعَہُمۡ ۚ وَلَا تَتَّبِعۡ اَہۡوَآءَ الَّذِیۡنَ کَذَّبُوۡا بِاٰیٰتِنَا وَالَّذِیۡنَ لَا یُؤۡمِنُوۡنَ بِالۡاٰخِرَۃِ وَہُمۡ بِرَبِّہِمۡ یَعۡدِلُوۡنَ
5:49; 45:19.
6:2; 27:61.
4:37; 17:24.
5:49; 45:19.
6:2; 27:61.
Important Words:
ھلم (bring forward) is both intransitive and transitive, meaning (1) come; or (2) cause to come, i.e. bring forth or produce (Lane). ھلم (halumma) is, according to the people of the Hijaz, one of the words known as اسماء الفعل and is thus used by them in the fixed form whether the number is singular or plural and whether the gender is masculine or feminine; but others differ from this view (Aqrab).
Commentary:
The Quran now returns to the subject of man-made laws about prohibitions. The verse signifies that disbelievers should declare that they do not agree with the Quran and find its teachings inferior to their own and then God Himself will decide between the two parties. Indirectly the words also hint that everybody should express his opinion freely when he disagrees with others and should refrain from dissimulation.
b
6:2; 27:61.
c
5:49; 45:19.
a
5:49; 45:19.
b
6:2; 27:61.
890
Important Words:
ھلم (bring forward) is both intransitive and transitive, meaning (1) come; or (2) cause to come, i.e. bring forth or produce (Lane). ھلم (halumma) is, according to the people of the Hijaz, one of the words known as اسماء الفعل and is thus used by them in the fixed form whether the number is singular or plural and whether the gender is masculine or feminine; but others differ from this view (Aqrab).
Commentary:
The Quran now returns to the subject of man-made laws about prohibitions. The verse signifies that disbelievers should declare that they do not agree with the Quran and find its teachings inferior to their own and then God Himself will decide between the two parties. Indirectly the words also hint that everybody should express his opinion freely when he disagrees with others and should refrain from dissimulation.
b
5:49; 45:19.
c
6:2; 27:61.
d
4:37; 17:24.
الۡـٰٔنَ خَفَّفَ اللّٰہُ عَنۡکُمۡ وَعَلِمَ اَنَّ فِیۡکُمۡ ضَعۡفًا ۚ فَاِنۡ یَّکُنۡ مِّنۡکُمۡ مِّائَۃٌ صَابِرَۃٌ یَّغۡلِبُوۡا مِائَتَیۡنِ ۚ وَاِنۡ یَّکُنۡ مِّنۡکُمۡ اَلۡفٌ یَّغۡلِبُوۡۤا اَلۡفَیۡنِ بِاِذۡنِ اللّٰہِ ۗ وَاللّٰہُ مَعَ الصّٰبِرِیۡنَ
这节经文不能理解为取消前一节经文。这两节经文述及穆斯林社会的两种不同状态。开始时他们是薄弱的, 装备很差, 在作战技术上是训练不足的。在那种薄弱的状态下, 他们只能战胜两倍的敌人。可是, 随着时间的转移, 他们全面的情况、作战经验和军事资源都大大地改进了, 他们能打败十倍於他们的敌人。在白德尔、吴候德和壕沟 (Trench) 等战役中, 双方部队数目的不平衡不断增加, 可是穆斯林十分成功地保持了自己的阵地, 到雅尔姆克 (يَرْمُوْك, Yarmuk) 战役时, 只有六万人的穆斯林击败了百万人以上的一支军队。
یہ حکم ایمان پر مبنی ہے اس لئے ایمان کے ساتھ بڑھتا رہتا ہے۔ قیصر و کسریٰ کی جنگوں میں مسلمانوں نے دس گُنے چھوڑ اسّی اور سو گُنے دشمن کو شکست دی تھی۔ اس لئے کہ انہوں نے صحابہؓ کا زمانہ بھی دیکھا تھا اور رسول اللہ صلی اللہ علیہ وسلم کی وفات کے بعدنئے نئے نشان بھی دیکھے تھے۔
The verse should not be understood to abrogate the preceding one. The two verses refer to two different states of the Muslim Community. In the beginning they were weak, ill-equipped and ill-trained in the art of war. In that state of weakness they could successfully fight against only their double number. But as with the passage of time their all-round condition, fighting experience and military resources had very much improved they could defeat an enemy ten times their number. In the battles of Badr, Uhud and of the Trench, the disparity between the number of forces of both sides progressively increased, yet the Muslims quite successfully held their own, till at the Battle of Yarmuk, mere 60,000 Muslims defeated an army of more than a million strong.
Commentary:
This verse does not abrogate the previous verse, but only temporarily relieves Muslims in view of the then existing condition of their faith. Their faith, though sincere and true, was "weak" as compared with its future condition when it was to grow stronger by their witnessing more and more heavenly signs and by their becoming more and more organized.
The words, For the present Allah has lightened your burden, show that the previous verse contains not a prophecy, but a commandment. It does not announce by way of prophecy that Muslims will prevail over an enemy ten times their number; it simply gives the injunction that if twenty believers have to face 200 disbelievers, they must fight them, and that if they turn their backs, they will be sinners. In the present verse, however, in view of the then weak condition of Muslims, the limit of disparity has been reduced to twice the number of the believers.
History tells us that in later times, Muslims had sometimes to fight an enemy even more than ten times their number and still they were victorious. Thus, at the Battle of Yarmuk the Muslim army numbered 30,000, according to the lowest calculation, while the enemy numbered at least 600,000 (the highest figures being respectively 60,000 and 1,000,000) and the battle ended in a decisive victory for the Muslims.
551
这节经文不能理解为取消前一节经文。这两节经文述及穆斯林社会的两种不同状态。开始时他们是薄弱的, 装备很差, 在作战技术上是训练不足的。在那种薄弱的状态下, 他们只能战胜两倍的敌人。可是, 随着时间的转移, 他们全面的情况、作战经验和军事资源都大大地改进了, 他们能打败十倍於他们的敌人。在白德尔、吴候德和壕沟 (Trench) 等战役中, 双方部队数目的不平衡不断增加, 可是穆斯林十分成功地保持了自己的阵地, 到雅尔姆克 (يَرْمُوْك, Yarmuk) 战役时, 只有六万人的穆斯林击败了百万人以上的一支军队。
3
یہ حکم ایمان پر مبنی ہے اس لئے ایمان کے ساتھ بڑھتا رہتا ہے۔ قیصر و کسریٰ کی جنگوں میں مسلمانوں نے دس گُنے چھوڑ اسّی اور سو گُنے دشمن کو شکست دی تھی۔ اس لئے کہ انہوں نے صحابہؓ کا زمانہ بھی دیکھا تھا اور رسول اللہ صلی اللہ علیہ وسلم کی وفات کے بعدنئے نئے نشان بھی دیکھے تھے۔
1154
Commentary:
This verse does not abrogate the previous verse, but only temporarily relieves Muslims in view of the then existing condition of their faith. Their faith, though sincere and true, was "weak" as compared with its future condition when it was to grow stronger by their witnessing more and more heavenly signs and by their becoming more and more organized.
The words, For the present Allah has lightened your burden, show that the previous verse contains not a prophecy, but a commandment. It does not announce by way of prophecy that Muslims will prevail over an enemy ten times their number; it simply gives the injunction that if twenty believers have to face 200 disbelievers, they must fight them, and that if they turn their backs, they will be sinners. In the present verse, however, in view of the then weak condition of Muslims, the limit of disparity has been reduced to twice the number of the believers.
History tells us that in later times, Muslims had sometimes to fight an enemy even more than ten times their number and still they were victorious. Thus, at the Battle of Yarmuk the Muslim army numbered 30,000, according to the lowest calculation, while the enemy numbered at least 600,000 (the highest figures being respectively 60,000 and 1,000,000) and the battle ended in a decisive victory for the Muslims.
1143
The verse should not be understood to abrogate the preceding one. The two verses refer to two different states of the Muslim Community. In the beginning they were weak, ill-equipped and ill-trained in the art of war. In that state of weakness they could successfully fight against only their double number. But as with the passage of time their all-round condition, fighting experience and military resources had very much improved they could defeat an enemy ten times their number. In the battles of Badr, Uhud and of the Trench, the disparity between the number of forces of both sides progressively increased, yet the Muslims quite successfully held their own, till at the Battle of Yarmuk, mere 60,000 Muslims defeated an army of more than a million strong.
وَاَذٰنٌ مِّنَ اللّٰہِ وَرَسُوۡلِہٖۤ اِلَی النَّاسِ یَوۡمَ الۡحَجِّ الۡاَکۡبَرِ اَنَّ اللّٰہَ بَرِیۡٓءٌ مِّنَ الۡمُشۡرِکِیۡنَ ۙ وَرَسُوۡلُہٗ ۚ فَاِنۡ تُبۡتُمۡ فَہُوَ خَیۡرٌ لَّکُمۡ ۖ وَاِنۡ تَوَلَّیۡتُمۡ فَاعۡلَمُوۡۤا اَنَّکُمۡ غَیۡرُ مُعۡجِزِی اللّٰہِ ۗ وَبَشِّرِ الَّذِیۡنَ کَفَرُوۡا بِعَذَابٍ اَلِیۡمٍ
حَجِّ اَکبر عام طور پر اُس حج کو کہتے ہیں جو جمعہ کو ہو۔ مگر اس جگہ مراد اُس حج سے ہے جو فتح مکہ کے دوسرے سال ہوا اور اسے حَجِّ اَکبرِ اس لئے کہا گیا ہے کہ پہلے سالوں میں حج کفار کی حکومت میں ہوتے تھے‘ مگر یہ پہلا حج تھا جو اسلامی حکومت میں ہوا۔
See 9:2.
4:139.
Adhan means, notification, proclamation or call (Lane).
Greater Pilgrimage was so called because it was the first pilgrimage performed under the control of the Muslims.
Whereas in the preceding verse Bara’ah signifies a declaration of vindication that the promises about the complete triumph of Islam had been fulfilled, in the present verse the word signifies "being clear of a person or a thing," i.e. having nothing to do with him or it (Lane). The declaration, contained in this verse and the one that follows is different from that embodied in vv. 9:1, 2; for whereas vv. 9:1, 2 relate to vindication that the promises made to the idolaters by the Holy Prophet had been fulfilled, the present verse pertains to the severance of all connections with them. This severance of relations should not be taken to mean that the verse declares that Muslims were free from all treaty obligations; for, as the following verse makes it quite clear, treaties are to be respected in all cases and must not be violated.
On his return from Tabuk in the ninth year of the Hijrah, the Holy Prophet sent ‘Ali to Mecca, who, on the occasion of the Greater Pilgrimage, made, as his represe
9:2.
4:139.
Important Words:
اذان (proclamation) is derived from اذن which means, he gave ear or listened; he permitted or allowed; he knew or he became informed, etc. آذن means, he informed, or notified or announced. اذان means, notification, announcement or call.
بری (clear) see 9:1 above. But whereas in that verse the word signifies absolution from obligations and from fulfilment of promises made by Islam, in the present verse it simply signifies being clear of a person or a thing, i.e. having nothing to do with him or it (Lane).
Commentary:
The declaration, contained in this verse and the one that follows, is different from that embodied in 9:1 & 2 above, for whereas vv. 9:1 & 2 relate to absolution from the fulfilment of promises made to idolaters, the present verse pertains to the severance of connections with them. This severance, however, should not be taken to mean that the verse declares Islam to be free from all treaty obligations; for, as the following verse makes it clear, treaties are to be respected in all cases and must not be violated.
It is related that on his return from Tabuk in the ninth year of the Hijrah, the Holy Prophet sent Abu Bakr to Mecca to announce, on the occasion of the Greater Pilgrimage, that henceforward no one would be allowed to perform the circuit of the Ka‘bah naked or unclothed. Immediately afterwards the first portion of this Surah was revealed. Upon this the Holy Prophet sent ‘Ali to Mecca, and he, as his cousin and representative, after reciting the opening verses of this Surah, made a proclamation containing the following two announcements before the pilgrims who had gathered at Mecca from all parts of Arabia:
1. No idolater shall approach the House of God after this year.
2. Treaties and engagements, made by the Holy Prophet with idolatrous tribes, shall stand and be faithfully respected till the end of their term. The idolaters of Arabia and the hypocrites of Medina had, by their plots and conspiracies against Muslims and by their persistent treacherous conduct, lost all claim to the clemency of the Holy Prophet. When he was absent on the expedition to Tabuk, they spread the false rumour that the whole Muslim army had been captured and the Prophet was dead. Moreover, Abu ‘Amir, a mischievous Arab leader, had gone to Syria to bring a Christian army to attack Muslims and in Arabia itself secret preparations had begun for a general rising. But for the timely return of the Holy Prophet, these plots would have resulted in great disturbance and heavy loss of life. When, on his return, the Holy Prophet learnt of the great mischief, set on foot in his absence and the plots hatched to deal a death-blow to Islam, he, with a view to preventing a recrudescence of such mischief ordered that henceforth no idolater could stay in the Hijaz with the exception of those with whom he had entered into a treaty, and these, too, were allowed to stay only till the expiry of the term of their treaty. The order was justified not only by the persistently treacherous conduct of the idolaters, but also by other political and cultural considerations which demanded its promulgation. The Hijaz had now become the religious as well as the political centre of Islam, and its interests demanded that it should be purged of all foreign and harmful elements likely to endanger its integrity and prove dangerous to the nascent Muslim community which had been brought into being to carry the message of the new Faith to the four corners of the earth.
b
9:2.
c
4:139.
554A
这是在穆斯林管理下第一次朝觐。
1
حَجِّ اَکبر عام طور پر اُس حج کو کہتے ہیں جو جمعہ کو ہو۔ مگر اس جگہ مراد اُس حج سے ہے جو فتح مکہ کے دوسرے سال ہوا اور اسے حَجِّ اَکبرِ اس لئے کہا گیا ہے کہ پہلے سالوں میں حج کفار کی حکومت میں ہوتے تھے‘ مگر یہ پہلا حج تھا جو اسلامی حکومت میں ہوا۔
b
9:2.
c
4:139.
1166
Important Words:
اذان (proclamation) is derived from اذن which means, he gave ear or listened; he permitted or allowed; he knew or he became informed, etc. آذن means, he informed, or notified or announced. اذان means, notification, announcement or call.
بری (clear) see 9:1 above. But whereas in that verse the word signifies absolution from obligations and from fulfilment of promises made by Islam, in the present verse it simply signifies being clear of a person or a thing, i.e. having nothing to do with him or it (Lane).
Commentary:
The declaration, contained in this verse and the one that follows, is different from that embodied in 9:1 & 2 above, for whereas vv. 9:1 & 2 relate to absolution from the fulfilment of promises made to idolaters, the present verse pertains to the severance of connections with them. This severance, however, should not be taken to mean that the verse declares Islam to be free from all treaty obligations; for, as the following verse makes it clear, treaties are to be respected in all cases and must not be violated.
It is related that on his return from Tabuk in the ninth year of the Hijrah, the Holy Prophet sent Abu Bakr to Mecca to announce, on the occasion of the Greater Pilgrimage, that henceforward no one would be allowed to perform the circuit of the Ka‘bah naked or unclothed. Immediately afterwards the first portion of this Surah was revealed. Upon this the Holy Prophet sent ‘Ali to Mecca, and he, as his cousin and representative, after reciting the opening verses of this Surah, made a proclamation containing the following two announcements before the pilgrims who had gathered at Mecca from all parts of Arabia:
1. No idolater shall approach the House of God after this year.
2. Treaties and engagements, made by the Holy Prophet with idolatrous tribes, shall stand and be faithfully respected till the end of their term. The idolaters of Arabia and the hypocrites of Medina had, by their plots and conspiracies against Muslims and by their persistent treacherous conduct, lost all claim to the clemency of the Holy Prophet. When he was absent on the expedition to Tabuk, they spread the false rumour that the whole Muslim army had been captured and the Prophet was dead. Moreover, Abu ‘Amir, a mischievous Arab leader, had gone to Syria to bring a Christian army to attack Muslims and in Arabia itself secret preparations had begun for a general rising. But for the timely return of the Holy Prophet, these plots would have resulted in great disturbance and heavy loss of life. When, on his return, the Holy Prophet learnt of the great mischief, set on foot in his absence and the plots hatched to deal a death-blow to Islam, he, with a view to preventing a recrudescence of such mischief ordered that henceforth no idolater could stay in the Hijaz with the exception of those with whom he had entered into a treaty, and these, too, were allowed to stay only till the expiry of the term of their treaty. The order was justified not only by the persistently treacherous conduct of the idolaters, but also by other political and cultural considerations which demanded its promulgation. The Hijaz had now become the religious as well as the political centre of Islam, and its interests demanded that it should be purged of all foreign and harmful elements likely to endanger its integrity and prove dangerous to the nascent Muslim community which had been brought into being to carry the message of the new Faith to the four corners of the earth.
a
See 9:2.
b
4:139.
1153
Adhan means, notification, proclamation or call (Lane).
1153A
Greater Pilgrimage was so called because it was the first pilgrimage performed under the control of the Muslims.
1154
Whereas in the preceding verse Bara’ah signifies a declaration of vindication that the promises about the complete triumph of Islam had been fulfilled, in the present verse the word signifies "being clear of a person or a thing," i.e. having nothing to do with him or it (Lane). The declaration, contained in this verse and the one that follows is different from that embodied in vv. 9:1, 2; for whereas vv. 9:1, 2 relate to vindication that the promises made to the idolaters by the Holy Prophet had been fulfilled, the present verse pertains to the severance of all connections with them. This severance of relations should not be taken to mean that the verse declares that Muslims were free from all treaty obligations; for, as the following verse makes it quite clear, treaties are to be respected in all cases and must not be violated.
On his return from Tabuk in the ninth year of the Hijrah, the Holy Prophet sent ‘Ali to Mecca, who, on the occasion of the Greater Pilgrimage, made, as his represe
فَاِذَا انۡسَلَخَ الۡاَشۡہُرُ الۡحُرُمُ فَاقۡتُلُوا الۡمُشۡرِکِیۡنَ حَیۡثُ وَجَدتُّمُوۡہُمۡ وَخُذُوۡہُمۡ وَاحۡصُرُوۡہُمۡ وَاقۡعُدُوۡا لَہُمۡ کُلَّ مَرۡصَدٍ ۚ فَاِنۡ تَابُوۡا وَاَقَامُوا الصَّلٰوۃَ وَاٰتَوُا الزَّکٰوۃَ فَخَلُّوۡا سَبِیۡلَہُمۡ ۚ اِنَّ اللّٰہَ غَفُوۡرٌ رَّحِیۡمٌ
7:157; 9:11.
“禁战的四个月” 是伊历十一月、十二月, 一月、七月, 前面三个月是大朝觐月, 而最后一个月阿拉伯人一般用它完成小朝 (عُمْرَة, ‘Umrah) 活动 (2:195和2:218)。اَشْهُرُالْحُرُمْ (Ashhurul-Hurum) 并不意指 “圣月”, 而是 “禁月”, 指的是以上9:2所谈到的四个月。在这四个月中, 上述的多神教徒可以得到保护, 去各处旅行, 亲眼看看是否伊斯兰教已经胜利, 是否安拉的话已经实现。在这一时期结束时, (在这一时期内所有敌对行动都暂时停止, )对那些伊斯兰教的死敌恢复战争, 因为他们开始了敌对行动和不断地破坏了他们的誓言。这种最后通牒的理由, 见9:8-13节经文。至於那些没有背信弃义的多神教徒, 他们是得到保护的 (9:4, 7)。
那些和穆斯林作战过但还没有要求同他们签订新条约的多神教徒。
即使是那些伊斯兰教的敌人, 在他们手中穆斯林受过非常严重的损失, 如果他们悔改并自愿接受伊斯兰教, 可以得到宽恕。事实上, 有大量多神教徒在心底里相信伊斯兰教的真理, 可是或者由於自负, 或者害怕迫害, 或者由於其他种种考虑, 没能公开承认信仰。这节经文使这种人确信, 如果他们之中任何一个即使在战时宣称他信仰伊斯兰教, 他的 (承诺) 声明不会被认为是虚假的, 或者把它当作安然逃脱的行动。
یعنی مقررہ چار مہینے جن میں ان کو ملک میں پھرنے کی اجازت دی گئی ہے۔
اس سے یہ نتیجہ نہیں نکلتا کہ کفار سے اس وقت تک لڑنا چاہیے جب تک کہ وہ مسلمان نہ ہو جائیں کیونکہ اس جگہ عام کفار کا ذکر نہیں بلکہ ان کفار کا ذکر ہے جو آٹھ سال تک رسول کریم صلی اللہ علیہ وسلم سے لڑتے رہے اور مکہ فتح ہو جانے پر بھی معاہدہ کرنے کی طرف توجہ نہ کی۔
7:157; 9:11.
"The forbidden months" are the four months of Dhul-Qa‘dah, Dhul- Hijjah, Muharram and Rajab, the first three being the months of the Greater Pilgrimage, while in the last the Arabs generally performed the Lesser Pilgrimage or ‘Umrah (2:195 & 2:218). The term Ashhurul-Hurum does not signify "sacred months" but "forbidden months" and refers to the four months mentioned in 9:2 above. In these months the above-mentioned idolaters were granted protection to travel through the land and see for themselves whether Islam had not triumphed and whether the word of God had not been fulfilled. At the end of this period, during which all hostilities were to remain suspended, war was to be resumed against such avowed enemies of Islam as had themselves started hostilities and had repeatedly broken their plighted word. The reason for this ultimatum is given in vv. 9:8-13. As for those idolaters who had not been guilty of faithlessness and treachery, they were to be protecte
Those idolaters who had fought with the Muslims and had not yet asked for a fresh treaty with them.
Even those enemies of Islam at whose hands Muslims had suffered very grievous losses were to be forgiven if they repented and accepted Islam of their own free will. In fact, there was a large number of men among the idolaters who, in their heart of hearts, had been convinced of the truth of Islam, but who, either through pride or for fear of persecution or other considerations, had refrained from making open confession of faith. This verse assured such people that if anyone of them declared his faith in Islam even during the war, his confession would not be taken as hypocritical or as having been made to save his skin.
7:157; 9:11.
Commentary:
The term الاشھر الحرم is generally applied to the four sacred months of Shawwal, Dhul-Qa‘dah, Dhul-Hijjah and Rajab, the first three being the months of the Greater Pilgrimage, while in the last the Arabs generally performed the Lesser Pilgrimage or ‘Umrah (see notes on 2:195 and 2:218). In this verse, however, the words الاشھر الحرم signify not the "sacred months", but "forbidden months" and refer to the four months mentioned in 9:2 above. These were meant to grant a respite to idolaters to travel through the land in safety and see whether Islam had not triumphed and whether the Word of God had not proved true. At the end of this period, during which all hostilities were to be suspended, war was to be resumed against the idolatrous Arabs with the exception, of course, of such as had entered into a treaty with Muslims, and the treacherous and faithless idolaters already at war with Muslims were to be captured and killed wherever found. It should, however, be remembered that the command to wage war after the expiry of the four forbidden months did not apply to all idolaters without discrimination, but was directed only against such avowed enemies of Islam as had themselves started hostilities against Islam and had broken their plighted word and plotted to expel the Holy Prophet from the city. The reason for this ultimatum is given in the following few verses, viz. 9:8-13. As for those idolaters who had been guilty of faithlessness and treachery, they were to be protected (see 9:4, 7). It is highly regrettable, however, that, divorcing this commandment from its context, some critics have made this verse the basis for an attack against Islam, alleging that it inculcates the destruction of all non-Muslims. The Quran and history belie this baseless allegation.
The words, and lie in wait for them at every place of ambush, mean that a strict watch should be kept over the movements of the enemy that he may not be able to create mischief and carry on malicious propaganda against Muslims. The very words of the verse point to the existence of a great danger. These times were indeed very hard for Muslims. On the one hand, the Eastern Roman Empire was preparing to attack them and, on the other, the internal enemies of Islam were hatching plots to bring about its downfall.
The words, But if they repent..., show that even those enemies of Islam at whose hands Muslims had suffered such grievous losses were to be forgiven, if they repented and accepted Islam of their own free will. That no compulsion was to be used is clear from the very next verse, as also from the fundamental injunction laid down in 2:257. The truth is that there was a large number of men among the idolaters who, in their heart of hearts, believed in the truth of Islam, but who, either through pride or for fear of others or for other reasons, refrained from making an open confession of faith. This verse was intended to convey to such people that if anyone of them declared his faith in Islam even during the war, his confession would not be taken as hypocritical or as made to save his skin. A conclusive proof of the fact, that there were many among idolaters who were at heart inclined to Islam but were afraid to declare their faith openly owing to fear of persecution, is that whenever war ceased, there was a rush for conversion to Islam. The two years of peace that followed the Treaty of Hudaibiyyah brought over a very large number of disbelievers to Islam. They could not have joined Islam in such large numbers if they had not been believers in their hearts, having been held back only by fear of persecution. There are even cases on record of men accepting Islam in the thick of battle. Muslims did not at first spare such men, thinking that they had done so merely to save their lives. The Holy Prophet, however, took such Muslims severely to the task, asking them if they had torn open the hearts of those people and had satisfied themselves that they were really devoid of sincerity. It is for this reason that the Quran directs Muslims not to harm such men from among the idolaters as profess their faith in Islam and observe the commandments of God, for only God knows whether they are true Muslims or not.
"Merciful" at the end of the verse shows that the conduct of idolaters had been such as to make them deserving of the severest of punishment, and that to extend forgiveness to them even on their abandonment of idolatry was really an act of mercy.
a
7:157; 9:11.
555
“禁战的四个月” 是伊历十一月、十二月, 一月、七月, 前面三个月是大朝觐月, 而最后一个月阿拉伯人一般用它完成小朝 (عُمْرَة, ‘Umrah) 活动 (2:195和2:218)。اَشْهُرُالْحُرُمْ (Ashhurul-Hurum) 并不意指 “圣月”, 而是 “禁月”, 指的是以上9:2所谈到的四个月。在这四个月中, 上述的多神教徒可以得到保护, 去各处旅行, 亲眼看看是否伊斯兰教已经胜利, 是否安拉的话已经实现。在这一时期结束时, (在这一时期内所有敌对行动都暂时停止, )对那些伊斯兰教的死敌恢复战争, 因为他们开始了敌对行动和不断地破坏了他们的誓言。这种最后通牒的理由, 见9:8-13节经文。至於那些没有背信弃义的多神教徒, 他们是得到保护的 (9:4, 7)。
556
那些和穆斯林作战过但还没有要求同他们签订新条约的多神教徒。
557
即使是那些伊斯兰教的敌人, 在他们手中穆斯林受过非常严重的损失, 如果他们悔改并自愿接受伊斯兰教, 可以得到宽恕。事实上, 有大量多神教徒在心底里相信伊斯兰教的真理, 可是或者由於自负, 或者害怕迫害, 或者由於其他种种考虑, 没能公开承认信仰。这节经文使这种人确信, 如果他们之中任何一个即使在战时宣称他信仰伊斯兰教, 他的 (承诺) 声明不会被认为是虚假的, 或者把它当作安然逃脱的行动。
2
یعنی مقررہ چار مہینے جن میں ان کو ملک میں پھرنے کی اجازت دی گئی ہے۔
3
اس سے یہ نتیجہ نہیں نکلتا کہ کفار سے اس وقت تک لڑنا چاہیے جب تک کہ وہ مسلمان نہ ہو جائیں کیونکہ اس جگہ عام کفار کا ذکر نہیں بلکہ ان کفار کا ذکر ہے جو آٹھ سال تک رسول کریم صلی اللہ علیہ وسلم سے لڑتے رہے اور مکہ فتح ہو جانے پر بھی معاہدہ کرنے کی طرف توجہ نہ کی۔
b
7:157; 9:11.
1168
Commentary:
The term الاشھر الحرم is generally applied to the four sacred months of Shawwal, Dhul-Qa‘dah, Dhul-Hijjah and Rajab, the first three being the months of the Greater Pilgrimage, while in the last the Arabs generally performed the Lesser Pilgrimage or ‘Umrah (see notes on 2:195 and 2:218). In this verse, however, the words الاشھر الحرم signify not the "sacred months", but "forbidden months" and refer to the four months mentioned in 9:2 above. These were meant to grant a respite to idolaters to travel through the land in safety and see whether Islam had not triumphed and whether the Word of God had not proved true. At the end of this period, during which all hostilities were to be suspended, war was to be resumed against the idolatrous Arabs with the exception, of course, of such as had entered into a treaty with Muslims, and the treacherous and faithless idolaters already at war with Muslims were to be captured and killed wherever found. It should, however, be remembered that the command to wage war after the expiry of the four forbidden months did not apply to all idolaters without discrimination, but was directed only against such avowed enemies of Islam as had themselves started hostilities against Islam and had broken their plighted word and plotted to expel the Holy Prophet from the city. The reason for this ultimatum is given in the following few verses, viz. 9:8-13. As for those idolaters who had been guilty of faithlessness and treachery, they were to be protected (see 9:4, 7). It is highly regrettable, however, that, divorcing this commandment from its context, some critics have made this verse the basis for an attack against Islam, alleging that it inculcates the destruction of all non-Muslims. The Quran and history belie this baseless allegation.
The words, and lie in wait for them at every place of ambush, mean that a strict watch should be kept over the movements of the enemy that he may not be able to create mischief and carry on malicious propaganda against Muslims. The very words of the verse point to the existence of a great danger. These times were indeed very hard for Muslims. On the one hand, the Eastern Roman Empire was preparing to attack them and, on the other, the internal enemies of Islam were hatching plots to bring about its downfall.
The words, But if they repent..., show that even those enemies of Islam at whose hands Muslims had suffered such grievous losses were to be forgiven, if they repented and accepted Islam of their own free will. That no compulsion was to be used is clear from the very next verse, as also from the fundamental injunction laid down in 2:257. The truth is that there was a large number of men among the idolaters who, in their heart of hearts, believed in the truth of Islam, but who, either through pride or for fear of others or for other reasons, refrained from making an open confession of faith. This verse was intended to convey to such people that if anyone of them declared his faith in Islam even during the war, his confession would not be taken as hypocritical or as made to save his skin. A conclusive proof of the fact, that there were many among idolaters who were at heart inclined to Islam but were afraid to declare their faith openly owing to fear of persecution, is that whenever war ceased, there was a rush for conversion to Islam. The two years of peace that followed the Treaty of Hudaibiyyah brought over a very large number of disbelievers to Islam. They could not have joined Islam in such large numbers if they had not been believers in their hearts, having been held back only by fear of persecution. There are even cases on record of men accepting Islam in the thick of battle. Muslims did not at first spare such men, thinking that they had done so merely to save their lives. The Holy Prophet, however, took such Muslims severely to the task, asking them if they had torn open the hearts of those people and had satisfied themselves that they were really devoid of sincerity. It is for this reason that the Quran directs Muslims not to harm such men from among the idolaters as profess their faith in Islam and observe the commandments of God, for only God knows whether they are true Muslims or not.
"Merciful" at the end of the verse shows that the conduct of idolaters had been such as to make them deserving of the severest of punishment, and that to extend forgiveness to them even on their abandonment of idolatry was really an act of mercy.
a
7:157; 9:11.
1155A
"The forbidden months" are the four months of Dhul-Qa‘dah, Dhul- Hijjah, Muharram and Rajab, the first three being the months of the Greater Pilgrimage, while in the last the Arabs generally performed the Lesser Pilgrimage or ‘Umrah (2:195 & 2:218). The term Ashhurul-Hurum does not signify "sacred months" but "forbidden months" and refers to the four months mentioned in 9:2 above. In these months the above-mentioned idolaters were granted protection to travel through the land and see for themselves whether Islam had not triumphed and whether the word of God had not been fulfilled. At the end of this period, during which all hostilities were to remain suspended, war was to be resumed against such avowed enemies of Islam as had themselves started hostilities and had repeatedly broken their plighted word. The reason for this ultimatum is given in vv. 9:8-13. As for those idolaters who had not been guilty of faithlessness and treachery, they were to be protecte
1156
Those idolaters who had fought with the Muslims and had not yet asked for a fresh treaty with them.
1157
Even those enemies of Islam at whose hands Muslims had suffered very grievous losses were to be forgiven if they repented and accepted Islam of their own free will. In fact, there was a large number of men among the idolaters who, in their heart of hearts, had been convinced of the truth of Islam, but who, either through pride or for fear of persecution or other considerations, had refrained from making open confession of faith. This verse assured such people that if anyone of them declared his faith in Islam even during the war, his confession would not be taken as hypocritical or as having been made to save his skin.
فَاِنۡ تَابُوۡا وَاَقَامُوا الصَّلٰوۃَ وَاٰتَوُا الزَّکٰوۃَ فَاِخۡوٰنُکُمۡ فِی الدِّیۡنِ ۗ وَنُفَصِّلُ الۡاٰیٰتِ لِقَوۡمٍ یَّعۡلَمُوۡنَ
7:154; 9:5.
7:154; 9:5.
7:154; 9:5.
Commentary:
The words, they are your brethren in faith, mean that not only should all hostilities cease against such disbelievers as repent, but they are to be looked upon as brethren and treated as such. See also note on 9:5, above.
a
7:154; 9:5.
a
7:154; 9:5.
1174
Commentary:
The words, they are your brethren in faith, mean that not only should all hostilities cease against such disbelievers as repent, but they are to be looked upon as brethren and treated as such. See also note on 9:5, above.
b
7:154; 9:5.